Home

Mini User Manual MEHT530

1. stop Running status This shows the running status as a hexadecimal display Refer to Displaying running status in Section 3 3 3 Monitoring the running status Cc rig LLL I Accumulated running time Shows the cumulative power ON time of the inverter Unit thousands of hours When the total ON time is less than 10 000 hours display 0 001 to 9 999 it is possible to check data in hourly units When the total time is 10 000 hours or more display 10 00 to 65 53 the display will change to units of 10 hours When the total time exceeds 65 535 hours the display returns to 0 and the count will start again L oru L _ LILI No of startups The motor run times the number of times the inverter run command is set to ON are calculated and displayed 1 000 indicates 1 000 times When any number from 0 001 to 9 999 is displayed the display increases by 0 001 per startup and when any number from 10 00 to 65 53 is displayed the display increases by 0 01 every 10 startups DC link bus voltage Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter s main circuit Unit V volts Max temperature of heat sink Shows the maximum temperature of the heat sink Unit C Terminal I O signal status displayed with the ON OFF of LED segments Terminal input signal status in hexadecimal format Terminal output signal status in hexadecimal display Shows the ON OFF status of the digital
2. Braking unit Not required Notes 1 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on enclosure em amp Note This braking resistor is not suitable for use with the 460V class of inverters m r m O mn Z 9 U m D T T r m o c T m Z 2 DC reactors DCRs A DCR is mainly used for power supply normalization and for supplied power factor improvement for reducing harmonic components E For power supply normalization UseaDCR when the capacity of a power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more the rated inverter capacity In this case the percentage reactance of the power source decreases and harmonic components and their peak levels increase These factors may break rectifiers or capacitors in the converter section of inverter or decrease the capacitance of the capacitor which can shorten the inverter s service life Also use a DCR when there are thyristor driven loads or when phase advancing capacitors are being turned ON OFF Use a DCR when the interphase voltage unbalance ratio of the inverter power source exceeds 2 Max voltage V Min voltage V ole 3 phase average voltage V Interphase voltage unbalance 7 E For supplied power factor improvement for suppressing harmonics Generally a capacitor is used to improve the power factor of the load however it cannot be used in a system that includes a
3. Pressing the e key before the e key cancels the change made to the data The data reverts to the previous value the display returns to the function code list and the original function code reappears Press the e key to return to the menu from the function code list Cursor movement You may move the cursor when changing function code data in the same way as with the frequency settings Refer to Section 3 2 2 Set up the set frequency and others 3 3 Programming Mode 3 3 2 Checking changed function codes Data Checking Menu 2 Data checking in Programming mode allows you to check function code data that have been changed Only data that has been changed from the factory defaults are displayed on the LED monitor You may refer to the function code data and change again if necessary Figure 3 6 shows the status transition diagram for Data checking Power ON c Running DA ne ca Oo m D E wo 3 o iS N C Function code data Furey Gas Prep R 3 4 Q x4 QIVdA3 AHL ONISN NOILVYAdO n ui mE R AUE Exe DATI Save data and go to the next function code Fume eww 200 PRG Ems Es Go to the next function code E f es Esk TA 2 E ES Go to the next w function code Pressing the G9 key when the D data is displayed will take you back to FLi i Figure 3 6 Da
4. C05 multistep frequency 1 C06 multistep frequency 2 C07 multistep frequency 3 C08 multistep frequency 4 C09 multistep frequency 5 C10 multistep frequency 6 C11 multistep frequency 7 m Select ACC DEC time 2 steps RT1 Function code data 4 Digital input signal RT1 assigned to the specified terminal ON OFF may switch combinations between acceleration deceleration time 1 defined by function codes F07 and F08 and acceleration deceleration time 2 defined by E10 and E11 Turning RT1 ON for example enables the inverter to drive the motor using acceleration deceleration time 2 Selected acceleration deceleration time F07 Acceleration time 1 F08 Deceleration time 1 E10 Acceleration time 2 E11 Deceleration time 2 The above acceleration deceleration time switching takes effect also in S curved or AUP curvilinear operation defined by H07 9 2 Details of Function Codes m Enable 3 wire operation HLD Function code data 6 Digital input signal HLD may self hold the forward FWD reverse REV run etn ey commands given at the external signal input terminals to enable 3 wire inverter operation Shorting the circuit between the HLD assigned terminal and terminal REV i CM will self hold the FWD or REV command Opening the circuit will HLD E E release the hold Reverse ignored FWD If HLD is not
5. Inverter efficiency is calculated using values suitable for each inverter model The input route mean square RMS current is calculated according to the following conditions Power source capacity 500 kVA power source internal impedance 5 The current listed in the above table will vary in inverse proportion to the power supply voltage such as 230 VAC and 380 VAC The braking current is always constant independent of braking resistor specifications including built in standard and 10 ED models m m O zi z 9 U m D T T r m o c T m z 6 3 6 2 1 Recommended wires Tables 6 2 and 6 3 list the recommended wires according to the internal temperature of your power control cabinet E If the internal temperature of your power control cabinet is 50 C 122 F or below Table 6 2 Wire Size for main circuit power input and inverter output Recommended wire size inch mm qd Power pre oe power mpa LIR 12 5 7 lt HES Inverter output U V W aie ere rating wn voltage Allowable temp 1 Current Allowable temp 1 Current Allowable temp 1 Current HP 60 C 75 C 90 C 60 C 75 C 90 C 60 C 75 C 90 C 140 F 167 F 194 F A 140 F 167 F 194 F A 140 F 167 F 194 F A Three phase FRNFI2CIM 2U 0 8 FRNF25CIM 2U 1 5 FRNFS50CIM 2U j 3 0 FRNOOICINMI 2U 0 003 0 003 0 003 5 5 FRNO
6. A load including the integral component in the equipment to be controlled may oscillate from the action of the integral component if the P control alone is applied In this case use PD control to reduce the oscillation caused by P control for keeping the system stable That is PD control should be applied to any system that does not contain any braking actions in its process 9 67 c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo 3 PID control PID control is implemented by combining P control with the deviation suppression of I control and the oscillation suppression of D control PID control features minimal control deviation high precision and high stability In particular applying PID control to any system that has a long response time to the occurrence of deviation will yield excellent results Follow the procedure below to set PID data It is highly recommended that the PID control amount is selected and set while monitoring the system response waveform with an oscilloscope or equivalent Repeat following procedure to identify the optimal solution for each system Increase the data to be set to function code J03 PID gain in the range where the feedback signal does not oscillate Decrease the data to be set to function code J04 PID integration time in the range where the feedback signal does not oscillate Increase the data to be set to function code J05 PID differentiation time in the range where the feedback signa
7. Trip after recovery of power Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred Restart at the start frequency If the inverter detects that the DC link bus voltage drops less than the specified undervoltage limit it interprets the state as an occurrence of an instantaneous power failure However if the inverter runs with a light load and the period of the power failure is short then it does not detect the power failure and continues to run 9 19 m Trip immediately F14 0 If an instantaneous power failure occurs when the inverter is in Running mode so that the inverter detects undervoltage of the DC link bus then the inverter immediately shuts down its outputs and displays the undervoltage alarm on the LED monitor The motor will coast to a stop and the inverter will not restart automatically m Trip after recovery of power F14 1 If an instantaneous power failure occurs when the inverter is in Running mode so that the inverter detects undervoltage of the DC link bus then the inverter immediately shuts down its outputs without transferring to Alarm mode or displaying the undervoltage alarm The motor will coast to a stop When the power 1s recovered the inverter will enter Alarm mode for undervoltage This setting 1s used when you run stop the motor by turning the inverter power on off with any run command being on Turning off the controller power with the power switch will not ca
8. i ot i e d 450 er h v ul 480 dar 200 i t i 250 gt Figure 7 2 Output Torque Characteristics Base frequency 60 Hz 1 Continuous allowable driving torque Curve a in Figures 7 1 and 7 2 Curve a shows the torque characteristic that can be obtained in the range of the inverter continuous rated current where the motor cooling characteristic is taken into consideration When the motor runs at the base frequency of 60 Hz 100 output torque can be obtained at 50 Hz the output torque is somewhat lower than that in commercial power and it further lowers at lower frequencies The reduction of the output torque at 50 Hz is due to increased loss by inverter driving and that at lower frequencies is mainly due to heat generation caused by the decreased ventilation performance of the motor cooling fan 2 Maximum driving torque in a short time Curves b and c in Figures 7 1 and 7 2 Curve b shows the torque characteristic that can be obtained in the range of the inverter rated current in a short time the output torque is 150 for one minute when torque vector control is enabled At that time the motor cooling characteristics have little effect on the output torque Curve c shows an example of the torque characteristic when one class higher capacity inverter is used to increase the short time maximum torque In this case the short time torque is 20 to 30 g
9. 4 4 Terminal Command Decoders Programmable digital input terminals X1 X2 X3 FWD and REV can be assigned to internal terminal commands such as FWD or REV decoded by data settings of related function codes as shown in the block diagrams in Figures 4 3 a through 4 3 d In the decoders negative logic input signals are also applicable if you set data of 1000s to the function code The contents of the block diagram are divided into five groups depending on whether inputs are assigned for the same internal terminal commands respectively or the commands issued from the communications facility linked operation specify the internal commands Each of the diagrams shown in Figure 4 3 has following role Figure 4 3 a Figure 4 3 b Figure 4 3 c Figure 4 3 d Figure 4 3 d The terminal command decoder general shows the decoding process of the internal commands functioning with the negative logic inputs This is switchable with inputs from the communications facility for example link operation commands received through RS 485 communications The terminal command decoder terminal signal inputs shows the process to decode internal terminal commands dedicated to the control signal input applied to the inverter s terminal block These commands cannot be changed via the communications facility link operation command The terminal command decoder terminal signal input excluding negative logic shows process to
10. FRNO05C1S 2U FRNO05C1S 4U FRNO003CIS 7U 21 braking resistor built in type No number standard type The built in braking resistor models are available for inverters of 2 HP or higher FVROOSE11S 2U FVROOSE11S 4U FVRO03E11S 7U 6 4 Selecting Options 2 Rail mounting bases A rail mounting base allows any of the FRENIC Mini series of inverter to be mounted on a DIN rail 1 38 in 35 mm wide Table 6 17 Rail Mounting Base Option model Applicable inverter type RMA C1 0 75 FRNF12C1S 2U FRNF25CIS 2U FRNF50CIS 2U FRN001CIS 2U FRNF12C1S 7U FRNF25CIS 7U FRNF50CIS 7U FRN001CIS 7U FRNF12C1E 2U FRNF25CIE 2U FRNF50CIE 2U FRNO001CIE 2U FRNFI2CIE 7U FRNF25C1E 7U FRNF50CIE 7U RMA CI 2 2 FRNO002CIS 2U FRNO003CIS 2U FRNF50C1S 4U FRNO01C1S 4U ZZZ ee jJ FRNOO2CIS 4U 11 FRNOO3CIS AU FRNOO2CIS 7U H FRNF50C1E 4U FRN001C1E 4U FRN001C1E 7U RMA C1 3 7 FRN005C1S 2U FRNO05C1S 4U FRNO03C1S 7U FRN002CIE 2U FRN003CIE 2U FRNOOSC1E 2U FRNO002C1E 4U FRN003CIE 4U FRNOOSC1E 4U FRNOOSC1E 4U FRNO002C1E 7U FRNO003CIE 7U m m O zi z 9 U m D T T r m o c T m z Z Note 1 Asterisks in the model names replace numbers which denote the following 21 braking resistor built in type No number standard type The built in braking resistor models are available
11. OFF level Operation current at ON E 5 4kQ Input voltage at 0 V FWD REV current at OFF Related function codes PLC signal power Connects to PLC output signal power supply Rated voltage 24 VDC Maximum output current 50 mA Digital common Common for digital input signals Isolated from terminals 11 and Y1E a gS s on oI a 8 4 Terminal Specifications Related function codes C Tip W Turning ON or OFF X1 X2 X3 FWD or REV using a relay contact Figure 8 3 shows two examples of a circuit that turns ON or OFF control signal input X1 X2 X3 FWD or REV using a relay contact Circuit a has a connecting jumper applied to SINK whereas circuit b has it applied to SOURCE NOTE To configure this kind of circuit use a highly reliable relay Recommended product Fuji control relay Model HH54PW Functions Control circuit Control circuit A TiPLG n PIPL raul ww SINK lt I i ren s eX eT OH SOURCE _ LU i LTT 4kQ x1HX3 e psit E f m 29 l L FWD REV Photocoupler FWD REV Photocoupler CM a With a jumper applied to SINK Tte b With a jumper applied to SOURCE Figure 8 3 Circuit Configuration Using a Relay Contact W Turning ON or OFF X1 X2 X3 FWD or REV
12. The table below lists the menus letters that will appear on the LED monitor and functions The leftmost digit numerals of each letter string indicates the corresponding menu number and the remaining three digits indicate the menu contents When the inverter enters Programming mode from the second time on the menu that was selected last in Programming mode will be displayed Table 3 3 Menus Available in Programming Mode LED monitor shows Main functions Refer to F codes Fundamental functions yog E codes rus Extension terminal functions Selecting E C codes each of these Menu 1 Control functions of frequency ae Section z E Data setting im ae P codes Motor parameters its data to be 3 3 1 1O H codes displayed hen High performance functions changed Li J codes Application functions ie ADS y codes Link functions Menu 2 Displays only function codes that have been Sdelioh Data checking ELTE changed from their factory defaults You may refer 3 32 to or change those function codes data Menu 3 Displays the running information required for Dri I LC Section rive LL ocu c maintenance or test running 3 33 monitoring V Menu 4 LI x Displays external I O signal information Section I O checking No 3 3 4 Menu 5 SEL Displays maintenance information including Sedli h Maintenance 5 LE cumulative running time 335 information one Menu 6 Dis
13. i Three phase 230V 2 to 5 HP v ME FMA Cf PLC X1 X2 X3 LA A tt 42 13 11 cM FWOJREV CM 30A 308 30C i Lb ec DB P1 P Me LuRIL2 S Lsmm ulviwie i FVR C11S vs FRENIC Mini FVR C11S FRENIC Mini Three phase 230 V 1 8 to 5 HP Three phase 230 V 1 8 to 1 HP Ct jeskwiasiane re T E nd x Xx x nv s aei 30A 30B 30C onse ru rs revo e as en Single phase 230 V 1 8 to 3 HP 6 Jeske ew eer Boxen ru se os Pneu a s en iJ Jewoju v wjeg N unl jan v v wies f Y 4 Direction of wire guide A 30 G 3 Function codes App G Replacement Information This section describes the replacement information related to function codes that are required when replacing the conventional inverter series e g FVR C9S and FVR C11S with the FRENIC Mini series It also provides the conversion table for the torque boost setting FVR C9S vs FRENIC Mini FVR C9S FRENIC Mini Name Name code code F00 Foi F02 F03 F04 FO5 F06 F07 Torque boost F09 Torque Boost The data implements other function For details refer to the torque boost setting conversion table on page A 33 F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Select the reduced constant torque using F37 283 Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation F08 Electronic thermal overload r
14. 0 094 60 217 177 154 136 0 156 100 298 244 211 122 187 a N a S 2 N N oO N 0 059 38 197 174 162 132 129 121 102 0 094 60 264 249 234 217 177 173 0 234 150 395 161 248 225 158 0 391 250 556 227 350 316 222 0 508 325 650 266 409 370 260 0 625 400 745 305 469 424 298 0 781 500 842 345 530 479 336 2 x 0 156 100 497 203 313 283 198 2 x 0 234 150 658 269 414 375 263 2 x 0 313 200 782 320 492 445 312 2 x 0 391 250 927 380 584 528 370 2 x 0 508 325 1083 444 682 617 433 2 x 0 625 400 1242 720 509 782 707 496 2 x 0 781 500 1403 575 883 799 687 561 B HIV wires Maximum allowable temperature 75 C 167 F Table F 1 b Allowable Current of Insulated Wires Allowable current Wiring outside duct Wiring in the duct Max 3 wires in one duct Wire size reference value 35 C 95 F 40 C 104 F 45 C 113 F 50 C 122 F 55 C 131 F 35 C 95 F 40 C 104 F 45 C 113 F 50 C 122 F inch mm up to 86 F 30 C lox0 91 lox0 82 lox0 71 10x0 58 lox0 40 lox0 63 lox0 57 lox0 49 lox0 40 lo A A A A A A A A amen w o o a g 7 anes E z nowe s 2 soma r wt 162 0 156 100 363 342 321 298 271 244 238 223 208 187 0 234 150 481 454 426 395 359 323 316 296 276 248 0 313 200 572 539 506 469 426 384 375 351 328 295 0 391 250 678 639 600 556 505 455 444 3
15. 0 6 L1 2 0 Starting frequency 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Braking time 0 0 to 30 0 s Braking level 0 to 100 of rated current Braking DC injection braking Enclosure IEC60529 IP20 UL open type Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling Weight Ibs kg 1 5 0 7 1 5 0 7 L5 07 L amp 08 3 24 5 3 24 6 4 2 9 Fuji 4 pole standard motors 2 The rated capacity is for 230 V output voltage 3 Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 Use the inverter at the current given in or below when the carrier frequency is higher than 4 kHz 77 5 to 5 or the ambient temperature is 40 C 140 F or higher 5 Tested under the standard load condition 85 load for applicable motor rating 6 Calculated under Fuji specified conditions 7 Indicates the value when using a DC reactor option 8 Average braking torque obtained with the AVR control off 7 5 2 7 Varies according to the efficiency of the motor 9 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor standard type available as option Max voltage V Min voltage V 3 phase average voltage V If this value is 2 to 3 96 use an AC reactor ACR 11 Making FRENIC Mini conform to category TYPEI of the UL Standard or NEMA1 requires an optional NEMA kit Note that the TYPE1 listed FRENIC Mini should be used in the ambient temperature range from 10 to 40 C 14 to 104 F 10 Interp
16. Careful site for installation Places around heating machines like furnace constant temperature bath or boiler Enclosed cases or rooms Tropical region or outdoor machinery Cold room or cold region Relative humidity 5 to 95 No condensation Inside of dryer machines for brewing food or wood processing Transportation equipment for frozen food Inside of tunnel Places where there is much ice and snow Places where water or steam is used Dust 2 Clean Foundry cement plant spinning mill fertilizer mill flouring mill iron factory timber mill construction site the places around grinder Salinity Little 0 01 mg cm or less per year Places like coast or shipping that is susceptible to sea salt Oil mist None Places where oil like grinding fluid gets mist Atmosphere Flammable gas Corrosive gas None Altitude 3300 ft 1000 m or lower Chemical factory oil refinery fuel gas facility gas station water treatment plant hot spring region geothermal power station colliery Mountainous region heights Atmospheric pressure Vibration The inverter must not be subjected to sudden changes in temperature tha 86 106 kPa 0 12 inch 3 mm 2 to 9 Hz or lower Max amplitude 32 2 ft s 9 8 m s 9 20 Hz or lower 6 6 ft s 2 0 m s 20 55 Hz or lower 3 3 ft s 1 0 m s 55 200 Hz or lower Vehicle shipping machinery wi
17. H07 Gradual Acceleration 0 Disable Linear Y Y 0 9 56 Deceleration 1 S curve Weak 2 S curve Strong 3 Curvilinear H12 Instantaneous 0 Disable Y Y 1 9 57 Overcurrent Limiting 1 Enable H26 PTC Thermistor Input 0 Disable Y Y 0 1 Enable PTC 9 57 H27 Level 0 00 to 5 00 0 01 V Y Y 1 60 H30 Communications Link Monitor Frequency Run command Y Y 0 9 59 Function selection command source source 0 Y N N t Y RS 485 N 2 N RS 485 3 Y RS 485 RS 485 Y Enable by inverter and via RS 485 communication option RS 485 Enable via RS 485 communication option N Enable by inverter H42 Capacity of DC link bus For adjustment when replacing the capacitor N 9 59 capacitor H43 Accumulated Run For adjustment when replacing the cooling fan N 9 59 Time of Cooling Fan Fuji s standard torque boost Nominal rated current of Fuji standard motor and Nominal rated capacity of Fuji standard motor differ depending upon the rated input voltage and rated capacity Refer to Table 9 1 Fuji Standard Motor Parameters on page 9 11 9 8 9 1 Function Code Tables Change Code Name Data setting range nere Unit when Data perau Refer ment copy setting to running H50 Non linear V f Pattern 0 0 Cancel 0 1 to 400 0 01 Hz N Y 0 0 Frequency H51 Voltage 0 to 240 Output voltage AVR controlled 1 V
18. SEPI LORUN patejs uonearumuuics ave sapco S eut tmon Oro Oro O NO aw LOG M 440 amn Sz4 Aouanbsu4 dois Q CIO O O Q me Wa paubrsse eu jo amea aut sinding pauBisse Joy ez fowsnbai ues Aduenbaly jas P JOSSE ri 1a St 1Q gos pswauuoig POH GuibGop Jo Apes EET lo puewwog uny 1 POH aseajeoy 3 ance GD EN un BONEN Uf NRUN r O4 ol ES jor 7 i IER C EP 201 variado doisiuns 1 iar j aie d I 4 DESAY yb Vg et wah 908 Pago POH BuiBGor soy Apeay CD ydy aria CD r pua una UORSUnd3uf sucnedfununuc I P f o O io 5 Nor o C eee oo D 204 31 uonerado sun dosyuny suoljeoiunuiuuo aiqeu3 Nau a1H Figure 4 2 Drive Command Generator 4 4 4 3 Drive Command Generator The drive command generator shown in Figure 4 2 produces final drive commands FWD Drive the motor in the forward direction and REV Drive the motor in reverse direction from the run commands that are given by various means and modified switched by function codes Additional and supplemental information is given below For the run command given by the Gun 69 key the generator holds the command ON upon depression of the uy key and releases it upon depression of the 69 key except during jogging operation The hold command HLD holds the run forward reverse commands FWD REV unti
19. The FRENIC Mini series features a simplified magnetic flux estimator which is added in the V f pattern processing section This feature automatically controls the voltage level applied to the motor according to the motor load so as to make the motor generate more stable and higher torque even during low speed operation This Simplified Torque Vector Control is unique to Fuji inverters The control logic section which is the very brain of the inverter allows you to customize the inverter s driving patterns using the function code settings LU Refer to Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC for details Main circuit Converter 1 Motor m ae ie ea deceleration processor Frequency setting command processor 3 phase voltage Figure 1 8 Simplified Control System Diagram of FRENIC Mini 1 8 1 3 Recommended Configuration 1 3 Recommended Configuration To control a motor with an inverter correctly you should consider the rated capacity of both the motor and the inverter and ensure that the combination matches the specifications of the machine or system to be used Refer to Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES for details After selecting the rated capacity select appropriate peripheral equipment for the inverter then connect them to the inverter Refer to Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT and Chapter 8 Section 8 7 Connection Diagrams for details on the s
20. The inverter can be operated using a functional combination of STOP key priority and Start check function Data for H96 STOP key priority Disable Start check function Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable STOP key priority Enable When the drive commands are received from the terminals and via RS 485 communication C ae pressing the 6o key forces the inverter to decelerate and stop the motor 275 is displayed on the LED after stopping Start check function For safety this function checks whether any run command has been switched on or not If a run ILL command has been switched on 275 is displayed on the LED without the inverter being started up This occurs in the following situations 1 When any run command is switched on when the power to the inverter switched on 2 When the amp 5 key is pressed to release the alarm status caused by the protective function or the reset alarm command RST is switched on while any run command is input 3 When the run command source has been switched by the link command LE which selects whether to enable or disable communications when a run command is being input at the source that being switched to H97 Clear Alarm Data Clears all alarm information e g historical records and information at time the alarm occurred to return the inverter to default status factory settings 0 Disable
21. Three phase and single phase 230 V 400 VDC three phase 460 V 800 VDC Incoming surge Protects the inverter from surge voltage entering between main circuit power and grounding wires Undervoltage Stops the inverter output by detecting voltage drop In DC link circuit F14 Three phase and single phase 230 V 200 VDC three phase 460 V 800 VDC Details of operation can be selected with the function code F14 1 Input phase loss Stops the inverter output or protects the inverter against input phase loss H88 SL Non operation is also selectable Fi Output phase Stops the inverter output by detecting output phase loss at the start running or during running H98 loss Non operation is also selectable E pilHeat sink Stops the inverter output by detecting inverter heat sink temperature i B E Braking Stops the inverter output and built in braking transistor if dischargina capability or allowable average F50 F51 resistor k __ loss set fot the braking resistor is exceeded more frequently than the set values e Overload Stops the inverter output by detecting the output current and internal temp To calculate the insula A gate bipolar transistor IGBT internal temp Electronic Stops the inverter output for motor protection when the set output current is exceeded Fio to F12 tnermal Thermal time constant can be adjusted 0 5 to 75 0 min Bie A PTC thermistor input stops the inve
22. To calculate the deceleration time check the motor deceleration torque characteristics for the whole range of speed in the same way as for the acceleration time 1 Calculate the moment of inertia for the load and motor Same as for the acceleration time 2 Calculate the minimum deceleration torque See Figures 7 5 and 7 6 Same as for the acceleration time 3 Calculate the deceleration time Assign the value calculated above to the equation 7 11 to calculate the deceleration time in the same way as for the acceleration time If the calculated deceleration time is longer than the requested time select the inverter and motor having one class larger capacity and calculate it again Load torque T Load torque at constant speed Ti Ne Speed Spdedi i OO ee Se Load torque at gt constant speed De Load torque T PUB 71 Minimum deceleration torque Minimum deceleration torque Torque Motor output torque Tm Motor output torque zw Figure 7 5 Example Study of Minimum Figure 7 6 Example Study of Minimum Deceleration Torque 1 Deceleration Torque 2 Braking resistor rating For detailed calculation refer to Section 7 1 3 3 Braking resistor rating is classified into two types according to the braking periodic duty cycle 1 When the periodic duty cycle is shorter than 100 sec Calculate the average loss to determine rated values 2 When the periodic duty cycle is 100 sec or longer
23. ground fault circuit interrupter Magnetic contactor Molded case circuit breaker MCCB or ground fault circuit Magnetic contactor Inverter interrupter GFCI Three phase 1 power supply 9 Xx 230 V T2 M 9 9 Figure 6 2 External Views of Molded Case Circuit Breaker Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Magnetic Contactor and Connection Example 6 8 6 3 Peripheral Equipment Table 6 5 Rated Current of Molded Case Circuit Breaker Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter and Magnetic Contactor P Applicable MCCB GFCI Magnetic contactor type ius motor idein Rated current A MCI for input circuit Magnetic contactor type supply verter type Hd voltage rating DC reactor DCR DC reactor DCR MC2 for output circuit HP w DCR w o DCR w DCR w o DCR 1 8 FRNFI2CIM 2U 1 4 FRNF25CIB 2U Three 1 2 FRNFS50CIM 2U phase 1 FRNOOICIN 2U 10 SC 05 230V 5 FRNOOCIM 2U 15 16 3 FRNOO3CINM 2U 20 Q5 5 FRNOOSCIM 2U 20Q5 30 35 12 FRNFSOCIN 4U Thee 1 FRNOOICIBLAU phase 2 FRNOO2CIMI AU SC 05 460 V 773 FRNOOXCIM AU 15 16 5 FRNOOSCIBI AU 20 Q5 US FRNFIZCIN 7U UA FRNF2SC1M 7U p j V2 FRNFSOCIN 7U 10 T 230 V 1 FRNOOICIB 7U 15 16 2 FRNOO2CIMI 7U 15 16 20 25 3 FRN003CIMI 7U 20 25 30 35 The above table lists the rated current of MCCBs and GFCIs to be used in the power control cabinet with an internal temperature o
24. l DS lt 1000 4 Peto 21000 FWD Normal Negative Logic Selection FWD Q E99 REV Normal Negative Logic Selection l REV too O 105 j 2 1000 vs 4 4 Terminal Command Decoders Enable External Alarm Trip THR Enable Communications Link LE Note Each number shown at switches E01 to E03 E98 and E99 is data in normal logic system Figure 4 3 b Terminal Command Decoder Terminal Signal Inputs FWD REV Run Forward FWD Run Reverse REV Figure 4 3 c Terminal Command Decoder Terminal Signal Input Excluding Negative Logic UJ r Q A z gt D E S n TI E Q O z Az r r O O Enable ixi Communications NormaiiNegative Logic Selection Link LE pul Q Coast to a Stop BX 1X2 xat RST Nomal Negalive Logic amp elechon 03 r 1Q gt 1000 Enable Write from Keypad WE KP FW REV Terminal Command Decoder ORing with Communications Commands Enable 3 wire Ds HLD Ready for Jogging 2 63 Notes Each number shown al switches E01 to E03 E98 and E99 is data in normal logic system The S codes are communication related function codes Refer to the user s manual of RS 485 communication for details Terminal Command Decoder Ignoring Link Commands Figure 4 3 d Terminal Command Decoder ORing with Link Commands Ignoring Link Commands 4 8
25. lox0 63 lox0 57 lox0 49 lo A A A A A A A 2 305 292 279 264 249 234 203 420 402 384 363 342 321 280 268 253 556 533 509 481 454 426 371 355 335 661 633 605 572 539 506 440 422 398 783 750 717 678 639 600 522 500 472 916 877 838 793 747 702 611 585 552 1050 856 804 700 670 633 700 Eee COEUR JH 571 536 467 447 422 A 24 App G Replacement Information App G Replacement Information When replacing Fuji conventional inverter series FVR C9S FVR C11S with the FRENIC Mini series refer to the replacement information given in this section G 1 External dimensions comparison tables Below is a guide that helps in using the comparison tables on the following pages Mounting area Allows comparing the mounting area required for the FRENIC Mini series Mini with that for the conventional inverter series in percentage assuming the area for the FRENIC Mini series to be 100 If this value is greater than 100 it means that the mounting area required for the FRENIC Mini series is smaller than that of other series Volume Mini Allows comparing the volume of the FRENIC Mini series with that of the conventional inverter series in percentage assuming the volume of the FRENIC Mini series to be 100 If this value is greater than 100 it means that the volume of the FRENIC Mini is smaller than that of other series In the FRENIC Mini columns dimensions in hatched boxes denote that they are s
26. 2 13 0 4 z phase 230 V 1 FRN001CIB 7U 6 8 3 29 3 60 3 36 0 75 2 FRN002CIN 7U 6 8 5 55 6 10 5 87 1 5 3 FRN003CIB 7U 6 8 8 39 9 20 8 80 2 2 Note 1 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure 2 Asterisks in the above table denote the following 21 Braking resistor built in type Available for 2 HP or above three phase 230 V and 460 V models None Standard 9 11 9 2 Details of Function Codes This section provides a detailed description of the function codes available for the FRENIC Mini series of inverters In each code group its function codes are arranged in an ascending order of the identifying numbers for ease of access Note that function codes closely related each other for the implementation of an inverter s operation are detailed in the description of the function code having the youngest identifying number Those related function codes are indicated in the title bar as shown below Frequency Command 1 Refer to C30 9 2 1 F codes Fundamental functions Data Protection Specifies whether function code data is to be protected from being accidentally changed by keypad operation If data protection is enabled F00 1 9 key operation to change data is disabled so that no function code data except F00 data can be changed from the keypad rum Even if F00 1 function code data can still be changed using the communications Note s facility Data for F00 Function Settin
27. 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less Frequency 5 to 5 When the input voltage is 165 V or more the inverter may keep running Even if it drops below 165 V the inverter may keep running for 15 ms 8 3 14 0 13 2 22 2 2 9 100 Braking time s Braking lr Duty cycle DC injection braking Enclosure I EC60529 Cooling method Weight Ibs kg IP20 UL open type 10 12 4 Braking level 0 to 100 95 of rated current Fan cooling 4 0 1 8 Fuji 4 pole standard motors 2 The rated capacity is for 230 V output voltage 3 Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage L I VL Sed 4 Use the inverter at the current given in or below when the carrier frequency is higher than 4 kHz Feb 25 to 5 or the ambient temperature is 40 C 140 F or higher 5 Tested under the standard load condition 85 load for applicable motor rating 6 Calculated under Fuji specified conditions 7 Indicates the value when using a DC reactor option Lr 8 Average braking torque obtained with the AVR control off 5 7 Varies according to the efficiency of the motor Max voltage V Min voltage V 3 phase average voltage V If this value is 2 to 3 96 use an AC reactor ACR 10 Making FRENIC Mini conform to category TYPEI of the UL Standard or NEMA1 requires an optional NEMA kit Note that the TYP
28. Available from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Figure 6 5 Surge Absorber Dimensions 6 12 6 4 Selecting Options 6 4 Selecting Options 6 4 4 Peripheral equipment options 1 Braking resistors A braking resistor converts regenerative energy generated from deceleration of the motor and converts it to heat for consumption Use of a braking resistor results in improved deceleration performance of the inverter Refer to Chapter 7 Section 7 2 Selecting a Braking Resistor 1 1 Standard model The standard model of a braking resistor integrates a facility that detects the temperature on the heat sink of the resistor and outputs a digital ON OFF signal if the temperature exceeds the specified level as an overheating warning signal To ensure that the signal is recognized at one of the digital input terminals of the FRENIC Mini assign the external alarm THR to any of terminals X1 to X3 FWD and REV Connect the assigned terminal to terminal 1 of the braking resistor Upon detection of the warning signal preset detection level 150 C 302 F the inverter simultaneously transfers to Alarm mode displays alarm 2t on the LED monitor and shuts down its power output Braking 2 O0 Terminal CM 5 resistor 5 pg O Terminal X1 5 X2 X3 G i FWD REV External alarm function THR P Inverter Figure 6 6 Braking Resistor Standard Model and Connection Example
29. Can be set with communication via RS 485 RS485 communications functions are optional Running status signal Transistor output 1 point RUN FAR FOT LU etc E20 Relay output 1 point Alarm relay output or multi purpose relay output signal E27 Analog output t point Output frequency output current cutout voltage input power etc F30 Ft Acceleration 0 00 to 3600 s F07 FOG deceleration time f 0 00 s is set the time setting is cancelled and acceleration and deceleration is made according to the pattern given with an external signal Acceleration and deceleration time can be independently set and selected with E10 E11 digital input signal 1 point Pattern Acceleration and deceleration pattem can be selected from 4 types Linear S curve weak H07 S curve strong Curvilinear Frequency limiter Peak and bottom can be set F15 peak and bottom limiters F16 Bias frequency Bias of set frequency and PID command can be independently set F18 L C50 to C52 Gain for frequency Proportional relation between analog input signal and output frequency can be set C32 to C38 command Voltage signal terminal 12 and current signal terminal C1 can be set independently amp g When voltage input signal is between 0 and 5 VDC the inverter can be used at 5 VDC max output frequency by setting gain to 200 Jump frequency contro 3 operation points and their common jump hyst
30. Connector Specifications ote tepore e bet e teen e e Use 5 3 5 153 Connection ice eee mene ie eee ee eU eid ete eiie ete eee egets 5 3 5 1 Overview on RS 485 Communication 5 1 Overview on RS 485 Communication Mounting an optional RS 485 communications card on the FRENIC Mini series of inverters enables the following B Operation from a remote keypad A remote keypad can be connected to the RS 485 communications card using the extension cable You may install the remote keypad to the easy to access front of the control panel The maximum length of the extension cable is 66 ft 20 m B Operation by FRENIC Loader The Windows based PC can be connected to the RS 485 communications card Through the RS 485 communications facility you may run FRENIC Loader in the PC to edit the function code data and monitor the running status information of the inverter B Operation from the host equipment Host equipment such as a PLC or personal computer can be connected to the RS 485 communications card It may act as a master device that controls the inverter as a slave device Protocols for managing a network including inverters include the Modbus RTU protocol compliant to the protocol established by Modicon Inc that is widely used in FA markets and the Fuji general purpose protocol that supports the FRENIC Mini and conventional series of inverters Cnote For the remote keypad the inverter uses the dedicated protocol that automatically sw
31. Discharging Capability KWs Braking Time s x Rated Motor Capacity HP Q Data for F50 Function Apply the discharging capability specified for braking resistor built in type Discharge 1 to 900 kWs Disable electronic thermal overload protection m Allowable average loss F51 Allowable average loss is a braking resistor capacity that can be applied for continuos operation of a motor It can be calculated from the ED and rated motor capacity using equation 3 which is based on the regenerative power in deceleration or equation 4 which is based on that in constant speed operation ED xRated Motor Capacity HP 100 Allowable Loss kW 3 2 ED Allowable Average Loss kW x Rated Motor Capacity HP 4 100 0 Apply the allowable average loss specified for braking resistor built in type 0 001 to 50 000 Discharge 0 001 to 50 000 HP 9 2 Details of Function Codes 9 2 2 E codes Extension terminal functions Terminal Command Assignment to X1 to X3 Refer to E98 and E99 E01 to E03 E98 and E99 may assign commands listed below to terminals X1 to X3 FWD and REV which are general purpose programmable input terminals These function codes may also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define how the inverter logic interprets either ON or OFF status of each termina
32. F 194 F A FRNFI2CIM 2U 0 57 0 8 15 Tiaa FRNFSOCIM 2U 0 003 3 0 pos FRNOOICIM 2U 30 2 0 0 003 0 003 5 0 003 0 003 5 5 230 V FRNOO2CIMI 2U 5 7 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 8 0 n 0 005 FRNO05CIMI 2U 17 7 RNFSOCINM A4U 0 85 L5 ue EIE zT 2 0 003 0 003 0 003 gt 0 003 0 003 P RN 4u 1 2 0 2 0 29 L 2 0 2 0 460 V RNOO3CIMI 4U 5 5 RNO0SCIM 4U 9 jezi fezi fezi RNFI2CINI 7U 08 m nos 15 ingle A m Pd E n aca a 0 003 2 0 0 003 0 003 0 003 0 003 n Q 2 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 230 V FRNOGCIM U SUL eo eo o z FRNOO3CINI 7U i15 099 11 6 5 U m D Table 6 3 Cont for DC reactor braking resistor control circuit and inverter grounding X m Recommended wire size inch mm g Power Applicable DC reactor Braking resistor Control circuit Inverter grounding r suppy 99r iivet ipe P1 P P DB e G m It rating Allowable temp 1 Current Allowable temp 1 Current Allowable temp 1 Allowable temp 1 o votagel HP 60 C 75 C 90 C 60 C 75 C 90 C 60 C C 90 C 60 C 75 T 90 C Cc 140 F 167 F 194 F A 1409F 167 F 194 F A 140 F 167 F 194 F 1409F 167 F 194 F 5 FRNFI2CIM 2U FRNE25CIM2U m Ls FRNFSOCIB 2U 9 093 i 0 001 0 003 0 003 0 003 phase FRNOOICIN 2U 2 0 i i 0 5 2 0 2 0 2 0 230 V FRNOO2CIN 2U FRNOO3CIN 2U 10 2 1 i f
33. Non linear V f pattern Voltage H51 Output a 0 Moria Base frequency Hz 2 V f pattern with single V f pattern frequency non linear point inside Hee alae F04 the base frequency H50 Output voltage V Non linear V f pattern Voltage H51 Rated voltage at base frequency F05 d Output Base Non linear frequency Hz 3 V f pattern with single frequency V f pattern non linear point outside F04 SO the base frequency 9 2 Details of Function Codes F07 Acceleration Time 1 Refer to E10 Deceleration Time 1 Refer to E11 F07 specifies the acceleration time from 0 to the maximum frequency in Hz F08 specifies the deceleration time from the maximum frequency to 0 in Hz Data setting range 0 00 to 3600 sec Nole Selecting an S shaped pattern or curvilinear acceleration deceleration pattern by CE function code H07 Gradual acceleration deceleration pattern will make the actual acceleration deceleration times longer than the set ones Refer to the descriptions of function code H07 Setting shorter acceleration deceleration times than is necessary may make the actual acceleration deceleration time longer than the set ones as the current limit or regenerative braking suppression facility may be activated Torque Boost Specifies the torque boost rate to boost the voltage component in the V f pattern for compensating magnetic flux shortage of the motor resulting from the voltage drop across the pr
34. Phases voltage frequency Three phase 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz Voltage and frequency Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less variations Frequency 5 ta 5 When the input voltage is 300 V or more the inverter may keep running Even if it drops below 300 V the inverter may keep 4 running for 15 ms w DCR 0 83 16 30 44 73 s w o DCR 1 31 59 82 130 Required power supply Li 49 capacity kVA In Iz Torque 100 50 aly i Momentary voltage dip capability wi zh u 3 cm amp Rated current A N 5 Torque 150 il Starting frequency 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Braking time 0 0 to 30 0 s DC injection braking d s Braking level 0 to 100 of rated current Enclosure IEC60529 IP20 UL open type Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling Weight Ibs kg 24 L1 227 032 137 7 37 1 7 5 1 2 3 Fuji 4 pole standard motors 2 The rated capacity is for 460 V output voltage 3 Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 Tested under the standard load condition 85 load for applicable motor rating 5 Calculated under Fuji specified conditions 6 Indicates the value when using a DC reactor option 7 Average braking torque obtained with the AVR control off 5 2 7 Varies according to the efficiency of the motor 8 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external brakin
35. Q Note possible Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions Fix the control circuit wires inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of the main circuit such as the terminal block of the main circuit 8 22 8 4 Terminal Specifications 8 4 2 Terminal block arrangement The terminal blocks shows below They differ according to the power supply voltage and the applicable motor rating For details about terminal arrangement refer to Section 8 4 3 Terminal arrangement diagram and Screw specifications Power Applicable supply motor Inverter type Refer to voltage rating HP Figure A Inverter 1 8 FRNFI2CIB 2U 1 4 FRNF25CIB 2U Figure A 1 2 FRNFS50CIB 2U Control circuit Three terminal block phase 1 FRNOOICIB 2U 230V 2 FRN002CIBI 2U terminal block 5 FRNO05CIB 2U 1 2 FRNFS50CIMI AU Q Figure B Es 1 FRN001CINMI AU co Three Figure B Inverter phase 2 FRN0O2CINI 4U o 460 V z 2m 3 FRN003C1II 4U O 5 FRN005CIMI AU o 1 8 FRNFI2CIM 7U Control circuit 5 terminal block z 1 4 FRNF25CIMI 7U ue Figure A Single 1 2 FRNFS50CIM 7U phase Ae T 230 V 1 FRN00ICINI 7U Main circuit terminal block 2 FRN0O2CINMI 7U Figure B 3 FRN003CIB 7U Notes 1 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on enclosure 8 4 3 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications 8 4 3 1 T
36. Suppresses surges or noise invading from an external source preventing malfunction from magnetic contactors control relays and timers etc DECIES Suppresses induced lightning surges from power source thus protecting all equipment connected to the power source Absorbs surges or noise invading from an external source preventing malfunction of electronic equipment used in the switchboard Power supply Ie MP M HM o ErcmCSEO le H ER Ram P b setting Frequency setting potentiometer mounted externally er ee rt i a juency meter Displays the frequency in accordance with signals output from the inverter I d EO dc mi MCCB lion for single phase This is used in cases where a single phase 100V power supply is used to feed a three phase or 100V input 230V inverter It can be applied to the inverter of 1HP or less EMC compliance filter This is a dedicated filter which complies with the European EMC Emission Directive mcm 7l li Used for power factor improvement and power supply coordination However il is recommended that a DC REACTOR with a higher efficiency and which is more compact and ie zr Es lightweight be used Use a DC REACTOR DCR as a countermeasure for harmonics If it is le necessary to supply a stabilized power supply such as a DC bus system and running from that PN connection operation please use such a reactor for
37. Three us phase s ev 0 003 2 0 0 003 0 i i 0 001 0 003 0 003 0 003 3 B 7 pdt EDO 0 003 982 0 0 001 0 003 230 Q 0 2 0 0 003 0 003 0 003 0 5 0 5 2 0 2 0 2 0 eo 1 Assuming the use of bare wiring without rack or duct 600 V class of vinyl insulated IV wires for 60 C 140 F 600 V class of polyethylene insulated HIV wires for 75 C 167 F and 600 V class of polyethylene insulated cross link wires for 90 C 194 F es EE o e 2 i i 0 003 0 003 2 0 2 0 Notes 1 A box B in the above tables replaces S or E depending on enclosure LL If environmental requirements such as power supply voltage and ambient temperature differ from those listed above select wires suitable for your system by referring to Table 6 1 and Appendices App F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires 6 5 6 2 2 Crimp terminals Table 6 4 lists the recommended ring tongue crimp terminals that can be specified by the wires and screws to be used for your inverter model Table 6 4 Crimp Terminal Size Wire size inch mm Ring tongue crimp terminal 1 25 3 5 0 001 0 5 125 4 0 001 0 75 1 25 3 5 125 4 0 002 1 25 1 25 3 5 125 4 0 003 2 0 2 3 5 2 4 0 005 0 009 3 5 5 5 mp LL Refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 4 3 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications to select the correct terminal screw size 6 6 6 3 Peripheral Equipment 6 3
38. ce E Alarm occurs Programming Mode Menu driven display Data setting A key Menu 1 S key Menu 2 Drive monitoring Menu 3 3s I O checking Menu 4 4 Maintenance info Menu 5 GHE Alarm info Data copying amp key 9 S keys Current alarm code Latest alarm code 2nd latest alarm code LU 3rd latest alarm code E g Ea Alarm Mode The speed monitor may display the output frequency Hz set frequency Hz load shaft speed r min line speed ft min m min and constant feeding rate time min which can be selected by setting up function code E48 2 These PID related information will appear only when the inverter is under the PID control Refer to Section 3 2 2 3 This will appear only when timer operation is enabled by setting up function code C21 Refer to Chapter 9 Section 9 2 3 C codes Control functions of frequency 4 This will appear only when the remote keypad option is set up for use Figure 3 2 Basic Screen Transition in Each Operation Mode 3 2 3 2 Running Mode 3 2 Running Mode If the inverter is turned ON it automatically enters Running mode in which you may 1 Run stop the motor 2 Set up the set frequency and others 3 Monitor the running status e g output frequency output current 4 Jog inch the motor 3 2 1 Run stop the motor By factory default pressing the amp key starts running the motor in the forward direction
39. kg Moment of inertia J kg m QW A 1 2 1 3 J oW L B A JW Lo L Lei baxis aaxis 1 2 2 j sWeVt eD 22 3 16 J We Ly 4L Lp 3 J We Lo Hel Iron 7860 Copper 8940 Aluminum 2700 07 m r m O d z 0 O v d z 2 r O 4 O D gt Z Og z lt mi E m E O a gt Q d m N 3 Fora load running horizontally Assume a carrier table driven by a motor as shown in Figure 7 7 If the table speed is v m s when the motor speed is Ny r min then an equivalent distance from the rotation axis is equal to 60 v 2z Ny m The moment of inertia of the table and load to the rotation axis is calculated as follows j 5 Wy W kg m 73 T Ny 2 Calculation of the acceleration time Figure 7 9 shows a general load model Assume that a motor drives a load via a reduction gear with efficiency ng The time required to accelerate this load to a speed of Ny r min is calculated with the following equation Ji t JMe A 27 e Nu 9 s TM xls 60 7 10 tacc where J Motor shaft moment of inertia kg m Jz Load shaft moment of inertia converted to motor shaft kg m tw Minimum motor output torque in driving motor N m t Maximum load torque converted to motor shaft N m na Reduction gear efficiency As clarified in the above equation the equivalent moment of inertia becomes J J2 ng by cons
40. m Qo Variable torque Disabled Disabled Enabled Constant torque Disabled Disabled Enabled Notavailable Enabled Disabled Disabled Variable torque Disabled Enabled Enabled The auto energy saving feature is enabled only for Constant torque Disabled Enabled Enabled constant speed operation During acceleration deceleration the inverter runs with manual or automatic torque boost Not available Enabled Enabled Disabled ficio When using the auto torque boost or energy saving feature you need to set the rated voltage of the motor to F05 Voltage at the base frequency and the motor parameters to the motor related P codes Current Limiter Operation condition Current Limiter Limiting level F43 enables or disables the current limiter If 1t is enabled the inverter controls the output frequency while keeping the current set to F44 in order to prevent the motor from stalling With F43 you may select whether the current limiter works during constant speed operation only F43 1 or during both acceleration and constant speed operation F43 2 Set F43 to 1 for example to drive the motor at maximum performance in the acceleration zone and to limit the drive current in the constant speed zone m Operation condition F43 Select the motor running state in which the current limiter will work Data for F43 Function Disable No current limiter work
41. then those for acceleration and deceleration time are explained 1 Calculation of moment of inertia For an object that rotates around the rotation axis virtually divide the object into small segments and square the distance from the rotation axis to each segment Then sum the squares of the distances and the masses of the segments to calculate the moment of inertia J X Wi ri kg m 7 7 The following describes equations to calculate moment of inertia having different shaped loads or load systems 1 Hollow cylinder and solid cylinder The common shape of a rotating body is hollow cylinder The moment of inertia around the hollow cylinder center axis can be calculated as follows where the outer and inner diameters are Diand D m and total mass is W kg in Figure 7 8 W D D2 kg m 7 8 J For a similar shape a solid cylinder calculate the moment of inertia as D is 0 Figure 7 8 Hollow Cylinder 2 Fora general rotating body Table 7 1 lists the calculation equations of moment of inertia of various rotating bodies including the above cylindrical rotating body 7 8 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters Table 7 1 Moment of Inertia of Various Rotating Bodies Mass W kg Moment of inertia J kgm Hollow cylinder Square cone Pyramid rectangular base Tetrahedron with an equilateral triangular base Main metal density at 20 C 68 F p kg m 7 9 Mass W
42. w o DCR 1 8 3 3 5 4 9 7 16 4 n zb 3 fas c Rated current A Required power supply 0 4 0 7 13 capacity kVA k 4 s Torque 150 100 Torque 94 150 A aien Brali Starting frequency 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Braking time 0 0 to 30 0 s DC injecti n braking Braking level 0 to 100 of rated current Enclosure IEC60529 IP20 UL open type 4 Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling Weight lbs kg 1 3 0 6 1 3 0 6 1 3 0 6 1 8 0 8 3 5 1 6 5 1 2 3 Fuji 4 pole standard motors 2 The rated capacity is for 230 V output voltage 3 Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 Use the inverter at the current given in or below when the carrier frequency is higher than 4 kHz 77 5 2 7 to 5 or the ambient temperature is 40 C 104 F or higher 5 Tested under the standard load condition 85 load for applicable motor rating 6 Calculated under Fuji specified conditions 7 Indicates the value when using a DC reactor option 8 Average braking torque obtained with the AVR control off 475 7 Varies according to the efficiency of the motor 9 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor standard type available as option 10 Making FRENIC Mini conform to category TYPEI of the UL Standard or NEMA1 requires an optional NEMA kit Note that the TYPE1 listed FRENIC Mini should be used in the ambient temperature range from 1
43. 1 Calculate the moment of inertia for the load and motor Calculate the moment of inertia for the load referring to Section 7 1 3 2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation For the motor refer to the related motor catalogs 2 Calculate the minimum acceleration torque See Figure 7 4 The acceleration torque is the difference between the motor short time output torque base frequency 60 Hz explained in Section 7 1 1 2 Maximum driving torque in a short time and the load torque 1 na during constant speed running calculated in the above 1 Calculate the minimum acceleration torque for the whole range of speed 3 Calculate the acceleration time Assign the value calculated above to the equation 7 10 in Section 7 1 3 2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation to calculate the acceleration time If the calculated acceleration time is longer than the expected time select the inverter and motor having one class larger capacity and calculate it again Motor output torque Tm Torque Load torque at constant speed fr ti Minimum acceleration Nc QLERQUE os eo d 63 Y Load torque TL gt 0 Speed Figure 7 4 Example Study of Minimum Acceleration Torque 7 5 p m r m O d z 0 O v d z 2 r z O 4 O D gt Z o Z lt mi E 4 m E O a gt Q d m wo 3 Torque 5 0 Deceleration time For detailed calculation refer to Section 7 1 3 2
44. 2 act N Y 0 9 44 3 PID process command 1 5 PID feedback value E98 Terminal Command To assign a negative logic input to a terminal set N Y 98 Assignment to FWD the value of 1000s shown in in the table below to the function code 0 1000 Select multistep frequency E99 REV 0 to 1 steps ss TITIN YJ 2 1 1001 Select multistep frequency 0 to 3 steps SS2 2 1002 Select multistep frequency 0 to 7 steps SS4 4 1004 Select ACC DEC time 2 steps RT1 6 1006 Enable 3 wire operation HLD T 1007 Coast to a stop BX 8 1008 Reset alarm RST 9 1009 Enable external alarm trip THR 9 33 10 1010 Ready for jogging JOG VS 11 1011 Switch set frequency 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 19 1019 Enable write from keypad WE KP 20 1020 Cancel PID control Hz PID 21 1021 Switch normal inverse operation IVS 24 1024 Enable communications link RS 485 communication option LE 33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST 34 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD 98 Run forward FWD 99 Run reverse REV 9 1 Function Code Tables C codes Control Functions of Frequency Change Code Name Data setting range neres Unit when pais Delon Bele ment copy setting to running C01 Jump Frequency 1 0 0 to
45. 26 MAX 3 15 80 ACL 40B F200160 Inverter With overcurrent protection Figure 6 12 Dimensions of Ferrite Ring for Reducing Radio Noise ACL and Connection Example Table 6 13 Ferrite Ring for Reducing Radio Noise ACL Installation requirements Wire size Ferrite ring type i Number of inch mm Qty turns 0 003 2 0 1 4 0 005 3 5 ACL 40B 0 009 5 5 2 2 0 013 8 0 022 14 0 013 1 4 3 0 022 14 0 034 22 2 2 0 059 38 0 094 60 ACL 74B 0 156 100 0 234 150 4 1 0 313 200 0 391 250 0 508 325 The selected wires are for use with 3 phase input output lines 3 wires 6 20 6 4 Selecting Options 6 4 2 Options for operation and communications 1 External potentiometer for frequency setting An external potentiometer may be used to set the drive frequency Connect the potentiometer to control signal terminals 11 to 13 of the inverter as shown in Figure 6 14 Model RJ 13 BA 2 B characteristics 1 kQ 0 14 3 5 7H T Cna at Unit inch mm 0 24 98 Shaft FA mm j 0 02 0 5 toe t 3 f E E th Q S ad T S 2 MB X oy 0 5 052 pz 003 i 959 19 69033 075 939 10 e 1 77 0 08 45 2 0 98 0 04 25 1 Dial plate type YS549810 0 Knob type MSS 2SB 1 60 20 1 65 50 to s 0 13 63 2 T S s n e gt 8 4 n ot 5 opa amp 60 39 9 10 FREO SET y 11 57 40 T9039 1 d10 0892
46. 4 Electromagnetic Noise A 3 Inverter supply e ic 16 I i 1 lata a s dd Signal line C I I i C Sensor it 4I i 4Il Figure A 5 Electrostatic Noise 3 Radiation noise Noise generated in an inverter may be radiated through the air from wires that act as antennas at the input and output sides of the inverter This noise is called radiation noise amp as shown below Not only wires but motor frames or control system panels containing inverters may also act as antennas Inverter Power supply Electronic device Sensor Figure A 6 Radiation Noise A 3 Noise prevention The more noise prevention is strengthened the more effective However with the use of appropriate measures noise problems may be resolved easily It is necessary to implement economical noise prevention according to the noise level and the equipment conditions 1 Noise prevention prior to installation Before inserting an inverter in your control panel or installing an inverter panel you need to consider noise prevention Once noise problems occur it will cost additional materials and time for solving them Noise prevention prior to installation includes 1 Separating the wiring of main circuits and control circuits 2 Putting main circuit wiring into a metal pipe conduit pipe 3 Using shielded wires or twist shielded wires for control circuits 4 Implementing appropriate grounding work and
47. 400 0 0 1 Hz Y Y 0 0 C02 2 Y 0 0 9 46 C03 3 Y 0 0 C04 Jump Frequency Band 0 0 to 30 0 0 1 Hz Y 3 0 9 46 C05 Multistep Frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 01 Hz Y Y 0 00 Settings 1 C06 2 Y 0 00 C07 3 Y 0 00 C08 4 Y 0 00 SB C09 5 Y 0 00 C10 6 Y 0 00 C11 7 Y 0 00 C20 Jogging Frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 01 Hz Y Y 0 00 9 47 C21 Timer Operation 0 Disable timer operation N Y 0 9 47 1 Enable timer operation C30 Frequency Command 2 0 Enable and amp keys on the built in be N Y 2 9 12 keypad 9 48 1 Enable the voltage input to terminal 12 2 Enable the current input to terminal C1 3 Enable the sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 4 Enable the built in potentiometer POT C32 Analog Input 0 00 to 200 00 0 01 96 Y Y 100 0 9 22 Adjustment 9 48 T Gain for terminal input lt 12 Oo d Gain Oo Z C33 Filter 0 00 to 5 00 0 01 s Y Y 0 05 9 48 Oo C34 Gain reference point 0 00 to 100 00 0 01 Y Y 100 0 9 22 S 9 48 m o C37 Analog Input 0 00 to 200 00 0 01 96 Y Y 100 0 9 22 Adjustment 9 48 Gain for terminal input C1 Gain C38 Filter 0 00 to 5 00 0 01 s Y Y 0 05 9 48 C39 Gain reference point 0 00 to 100 00 0 01 Y Y 100 0 9 22 9 48 C50 Bias 0 00 to 100 00 0 01 Ys Y 0 00 9 22 Frequency 9 48 command 1 Bias reference point C51 Bias PID command 1 100 00 to 100 00 0 01 Y Y 0 00 9 48 Bias value C52 Bi
48. 74 5 8 1 1 8 FRNFI2CIB 7U DCR2 0 2 1 5 20 660 1 6 1 4 FRNF25CIB 7U DCR2 0 4 3 0 12 280 1 9 sod 1 2 FRNFSOCIM 7U DCR2 0 75 50 70 123 28 phase 230 V 1 FRNOOICIN 7U DCR2 1 5 8 0 4 0 57 5 4 6 2 FRN002C1 W 7U DCR2 3 7 18 1 7 21 8 8 3 FRNO03C1 7U Note 1 Generated losses listed in the above table are approximate values that are calculated according to the following conditions The power source is 3 phase 230 V 460 V 60 Hz with 0 interphase voltage unbalance ratio The power source capacity uses the larger of either 500 kVA or 10 times the rated capacity of the inverter The motor is a 4 pole standard model at full load 100 An AC reactor ACR is not connected m r m O z 9 v m D T T r m o c T m z Note 2 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on enclosure 6 17 3 AC reactors ACRs Use an ACR when the converter part of the inverter should supply very stable DC power for example in DC link bus operation shared PN operation Generally ACRs are used for correction of voltage waveform and power factor or for power supply normalization but not for suppressing harmonic components in the power lines For suppressing harmonic components use a DCR An ACR should be also used when the power source is extremely unstable for example when the power source involves an extremely large interphase voltage unbalance MCCB AC reactor Magnetic contactor I
49. Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES for details even when it is active Table 3 10 Segment Display for External Signal Information LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 Segment a 30A B C Y1 YIE i OEGE E REV CM or gt REV PLC CEAR l l J F 7 E is X1 CM or X1 HPLC Sf j d E y X2 CM or X2 PLC ou Edp 7 7 B X3 CM or X3H PLC F i E XP p x E XR E RST No correlating control circuit terminals 1 XF XR and RST are reserved for communications Refer to 2 Displaying control I O signal terminals under communication control Terminal CM if the jumper switch is set for a sink terminal PLC if the jumper switch is set for a source o U m o Z c Er Z 9 4 I m A m lt gt s E Displaying I O signal status in hexadecimal format Each I O terminal is assigned to bit 15 through bit 0 as listed in Table 3 11 An unassigned bit is interpreted as 0 Allocated bit data is displayed on the LED monitor in 4 digit hexadecimals 0 to F each With the FRENIC Mini digital input terminals FWD and REV are assigned to bit 0 and bit 1 respectively Terminals X1 through X3 are assigned to bits 2 through 4 The value 1 is set for each bit when the assigned input terminal is short circuited ON with terminal CM The value 0 when it opens OFF For example when FWD and X1 are ON and all others
50. Controlled commanded i 41 section target value value AD ALP Feedback PID Control Selection J01 Selects PID control status Data for J01 PID control Disable Enable process control normal operation Enable process control inverse operation This function allows inserting the difference error between PID command and amount that have been fed back so as to drive the motor for normal or inverse operation Apply this control to a system increasing decreasing the motor speed according to any such difference such that occurring when an air conditioner is switched between cooling and heating The operation mode can also be switched between normal and inverse using the terminal command IVS Refer to function codes E01 to E03 for details of assignment of the terminal command IVS 9 2 Details of Function Codes m Remote process command J02 Selects the means by which the PID control command can be set Data for J02 Keypad Built in potentiometer terminal 12 or C1 for PID process command 1 Via RS 485 communication If an analog command built in potentiometer terminal 12 or C1 is selected as the PID process command it is also necessary to select PID process command 1 for the analog input side using function codes E60 E61 and E62 LL Refer to function codes E60 to E62 for details ote The multistep frequency C08 set by the terminal command SS4 can al
51. Input power 10 PID final command value 12 PID feedback value 13 Timer value Timer operation E45 Note E46 E47 E48 LED Monitor 0 Output frequency before slip compensation Y Y 0 9 44 Speed monitor item 4 Output frequency after slip compensation 2 Set frequency 4 Load shaft speed in rom 5 Line speed in m min 6 Constant feeding rate time Note Function codes E45 to E47 appear on the LED monitor however the FRENIC Mini series of inverters does not recognize these codes Fuji s standard torque boost Nominal rated current of Fuji standard motor and Nominal rated capacity of Fuji standard motor differ depending upon the rated input voltage and rated capacity Refer to Table 9 1 Fuji Standard Motor Parameters on page 9 11 Change Code Name Data setting range nere Unit when Data Deis Refer ment copy setting to running E50 Coefficient for Speed 0 01 to 200 00 0 01 Y Y 30 00 9 43 Indication 9 44 E52 Menu Display Mode 0 Function code data setting mode St Y Y 0 9 44 for Keypad 1 Function code data check mode 2 Full menu mode E60 Built in Potentiometer 0 None N Y 0 9 44 Function selection 1 Auxiliary frequency command 1 2 Auxiliary frequency command 2 3 PID process command 1 E61 Analog Input Signal 0 None JM ae N Y 0 9 44 Definition for 12 1 Auxiliary frequency command 1 E62 C1 2 Auxiliary frequency command
52. J codes and Link Functions y codes Changing validating and saving function code data when the motor is running Function codes are indicated by the following based on whether they can be changed or not when the motor is running Function codes marked with N in the Change when running column of the function code tables given below The data of these codes cannot be changed when the motor is running Function codes marked with Y The data of these codes can be changed with J and amp keys regardless of whether the motor is running or not Pressing the eS key will make the change effective and save it into the inverter s memory Function codes marked with Y The difference from function codes marked with Y and these is that if the data of these codes is changed the change will immediately take effect however the change is not saved into the inverter s memory To save the change press the e key If you press the e key to exit the current state without pressing the key then the changed data will be discarded and the previous data will take effect for the current inverter operation Copying data Connecting a remote keypad option to an inverter via the RS 485 communications card option allows copying the data stored in the inverter s memory into the keypad s memory refer to Menu 7 Data copying in Programming mode With this feature you can easily transfer the data saved in a source
53. Link For details of the data compatibility refer to Frequency setting Function selection Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES 011 RS 485 command select Running command Conversion Table for Setting Torque Boost Inverter FVR C9S As Series Name FVR C11S FRENIC Mini Func Codes F37 O0 0 None Consult us o 9a a 5 29N NID on Ean koad ofS S O lt Nol I3 et Njoj afln ojjj N a a a a a a a a a a 3 a a a 2 Data 10 6 No po pol rol ry a a a a a a a 4 4 17 5 A 33 Glossary This glossary explains the technical terms that are frequently used in this manual Acceleration time Period required when an inverter accelerates its output from 0 Hz to the output frequency Related function codes F03 F07 E10 and H54 Alarm mode One of the three operation modes supported by the inverter If the inverter detects any malfunction error or fault in its operation it immediately shuts down or trips the output to the motor and enters this mode in which corresponding alarm codes are displayed on the LED monitor Alarm output for any faults A mechanical contact output signal that is generated when the inverter is halted by an alarm by short circuiting between terminals 30A and 30C Related function code E27 See Alarm mode Analog input An external voltage or current input signal to give the inverter the frequency com
54. N Y2 230 9 15 for 200 V class motors 9 60 0 to 500 Output voltage AVR controlled 460 for 400 V class motors H54 ACC DEC Time 0 00 to 3600 0 01 s Y Y 6 00 9 60 Jogging operation H64 Low Limiter 0 0 Depends on F16 Freq limiter low 0 1 Hz Y Y 2 0 9 60 Min freq when limiter 0 1 to 60 0 is activated H69 Automatic Deceleration 0 Disable Y Y 0 9 60 Regenerative energy 1 Enable suppressing H70 Overload Prevention 0 00 Equivalent to deceleration time 0 01 Hz s Y Y 999 9 61 Control 0 01 to 100 00 Frequency drop rate 999 Cancel H71 Note 1 H80 Gain for Suppression 0 00 to 0 20 0 01 Y Y 0 20 9 61 of Output Current Fluctuation H89 Motor overload 0 Inactive Y Y 1 5 49 memory retention When power up the drive Motor overload Note 3 data is reset 1 Active When power is down the drive stores Motor overload data and use this data at next power up H95 DC Braking Note 2 0 Slow response Y Y 0 9 61 Braking mode 1 Quick response H96 STOP Key Priority STOP key priority Start check function Y Y 3 9 62 Start Check Function 0 Invalid Invalid 1 Valid Invalid aul 2 Invalid Valid z 3 Valid Valid O 4 H97 Clear Alarm Data Returns to zero after clearing alarm data if H97 Y N 0 9 62 o 1 Z H98 Protection opL Lin ADFCF eae cS 3 los T Maintenance Functions 9 Disable Disable Dis
55. Peripheral Equipment 1 Molded case circuit breaker MCCB ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI and magnetic contactor MC 1 1 Functional overview E MCCBs and GFCIs With overcurrent protection Molded Case Circuit Breakers MCCBs are designed to protect the power circuits between the power supply and inverter s main circuit terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T for three phase or L1 L and L2 N for single phase power source from overload or short circuit which in turn prevents secondary accidents caused by the inverter malfunctioning Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters GFCIs function in the same way as MCCBs Built in overcurrent overload protective functions protect the inverter itself from failures related to its input output lines B MCs An MC can be used at both the power input and output sides of the inverter At each side the MC works as described below When inserted in the output circuit of the inverter the MC can also switch the motor drive power source between the inverter output and commercial power lines At the power source side Insert an MC in the power source side of the inverter in order to 1 Forcibly cut off the inverter from the power source generally commercial factory power lines with the protective function built into the inverter or with the external signal input 2 Stop the inverter operation in an emergency when the inverter cannot interpret the stop command due to internal external circ
56. Procedure Basic key operation This section will give a description of the basic key operation following the example of the function code data changing procedure shown in Figure 3 5 This example shows you how to change function code FOl data from the factory default of Potentiometer operation on the keypad F01 4 to 9 O keys operation F01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 ScUTL C amp Tip ue With the menu displayed use C34 amp 2 keys to select the desired function code group In this example select Press the G3 key to display the function codes in the function code group selected in 1 In this LIH s example function code SLi will appear Even if the function code list for a particular function code group is displayed it is possible to transfer the display to a different function code group using 9 V keys Select the desired function code using 9 amp 2 keys and press the G9 key In this example select function code 7 The data of this function code will appear In this example data of FL will appear Change the function code data using CI O keys In this example press the Okey four times to change data from to Press the amp key to establish the function code data The SALE will appear and the data will be saved in the non volatile memory The display will return to the function code list then move to the next function code In this example
57. Se TIT ee ne 7 7 2 Obtaining the required force F eee ceececceseesseesceeseeesceeeceseececeeecesecesecaecaecsaecsaecaeeeseeeseeneeeneenss 7 7 7 1 3 2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation cccecccceeseesceeseeeeeeeeceseeeeeeceseceseenseenteeeeenes 7 8 1 Calculation of moment of inertia esses enne enne entretenir nns 7 8 2 Calculation of the acceleration time esses nennen eene enne nnne nn 7 10 3 Calculation of the deceleration time enne 7 10 7 1 3 3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor sse 7 11 1 Calculation of regenerative energy ceccescceccesecesecesecseecseeeseeeseeceeeeeesseeeseeeseeeeseeeseeseenseenaes 7 11 7 1 3 4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor nennen 7 12 72 Selecting a Braking Resistor aues s nen MAG RR ERR ARs AAR OKA ME EUN nino 7 13 1 2 1 Selection procedure eee e vy dead sees e e p te P dle e re Ee RE Ra 7 13 7 22 NOES ON SelectiOns ceo stia Stet p ate e a eed Bess cbevbe dec cuta het a dese sone 7 13 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters When selecting a general purpose inverter first select a motor and then inverter as follows 1 Key point for selecting a motor Determine what kind of load machine is to be used calculate its moment of inertia and then select the appropriate motor capacity 2 Key point for selecting an inverter Taking into account the operation requirements e g accel
58. UL Le ois C US LISTED 1 7 1 2 Control System This section gives you a general overview of inverter control systems and features specific to the FRENIC Mini series of inverters As shown in Figure 1 8 single or three phase commercial power is converted to DC power in the converter section which is then used to charge the capacitor on the DC link bus According to control commands or signals generated in the control logic the inverter modulates the electricity charged in the capacitor to PWM Pulse Width Modulation format and feeds the output to the motor The modulation frequency is called carrier frequency As shown in Figure 1 7 the voltage waveform of the modulated power source produces pulse train with positive and negative polarity synchronized with the inverter s output command frequency The inverter feeds the produced output as drive power with sinusoidal current waveform like that of ordinary commercial power lines MI NLU PWM voltage waveform Current waveform Figure 1 7 Output Voltage and Current Waveform of the Inverter For the set frequency given in the control logic the accelerator decelerator processor calculates the acceleration deceleration rate required by run stop control of the motor and transfers the calculated results to the 3 phase voltage command processor directly or via the V f pattern generator LU Refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 7 Drive Command Controller for details
59. Use a passive capacitor Measures at for control circuit MADE Use ferrite core for 8 control circuit sides Line filter Separate power supply systems Lower the carrier frequency Y Y Y Y Ez E a EA E Y Effective Y Effective conditionally Blank Not effective A 5 What follows is noise prevention measures for the inverter drive configuration 1 Wiring and grounding As shown in Figure A 7 separate the main circuit wiring from control circuit wiring as far as possible regardless of being located inside or outside the system control panel containing an inverter Use shielded wires and twisted shielded wires that will block out extraneous noises and minimize the wiring distance Also avoid bundled wiring of the main circuit and control circuit or parallel wiring Shielding plate steel plate Shielding plate steel plate Signal line j Power line _ Signal line In a case of duct In a case of rack Figure A 7 Separate Wiring For the main circuit wiring use a metal conduit pipe and connect its wires to the ground to prevent noise propagation refer to Figure A 8 The shield braided wire of a shielded wire should be securely connected to the base common side of the signal line at only one point to avoid the loop formation resulting from a multi point connection refer to Figure A 9 The grounding is effective not only to reduce the risk of electrical shocks due to leakage current bu
60. a v0E PORO RENIN EUR O Tes TTT HT Woy yndyng yee gjey wey sea QO l uonoejeg auno iv HI INIM 1g vonseied waung je e1 MOT Q 1248 ual an uonoejeg 1ueuno O 96 i TT dO 13009 uonue eig peopero T O EN Yl Buuuny 1ewenut 1010W 40 ono 98 Jeuueu oiuog2e 3 Ot UE 3311 wer eunsi l CH oz AMD uomneiedo ui Aes OF GD 10 Sure Aue3 peoparo 1010W 1040 JO 04u09 Cua l Jeuueu oIuo429 3 Q 5 Jd ame amod snoeusjuejsu Woy Ai64098M Joye uejseJ ojny B HR Ine vege TD O ES 101 Sumun anbio l Bi i 440 iejeq eBeyoArepu O le nn a eBeyoniepun 0001 ot e uonoejeg AouenbeJ4 NO p n z 104 He 240 a 2 Q lt O m My Pubis pawy Aouenbe4 SiSaJo s H l indino J0jsisuea O Door Q O 7 Nn 0 lt peedg Buuuny eyieAu 2 l oza ndjno sos sueaL LAT euni uon39jeq aung Mo uonoojeg uang 1 BurueA ye3 peoueac a487 uone edo uonoejeg yang MoT 4 uonoejeg wanno Burgess Aeg peojriaAQ Quesuog awy euueu uogoajold 19497 uogeJedo peouerg 100W E80 uonoejeg Sruojnela 18497 uoneJedo 104 uonoejeq Kouenbau uonesueduio dijs eojeg ouenbe 4 3ndino Figure 4 4 Digital Output Signal Selector 4 10 4 5 Digital Output Selector The block diagram shown in Figure 4 4 shows you the processes to select the internal logic signals for feeding to two digital output signals Y1 and 30A B C The output terminals Y1 a transistor switch and 30A B C mechanical r
61. and Keys on the Keypad 7 segment As shown at the right the keypad Program Reset key LED monitor RUN key Potentiometer consists of a 7 segment LED monitor a potentiometer POT and six keys The keypad allows you to run and stop the motor monitor running status and switch to the menu mode In the menu mode you can set the function code data to match your operating requirements and monitor I O signal states maintenance information and alarm information Function Data key Down key Up key STOP key Figure 2 4 Keypad Table 2 1 Overview of Keypad Functions Monitor Potentiometer i Functions and Keys Four digit 7 segment LED monitor which displays the running status data settings and alarm status of the inverter according to the operation modes 5 nonin In Running mode the monitor displays running status information e g LI UL LU output frequency current and voltage In Programming mode it displays menus function codes and their data In Alarm mode it displays an alarm N code which identifies the error factor if the protective function is activated QO Potentiometer POT which is used to manually set frequency auxiliary frequencies 1 and 2 or PID process command A Q UP DOWN keys Press these keys to select the setting items and change the function data displayed on the LED monitor Program Reset key Press this key to switch the operation modes of the inverter Pressing this key in Running mode
62. any effect so do not use it in this case In addition note that setting an extremely short deceleration time may cause an overvoltage alarm failure of the inverter even if the time is multiplied by 3 keep this in mind when setting deceleration time Disable this function when the inverter features a braking resistor If it is enabled the braking resistor and regenerative energy suppressing control may conflict with each other which may change the deceleration time unexpectedly 9 2 Details of Function Codes H70 Overload Prevention Control Frequency drop rate Enables overload suppressing control If enabled this function code is used to set the deceleration Hz s Before the inverter enters Alarm mode due to heat sink overheat or overload alarm code LiH or LiL Lh this control decreases the output frequency of the inverter to suppress the trip Data for H70 Function Decelerate by deceleration time 1 F08 or 2 E11 Decelerate by 0 01 to 100 0 Hz sec Disable overload suppression control When overload suppressing control is enabled the inverter decelerates the motor according to the set deceleration rate if the temperature anywhere inside the inverter exceeds the alarm detection level Apply this control to equipment such as pumps whose drive frequency drops in line with any decrease in load If you want to proceed to drive such kind of equipment even the inverter slows down the output frequency enable
63. any errors or omissions you may have found or any suggestions you may have for generally improving the manual In no event will Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd be liable for any direct or indirect damages resulting from the application of the information in this manual
64. are implemented by software as a function codes F43 and F44 Generally software features have an operation delay so enable function code H12 as well Depending upon the load acceleration in an extremely short period may activate the current limiter to suppress the increase of the inverter output frequency causing the system oscillate hunting or making the inverter enter the o Alarm mode and trip When setting the acceleration time therefore you need to take into account the load condition and moment of inertia Motors and Inverters Thermistor Input Selection Thermistor Input Operation level Refer to Chapter 7 Section 7 1 Selecting Set these function codes to protect the motor from an overheat hazard using the PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient thermistor embedded in the motor m Thermistor Select H26 Enables or disables overheating protection for the motor using the PTC thermistor which senses motor temperature m Thermistor Operation Level H27 Data for H26 Function Disable overheating protection Enable overheating protection Determines the operation level for the overheating protection Data setting range 0 00 to 5 00 V Connect the PTC thermistor as shown in the figure at the right The input current from terminal C1 flows across the Resistor resistor R2 and yields the voltage If the 1k voltage exceeds the operation level set by function code H27 the ove
65. are sent to the ground side with relay contacts in the ceiling part Inverter 1 The wiring is separated by more than 11 81 in 30 cm 2 When separation is impossible signals can be received and sent with dry contacts etc 3 Do not wire weak current signal lines and power lines in parallel device electric Prox imity limit switch electro static type Table A 2 Continued Phenomena A photoelectric relay malfunctioned when the inverter was operated i I Power Distance of 131 ft 40 m supply line Amplifier Light Light Photoelectric emitting eceiving relay part part lt Possible cause gt Although the inverter and photoelectric relay are separated by a sufficient distance but the power supplies share a common connection it is considered that conduction noise entered through the power supply line into the photoelectric relay A proximity limit switch malfunctioned Inverter Power supply Power Proximity limit supply switch lt Possible cause It is considered that the capacitance type proximity limit switch 1s susceptible to conduction and radiation noise because of its low noise immunity Noise prevention measures 1 Inserta 0 1 uF capacitor between the output common terminal of the amplifier of the photoelectric relay and the frame Light Light emitting receiving part 1 Install an LC filter at the output side of the inverter 2 Ins
66. calculate the value by interpolation Note The correction coefficient D is to be determined as a matter of consultation between the customer and electric power supplier for the customers receiving the electric power over 2000 kW or from the special high voltage lines 4 Degree of harmonics to be calculated The higher the degree of harmonics the lower the current flows This is the property of harmonics generated by inverters so that the inverters are covered by The case not causing a special hazard of the term 3 in the above Appendix for the 9th or higher degrees of the harmonics Therefore It is sufficient that the 5th and 7th harmonic currents should be calculated i 3 Examples of calculation Equivalent capacity S capacity and Example of loads Conversion factor Equivalent capacity Example 1 400V 5 HP 10 units 4 61 kVA X10 units K32 1 4 4 61 x 10x 1 4 w AC reactor and DC reactor 64 54 kVA Example 2 400V 2 HP 15 units 2 93 kVA X 15 units K34 1 8 2 93 x 15 x 1 8 w AC reactor 79 11 kVA 2 Harmonic current every degrees Example 1 400V 5 HP 10 units w AC reactor and maximum availability 0 55 Fundamental current onto 6 6 kV lines mA Harmonic current onto 6 6 kV lines mA Pom decr d 0d 025 TUS iE TY x10 3940 X 0 55 2167 823 5 314 2 2 t to Tables B 4 and Refer to Table B 5 Example 2 400V 5HP 15 units w AC reactor and DC reactor and maximum availabi
67. capacitor Do not mount power factor correcting capacitors in the inverter s primary circuit Use the DC reactor to improve the inverter power factor Do not use power factor correcting capacitors in the inverter output circuit An overcurrent trip will occur disabling motor operation Discontinuance of surge killer Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s secondary circuit Combina i Use of a filter and shielded wires is typically recommended to satisfy EMC tion with Reducing noise e d directives peripheral devices If an overvoltage trip occurs while the inverter is stopped or operated under Measures against a light load it is assumed that the surge current is generated by open close surge currents of the phase advancing capacitor in the power system Connect a DC reactor to the inverter When checking the insulation resistance of the inverter use a 500 V megger Megger test and follow the instructions contained in the FRENIC Mini Instruction Manual Chapter 7 Section 7 4 Insulation Test Control circuit When using remote control limit the wiring length between the inverter and wiring length operator box to 65 6 ft 20 m or less and use twisted pair or shielded cable If long wiring 1s used between the inverter and the motor the inverter will Wiring length overheat or trip as a result of overcurrent high frequency current flowing between inverter into the stray capacitanc
68. command given manually and various means of switching Additional and supplemental information is given below Switching of data settings for frequency 2 C30 auxiliary frequencies 1 and 2 E60 to E62 as manual speed commands will be disabled For multistep frequency settings settings 1 to 3 are exclusively applicable to the manual PID speed command For selecting analog input terminal 12 C1 or built in POT as the PID process command you need to set proper data for function codes E60 to E62 and J02 For the multistep frequency setting data 4 C08 is exclusively applicable to PID process command To switch the operation between normal and inverse the logic inverses polarity of deviation between the PID command and its feedback turning INV command ON OFF or setting JO1 1 or 2 Refer to Section 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Generator for explanations of common items UJ r Q A z gt D E S n ui E Q O z Az Q E O O Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS 485 COMMUNICATION OPTION This chapter describes an overview of inverter operation through the RS 485 communications facility Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual for details Contents 5 1 Overview on RS 485 Communication cccceeccesseessesseesscesececcnseceseceaecaecaceaecaecaaecaeecaeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeeereenaees 5 1 5 1 1 Common specifications seien eene edit tertia ee ec id ed ee ee aet 5 2 SD
69. determine whether the parts should be replaced or not To maintain stable and reliable operation and avoid unexpected failures daily and periodic maintenance must be performed For details refer to the FRENIC Mini Instruction Manual Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION m Inverter running RUN2 Function code data 35 This signal is turned ON when the main switching circuit IGBT gates is activated it is OFF when it is not activated m Overload prevention control OLP Function code data 36 This signal is turned ON when the overload prevention facility is activated if the frequency drop rate comes to be the setting specified by function code H70 The minimum ON duration is 100 ms For details of the overload prevention control refer to the descriptions of function code H70 m Current detection ID Function code data 37 This signal is turned ON when the output current exceeds the operation level specified by function code E34 and stays in this status for the duration specified by function code E35 on delay timer The minimum ON duration is 100 ms If the output current drops to 9096 of the operation level this signal is turned OFF This signal can be used as a reference for determining the running speed in the operation of load machinery or system by monitoring the inverter s load state Chote Function codes E34 and E35 are effective not only for the current detection ID Note but often also for the ov
70. drive the motor Setting the frequency out of the range rated for the equipment driven by the inverter may cause damage or a dangerous situation Set a maximum frequency appropriate for the equipment Data setting range 25 0 to 400 0 Hz S CN Note li Tip i AUR In general internal impedance of high speed motors is low This may cause unstable motor inverter behavior When this kind of motor is used it is recommended that the carrier frequency F26 be set to 15 kHz and the motor inverter operation be checked Keep the ratio between base frequency F04 and maximum frequency to 1 8 or less 9 14 9 2 Details of Function Codes Base Frequency Refer to H50 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency Refer to H51 These function codes set the base frequency and the voltage at the base frequency essentially required for running the motor properly If combined with the related function codes H50 and H51 these function codes may set data needed to drive the motor along the non linear V f pattern The following description includes setting up required for the non linear V f pattern m Base frequency F04 Set the rated frequency printed on the nameplate located on the motor Data setting range 25 0 to 400 0 Hz m Rated voltage at base frequency F05 Set 0 or the rated voltage printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor If 0 is set the rated voltage at base frequency is determined by the power source of the
71. e cede ele des oN BO eR e edes 8 1 8 2 Three ph se 460 V assessed RE rep eee lere ti e ede ra 8 2 8 1 3 Single phase 230 V c REESE ERIS Rete hese ae Be A ee SEHEN 8 3 8 2 Models Available on Order ier Ae b Ee uere tote 8 4 8 2 1 EMG filter built in type x ee tiet ash t he it e i erbe es 8 4 8 2 1 1 iIhreesph se230 W iiu nuueree done daa n Om Iob Rt 8 4 8 2121 Thiree phase 460 V taste etur e ae ret a a v a HUS 8 5 8 21 23 Single ph se 230 Vis eaten eetiag ae ie OE eo OQ a RO ensi acidity 8 6 8 22 Braking resistor built in type eie etie EP DR RET de deed He Ee 8 7 8 22 Three phase 230 V sese Re UP ER Re eerte en Raine 8 7 8 2 2 2 TThree phase 460 V sss ette hee EUR e eL EUER RR EE DERE ee ERR OUR 8 8 83 Common Specifications este e tr e eteie ag deeds it ente twos 8 9 84 Terminal Specifications inis deceret eee d eie TR HH a e eee E RH end 8 11 84 Terminal functions Te RED e des eite tte de He ede ie te ETE deg eia te ee ces 8 11 8 4 2 Terminal block arrangement sess ener nnne nenne nennen 8 23 8 4 3 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications ssssesesresessesstsresetsessteeesseseesresersesseene 8 24 8 4 3 1 Main circuit terminals esses eene nnne enne en nnne 8 24 8 4 3 2 Control circuit terminal zac cete Rhe aee dre e eti ce dee odere ced 8 25 8 5 Operating Environment and Storage Environment sesesssesesee eene 8 26 8 511
72. f pattern refer to the descriptions of function code F04 ACC DEC Time Jogging operation Sets both the acceleration and deceleration time for jogging operations Data setting range 0 00 to 3600 sec Refer to function codes E01 to E03 Terminal assignment of X1 to X3 for details on jogging operations Low Limiter Min freq when limiter is activated When the output current limiter and or overload suppressing feature is activated this function limits the bottom of the frequency that may vary due to reaction of the limit control Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Automatic Deceleration Regenerative energy suppressing Enables regenerative energy suppressing Data for H69 control Disable Enable The moment that a regenerative energy exceeding the capacity of the inverter is returned when braking is being applied to the motor the inverter will shut its output down and enter overvoltage alarm mode If regenerative energy suppressing control is enabled the inverter lengthens the deceleration time to 3 times that of the set time while the DC link bus voltage exceeds the preset voltage suppressing level and decreases the deceleration torque to 1 3 In this way the inverter makes the motor reduce the regenerative energy tentatively This control is used to suppress torque generated by the motor in deceleration Conversely when the load on the motor results in a braking effect the control does not have
73. filter to meet radio noise regulations Use them according to the targeted effect for reducing noise Power supply transformers include common insulated transformers shielded transformers and noise cutting transformers These transformers have different effectiveness in blocking noise propagation Inverter Inverter Inverter AW A Power Power c Ea aA supply supply a Jd supply a Capacitive filter b Inductive filter c LC filter zero phase reactor or ferrite ring Figure A 10 Various Filters and their Connection 4 Noise prevention measures at the receiving side It is important to strengthen the noise immunity of those electronic devices installed in the same control panel as the inverter or located near an inverter Line filters and shielded or twisted shielded wires are used to block the penetration of noise in the signal lines of these devices The following treatments are also implemented 1 Lower the circuit impedance by connecting capacitors or resistors to the input and output terminals of the signal circuit in parallel 2 Increase the circuit impedance for noise by inserting choke coils in series in the signal circuit or passing signal lines through ferrite core beads It is also effective to widen the signal base lines 0 V line or grounding lines 5 Other The level of generating propagating noise will change with the carrier frequency of the inverter The higher the car
74. for undervoltage Always 0 1 when the inverter output is shut down 1 during DC braking 1 during running in the reverse direction 1 during running in the forward direction Table 3 7 Running Status Display LED No Bit Notation Binary 1 0 0 Hexa LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 decimal on the LED monitor 3 16 Hexadecimal expression A 16 bit binary number is expressed in hexadecimal format 4 bits Table 3 8 shows the expression corresponding to decimals The hexadecimals are shown as they appear on the LED monitor 3 3 Programming Mode Table 3 8 Binary and Hexadecimal Conversion Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Binary oO r1r1o o jo oyro o o 3 3 4 Checking I O signal status I O Checking With Menu 4 I O checking you may display the status of external I O signals without using a measuring instrument External signals that can be displayed include digital I O signals and analog I O signals Table 3 9 lists check items available The status transition for I O checking is shown in Figure 3 8 LED monitor shows LIF 14 LIL I Display contents I O signals on the control circuit terminals Table 3 9 I O Check Items Description Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals Refer to 1 Displaying control I O signal terminals on
75. for inverters of 2 HP or higher 3 NEMA kit NEMA kit when fitted to the FRENIC Mini series protects the inverter body with the structure that conforms to the NEMA standard approved as UL TYPE1 Table 6 18 NEMA Kit Applicable a FRNF25C1S 2U NEMATO2682 FRNFSOCIS 2U NEMA1 0 4C 1 2 Three phase 230 V FRNOOICIS 2U NEMAI 0 75C1 2 2 2C 1 2 FRNOOCIS 2U NEMAI 2 2C1 2 FRN00OSCIS 2U NEMAI 3 7C1 2 ERNESOCIS AU NEMAI1 0 4C1 4 FRNOOLCIS 4U NEMAI 0 75C 1 4 Three phase 460 V FRN002C1S 4U PUT FRNOOICIS 4U NEMA1 22CI2 FRNOOSCIS 4U NEMAI 3 7C1 2 FRNEZSCIS 7U NEMAI 0 2C 1 2 Note For the inverter type FRN_ C1S _U the symbols are replaced with any of the following numeral codes 21 Braking resistor built in type None Standard type The braking resistor built in type is limited to the inverters for 2 HP or larger Single phase 230 V MODEL C 6 26 6 4 Selecting Options 6 4 4 Meter options 1 Frequency meters Connect a frequency meter to analog signal output terminals FMA and 11 of the inverter to measure the frequency component selected by function code F31 Figure 6 15 shows the dimensions ofthe frequency meter and a connection example Model TRM 45 10 VDC 1 mA M77 45 033 85 i M3 Units inch mm 0 3150 04 81 M2 3 IR 28 0 12 3 e m o q E D O wo N T 1 26 32 1 26 32 0
76. icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or operations LII This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information vii CONTENTS Part 1 General Information Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC Mini kl JEeatutesoce ec ie e e ertet eerte e Hie ee D endete eee as eee dum 1 1 1 2 Control Systemic eR ten dte OR Rh IR Ue ER RE e ten UR Re 1 8 13 Recommended Configuration eee dee serere dee tei i e e ede eee eee e a ie ee Regn 1 9 Chapter 2 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS 2 1 External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks nennen 2 1 2 2 LED Monitor Potentiometer and Keys on the Keypad ssssssssseseeeeeeeeneee nenne 2 2 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 3 1 Overview of Operation Modes cccececsseessessceesceesceeceseceaeceaeceaecsaecseecaeeesecaeecaeecaeseseseeeseeeeseseeeseenseeaees 3 1 32 Running Mode esent ee OU ERREUR REN REIR e ER QE e 3 3 3 2 1 Run stop the motor ti a cotees eevee seas staan aa tte ipe GO ng 3 3 3 22 Setupthe set frequency and others ce ee ee dee e e eU ed dee dere ouis 3 3 3 2 3 Monitor the running status snra e E E EEE R nennen E enn eene nennen nnns 3 5 3 2 4 Jog inch the motor sss eene nennen trennen inrer eere 3 7 3 3 Programming Modes eR ESSERE RR d TUER 3 8 3 3 1 Setting the function codes Data Setting eere 3 9 3 3 2 Checking changed function codes Data Checking 0 ccecesceesee
77. in Appendix of the Guideline you have to previously know the input fundamental current Apply the appropriate value shown in Table B 4 based on the kW rating of the motor irrespective of the inverter type or whether a reactor is used Note If the input voltage is different calculate the input fundamental current in inverse proportion ote tothe voltage Table B 4 Input Fundamental Currents of General purpose Inverters Determined by the Applicable Motor Ratings Applicable motor rating 1 2 1 2 3 5 7 5 HP fundamental 460v 0 81 1 37 2 75 3 96 6 50 955 current A epe e Ral e a App B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics for Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High Voltage 2 Calculation of harmonic current Usually calculate the harmonic current according to the Sub table 3 Three phase bridge rectifier with the filtering capacitor in Table 2 of the Guideline s Appendix Table B 5 lists the contents of the Sub table 3 Table B 5 Generated Harmonic Current 3 phase Bridge Rectifier Capacitor Filtering WE reactors ACR and DOR 0 ACR 3 DCR Accumulated energy equal to 0 08 to 0 15 ms 100 load conversion Smoothing capacitor Accumulated energy equal to 15 to 30 ms 100 load conversion Load 100 Calculate the harmonic current of each degree using the following equation Generated nth harmonic current 96 nth harmonic current A Fundamental current A x 1
78. is an adjustable function code data to meet the property of a motor that is not manufactured by Fuji Electric Related function code F12 Torque boost If a general purpose motor is run with an inverter voltage drops will have a pronounced effect in a low frequency region reducing the motor output torque In a low frequency range therefore to increase the motor output torque it is necessary to augment the output voltage This process of voltage compensation is called torque boost Related function code F09 Output voltage V Torque boost 0 Output frequency Hz Transistor output A control signal that generates predefined data from within an inverter via a transistor open collector Trip In response to an overvoltage overcurrent or any other unusual condition actuation of an inverter s protective circuit to stop the inverter output V f characteristic A characteristic expression of the variations in output voltage V V and relative to variations in output frequency f Hz To achieve efficient motor operation an appropriate V f voltage frequency characteristic helps a motor produce its output torque matching the torque characteristics of a load Q O o o o 5 lt V f control The rotating speed N r min of a motor can be stated in an expression as N 120xf a y p where f Output frequency p Number of poles s Slippage On the basis of this expression varying the output fre
79. mm f m W x10 XN o 3 2 Mini 26 E NIB N AN N aola ola olo leo Nlo NlOo N N oJ E oO BIS o gon I NIB al aL al ale al ND OS als als ofS ofS ofso S 9 8 Si Sie all9 sll9 sll9 sl EE les wy oio oj RS NIB N la Slo Sle ale dle in LAG SAG Ie S c9 e ATS Palos NIL OLS oL c w Ni I S PECES PNE d PE PESES PERSEN N O gt 9 gt 9j gt 9 gt 9 gt 9 atwola olo lo aloalo 9 e 5 ei9 sll9 a9 al9 s A 26 App G Replacement Information G 1 2 Models available on order 1 EMC filter built in type In the European version the EMC filter built in type is provided as a standard model In other versions it is available on order FVR C9S vs FRENIC Mini FVR C9S IP20 Standard unit wit a foot mount filter Ambient temperature 50 C 122 F External dimensions inch mm Mounting area Volume External dimensions inch mm FRENIC Mini Planning values IP20 Ambient temperature 50 C 122 F Mount ing area f m x10 tm Mini 26 Mini 96 1 4 72 3 94 3 54 120 100 90 4 72 3 94 3 54 120 100 90 4 72 120 4 72 5 51 3 543 120 140 90 7 09 7 17 4 65 180 182 118 7 09 7 17 4 65 180 182 118 7 09 7 17 4 65 180 182 118 5 118
80. output torque at 85 or less ofthe rated motor torque On the contrary raising the carrier frequency increases the inverter s power loss and raises the temperature of the inverter The inverter has a built in overload protection facility that automatically decreases the carrier frequency to protect the inverter For details about the facility refer to function code H98 a c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo 9 25 Motor Sound Tone Changes the motor running sound tone This setting is effective when carrier frequencies set to function code F27 is 7 kHz or lower Changing the tone level may reduce the high and harsh running noise from the motor Data for F27 Function Tone level 0 Tone level 1 Tone level 2 Tone level 3 Terminal FMA Gain to output voltage ra Analog Output Signal Selection for FMA Monitor object F31 allows you to output monitored data such as the output frequency or output current to terminal FMA as an analog data that can be adjusted with F30 for the meter scale m Adjusting the output voltage level F30 Adjust the output voltage level within the range of 0 to 200 supposing the monitored amount of the monitor selected with function code F31 as 100 Data setting range 0 to 200 96 High end voltage T MM 10 V Full scale mee Fa fies cona coco Terminal FMA Output voltage F30 20096 7 F30 100 F30 50 Sis 0 50 100 Meter sc
81. reducing radio interference rl DC REACTOR Use the DCR to normalize the power supply in the Power transformer capacity DCR following cases why 1 The power transformer capacity is SOOKVA or over and exceeds the inverter rated capacity by 10 times 2 The inverter and a thyristor converter are connected with the same transformer Chack if the thyristor converter uses a commulation reactor If not AC reactor must ba connected to Ihe power supply side 3 Overvoltage trip occurs due to open close of the 5e Y phase advancing capacitor for the power supply lines oF a Mw 4 The voltage unbalance exceeds 255 Max voltage V Min voltage V T Voltage unbalance 6 TR valtage V x 6 m IEC 61800 3 5 2 3 For improving input power factor reducing harmonics Used to reduce input harmonic current correcting power factor DER E E E EE aT Output circuit filter This filter is connected to the output circuit of inverters and has the following functions 1 Suppressing fluctuation of motor terminal voltage Protects the motor insulation from being damaged by surge voltage 2 Suppressing leakage current from output side wiring Reduces the leakage Current caused when several motors are operated in parallel or LNAWdINOA WHsAHdIdAd ONILOATAS connected with long wiring 3 Suppressing radiation noise or inductive noise from output side Wiring Effective noise suppression device for long winng applications such as plan
82. regardless to variations of the input source voltage or load Base frequency Output voltage V Rated voltage 7 at base frequency Output 0 4 frequency Hz Base Maximum frequency frequency The minimum frequency at which an inverter delivers a constant voltage in the output V f pattern Related function code F04 Bias A value to be added to an analog input frequency to modify and produce the output frequency Related function codes F18 C50 to C52 Braking torque Torque that acts in a direction that will stop a rotating motor or the force required to stop a running motor Power Inverter Motor During accelerating or running at constant speed Power RM Inverter During decelerating a lel o o o 5 lt If a deceleration time is shorter than the natural stopping time coast to stop determined by a moment of inertia for a load machine then the motor works as a generator when it decelerates causing the kinetic energy of the load to be converted to electrical energy that is returned to the inverter from the motor If this power regenerative power is consumed or accumulated by the inverter the motor generates a braking force called braking torque Carrier frequency Frequency used to modulate a modulated frequency to establish the modulation period of a pulse width under the PWM control system The higher the carrier frequency the closer the inv
83. restart Comes ON when the calculated value of electronic thermal relay is higher than the preset alarm level Outputs alarm signal according to the preset lifetime level Comes ON during inverter control for avoiding overload Comes ON when a current larger than the set value has been detected for the timer set time Comes ON when a current smaller than the set value has been detected for the timer set time Alarm signal is output as the transistor output signal Related function codes E20 0 E20 35 E20 E20 2 E31 E20 3 E20 5 F43 F44 E20 6 F14 E2027 F10 to F12 E20 26 H04 H05 E20 30 H42 H43 E20 36 H70 E20 237 E34 E35 E2041 E34 E35 E20 7 99 a 2 m Q I S o Z 77 RS 485 communications port Connector g S a fo 2 5 g g o O RS 485 communications Uo Functions 1 Used to connect the inverter with PC or PLC using RS 485 port 2 Used to connect the inverter with the remote keypad The inverter supplies the power to the remote keypad through the extension cable RJ 45 connector is used For the transmission specifications refer to Chapter 6 Section 6 4 2 2 RS 485 communications card This terminal is valid when the standard inverter is equipped with RS 485 communications card option Related function codes 4 Route the wiring of the control terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit as
84. run and stop motor The FWD or REV command should be ON for forward or reverse rotation 1 Enable the external signal command FWD or REV command to run motor 2 Enable 9 and 6 keys on the built in keypad to run stop motor forward 3 Enable 9 and 6 keys on the built in keypad to run stop motor reverse F03 Maximum Frequency 25 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz N Y 60 0 9 14 F04 Base Frequency 25 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz N Y 60 0 9 15 F05 Rated Voltage at Base 0 Output a voltage in line with 1 V N Y2 230 9 15 Frequency variance in input voltage 80 to 240 Output a voltage AVR controlled 460 Note 1 160 to 500 Output a voltage AVR controlled s Note 2 F07 Acceleration Time 1 0 00 to 3600 0 01 s Y Y 6 00 9 17 Note Acceleration time is ignored at 0 00 External gradual acceleration pattern F08 Deceleration Time 1 0 00 to 3600 0 01 s Y Y 6 00 9 17 Note Deceleration time is ignored at 0 00 External gradual deceleration pattern F09 Torque Boost 0 0 to 20 0 0 1 Y Y Fujis 9 17 The set voltage at base frequency for F05 is standard 100 torque Note This setting is effective for auto torque boost boost auto energy saving operations specified by function code F37 0 1 3 or 4 F10 Electronic Thermal 1 For general purpose motors with built in Y Y 1 Overload for Motor self cooling fan Protection 2 For inverter driven motors or high speed Select motor motors with forced ventilation fan character
85. run commands from the Loader Since the Loader automatically sets data of function codes no setting with the keypad is required If the PC runs out of control in RS 485 communication a stop command may not be sent to the inverter To prevent this from happening set 0 to y99 so that the inverter will follow the settings of function code H30 Note that the inverter cannot save the data setting in y99 Turning the power off resets the data in y99 to 0 Function Data for y99 Frequency command source Setting of H30 Run command source Setting of H30 Loader S01 and S05 Setting of H30 Setting of H30 Loader S06 Loader S01 and S05 Loader S06 a c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Appendices Contents App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise ecceeseeeceesecesecesececeeecesectecaeeeseeeseeneeenes 1 A 1 Effect of inverters on other devices ua soc a epe ih DU EN de doni test base Mni 1 A 2 Noises c 8 Ne aa a et a a a on OEE a a 2 A 3 Noise luum 4 App B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High Voltage tret ve R E A tibecentete eS 12 B 1 Application to general purpose inverters esses 12 B 2 Compliance to the harmonic suppression for customers receiving high voltage or Speclalhi sh VOMAGS 2 4 on co He temet EU diese a aa a a aa nio a t cete 13 A
86. selected with E61 and E62 Voltage input termnal 12 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 E61 Current input terminal C1 4 to 20 mADC O to 100 E62 Automatic Makes the deceleration time 3 times longer to avoid DL trip when DC link H69 deceleration circuit voltage exceeds the overvollage limit Set at the function code H69 1 Trip may occur even when deceleration time is prolonged if Ihe moment of inertia is large This function does not come ON during constant speed operation Overload Prevents tripping before the inverter becomes overloaded T H70 prevention control e ata Energy saving Minimizes motor losses at light load F37 operation Can be set in accordance with the kind of load variable torque load increasing in proportion to the square of speed constant torque load automatic torque boost Fan stop Detects inverter internal temperature and stops cooling tan when the temperature is low H06 operation Running Speed monitor output current A output voltage V input power HP E43 PID process command PID feedback value E48 Select the speed monitor to be displayed from the following Output frequency before slip compensation Hz output frequency after slip compensation Hz sel frequency Hz load shaft speed r min line speed ft min constant feeding rate time i aa Speed monitor can display the speed set at E48 d Stopping Displays the same contents as displayed during running Same as a
87. signal PID process command or E61 e E PID feedback signal Frequency Used as additional auxiliary setting to various main E61 auxiliary setting settings of frequency Electric characteristics of terminal 12 Input impedance 22 KQ Allowable maximum input voltage 15 VDC If the input voltage is 10 VDC or over the inverter assumes it to be 10 VDC C1 Current input The frequency is set according to the external analog F18 input current command C37 to Normal 4 to 20 mADC O to 100 C33 operation Inverse 20 to 4 mADC 0 to 100 switchable by digital operation input signal PID control Used for reference signal PID process command or E62 2 m Q I S J o Z 77 Related Functions function codes C1 For PTC Connects a PTC thermistor for motor protection H26 thermistor Connect an 1 KQ external resistor to terminal 13 H27 C1 Control circuit 10VDC 13 Resistor Operation level TKR H27 2 i er External PTC Resistor alarm thermistor 2500 ov Frequency Used as additional auxiliary setting to various main E62 5 auxiliary setting settings of frequency E gt Electric characteristics of terminal C1 8 Input impedance 2500 lt Allowable maximum input current 30 mADC If the input current exceeds 20 mADC the inverter will limit it at 20 mADC voe lt Control circuit gt 13 C1 AD C conve
88. so as not to over excite the motor The maximum output torque of the motor will be increased CH If the automatic torque boost is enabled F37 2 or 5 function code F09 will be NUS ignored If either the torque in proportion to the square of the speed or the constant torque is selected F37 0 1 3 or 4 it is necessary to modify the F09 data Torque boost 0 0 to 20 0 f a motor parameter is a special one or the rigidity of the load is not sufficient lowering the maximum output torque or unstable operation may sometimes result To avoid this happening disable the automatic torque boost F37 0 or 1 and set the torque boost with F09 manually Auto energy saving operation This feature controls the terminal voltage of the motor automatically to minimize the motor power loss Note that this feature may not be effective depending upon the motor characteristics Check the properties before using this feature The inverter enables this feature for constant speed operation only During acceleration and deceleration the inverter will run with manual or automatic torque boost depending on the data setting of function code F37 If auto energy saving operation is enabled the response to a change in motor speed may be slow Do not use this feature for a system that requires quick acceleration and deceleration Auto torque Auto energy Data for F37 Load selection boost saving Remarks c z O a O Z Q O Og
89. supply transformer to the motor The various propagation routes are shown in Figure A 2 According to those routes noises are roughly classified into three types conduction noise induction noise and radiation noise Power supply Radio transformer 1 g jr Machine Electronic device Figure A 2 Noise Propagation Routes 1 Conduction noise Noise generated in an inverter may propagate through the conductor and power supply so as to affect peripheral devices of the inverter Figure A 3 This noise is called conduction noise Some conduction noises will propagate through the main circuit If the ground wires are connected to a common ground conduction noise will propagate through route As shown in route some conduction noises will propagate through signal lines or shielded wires Inverter apeememecccccnt ra a9 k r v IS i Elacironic GS device Signal line Sensor Power supply Figure A 3 Conduction Noise 2 Induction noise When wires or signal lines of peripheral devices are brought close to the wires on the input and output sides of the inverter through which noise current is flowing noise will be induced into those wires and signal lines of the devices by electromagnetic induction Figure A 4 or electrostatic induction Figure A 5 This is called induction noise Power supply Inverter Electronic device Signal line Sensor Figure A
90. switches the inverter to Programming mode and vice versa In Alarm mode pressing this key after removing the error factor will switch the inverter to Running mode Function Data key Pressing this key in Running mode switches the information displayed output frequency Hz current Amps or voltage V Pressing this key in Programming mode displays the function code and sets the data entered using J V keys or the POT Pressing this key in Alarm mode displays information concerning the alarm code currently displayed on the LED monitor FRENIC Mini features three operation modes Running Programming and Alarm modes Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 1 Overview of Operation Modes 2 2 2 2 LED Monitor Potentiometer and Keys on the Keypad m LED monitor In Running mode the LED monitor displays running status information output frequency current or voltage in Programming mode it displays menus function codes and their data in Alarm mode it displays an alarm code which identifies the error factor if the protective function is activated If one of LED4 through LED 1 is blinking it means that the cursor is at this digit allowing you to change it If the decimal point of LEDI is blinking it means that the currently displayed data is a PID process command not the frequency data usually displayed LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 MMM LILII LILILILS Figure 2 5 7 Segment LED Monitor Table 2 2 Alphanumeric Character
91. table below show the control circuit terminal arrangement screw sizes and tightening torque They are the same in all FRENIC Mini models Screw size M 2 Screw size M 2 5 Screw size Tightening torque M 2 0 1 6 Ib in 0 2 N m M2 5 321b in 0 4 N m Stick terminal Bared wire see the table below Terminal RE Allowable wire length Opening dimension in symbol size yzzzza the control terminals a Jie W 6 Phillips screwdriver m 30A 30B iis anid AWG22 to AWGIS E 0 11 W x 0 7 H inch o 30C 0 34 to 0 75 mm 2 7 W x 1 8 H mm m No 1 screw tip 6 to 8 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver for S isi hi 0 20 to 0 28 S Other than precision machine AWG24 to AWG18 ae 0 07 W x 0 06 H inch A those above JCIS standard 0 25 to 0 75 mm 1 7 W x 1 6 H mm 5 to 7 mm No 0 screw tip Recommended stick terminal Manufacturing company WAGO Company of Japan Ltd Type 216 000 Screw size Wire size w isolation collar w o isolation collar Short type Long type Short type Long type AWQG24 0 25 mm AWG22 0 34 mm AWG20 0 50 mm AWGIS 0 75 mm The recommended crimping tool is Name Variocrimp 4 Model No 206 204 8 5 Operating Environment and Storage Environment 8 5 1 Operating environment The operating environment for FRENIC Mini shows below Item Ambient temperature Specifications 10 to 50 C 14 to 122 F
92. the harmonic current that flows from the customer s receiving point out to the system is subjected to the regulation The regulation value is proportional to the contract demand The regulation values specified in the guideline are shown in Table B 1 Appendix B 2 gives you some supplemental information with regard to estimation for the equivalent capacity of the inverter for compliance to Japanese guideline for suppressing harmonics by customers receiving high voltage or special high voltage Table B 1 Upper Limits of Harmonic Outflow Current per kW of Contract Demand mA HP Receiving 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd Over voltage 25th 3 When the regulation applied The guideline has been applied As the application the estimation for Voltage waveform distortion rate required as the indispensable conditions when entering into the consumer s contract of electric power is already expired Compliance to the harmonic suppression for customers receiving high voltage or special high voltage When calculating the required matters related to inverters according to the guideline follow the terms listed below The following descriptions are based on Technical document for suppressing harmonics JEGE 9702 1995 published by the Japan Electrical Manufacturer s Association JEMA 1 Calculation of equivalent capacity Pi The equivalent capacity Pi may be calculated using the equation of input rated capacity x conversion factor However c
93. this control 4 Do not use this function to equipment whose load does not slow if the inverter CNote NH output frequency drops as it will have no effect To avoid any conflict between overload suppressing control and any other frequency lowering features this control does not function if the features to limit the output current are enabled F43 z 0 and H12 1 To force this control to enabled status set 0 for function codes F43 and H12 Gain for Suppression of Output Current Fluctuation The inverter output current driving the motor may fluctuate due to the motor characteristics and or backlash in the load mechanism Modify the data in function code H80 to adjust the amount in order to suppress such fluctuation However as incorrect setting of this amount may cause a much larger current fluctuation do not modify the default setting unless it is necessary Data setting range 0 00 to 0 20 Motor overload memory retention This is Motor overload memory Electrical thermal O L relay retention selection at power up Data for H89 Function Inactive When power up the drive Motor overload data is reset Active When power is down the drive stores Motor overload data and use this data at next power up DC Braking Braking mode Refer to F21 For details of setting the braking mode refer to the descriptions of function code F21 c z O a O Z Q O 0 m Qo STOP Key Priority Start Check Function
94. using a programmable logic controller PLC Figure 8 4 shows two examples of a circuit that turns ON or OFF control signal input X1 X2 X3 FWD or REV using a programmable logic controller PLC Circuit a has a connecting jumper applied to SINK whereas circuit b has it applied to SOURCE In circuit a below short circuiting or opening the transistor s open collector circuit in the PLC using an external power source turns ON or OFF control signal X1 X2 X3 FWD or REV When using this type of circuit observe the following Connect the node of the external power source which should be isolated from the PLC s power to terminal PLC of the inverter Do not connect terminal CM of the inverter to the common terminal of the PLC Control circuit PLC Control circuit s C PLC PLC SINK SINKI I l l T L iol SOURCE l LI KIHK FWD REV D Photocoupler SOURCE X1HX3 FWD REV Photocoupler CM CM a With a jumper applied to SINK b With a jumper applied to SOURCE Figure 8 4 Circuit Configuration Using a PLC ELI For details about the jumper setting refer to the FRENIC Mini Instruction Manual Chapter 2 Section 2 3 8 Switching of SINK SOURCE jumper s
95. value Output frequency Hz before slip compensation x Function code E50 CL Jis displayed for 10000 r min or m min or more When is displayed the data is overflowing which means that the function code should be reviewed For example Load shaft speed Displayed data x 10 r min 3 d PID process N A These commands are displayed through the use of function commands code E40 and E41 PID display coefficient A and B Display value PID process command x PID display coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears 3 41 PID feedback N A This value is displayed through the use of function code value E40 and function code E41 PID display coefficient A and B Display value PID feedback value x PID display coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears 3 3 Programming Mode Power ON Y Programming mode List of monitoring items Running status info Output frequency JoPE gt 3n 43507 before slip E ea ME E 1 compensation Output frequency 38 5799 after slip compensation 1 I 1 I 1 3 na LLL i 1 I 1 I 1 i 1 I 34 75 i ZU 1 1 1 I l 1 l 1 I 1 I 1 il 1 I 1 I i LO LM em A dori 30 PID feedback value Figure 3 7 Drive Monitoring Status Transition Basic key operat
96. 0 3 Ifthe inverter has been installed to the equipment or control board at construction sites where it may be subjected to humidity dust or dirt then remove the inverter and store it in a preferable environment Precautions for storage over 1 year If the inverter has not been powered on for a long time the property of the electrolytic capacitors may deteriorate Power the inverters on once a year and keep the inverters powering on for 30 to 60 minutes Do not connect the inverters to motors or run the motor 8 27 8 6 External Dimensions The diagrams below show external dimensions of FRENIC Mini according to the type 8 6 1 Standard models and models available on order braking resistor built in type 3 15 80 D 3 15 80 _ Unit inch mm 0 28 8 5 2 64 67 1926 6 5 0 08 2 Di 02 0 24 6 ae erp 4 0 20x0 24 22 4 5x6 Es Elongated hole e ELEME Sog eT NES No tt t i i 7 2 Nameplate R c Di E Power jimensions supply Inverter type __ inch mm voltage D D1 D2 FRNF12C1S 2Us 3 45 Three FRNF25C1S 2U 80 phase 37 30V FRNFSOC1S 2U 9 FRNOO1C1S 2Us FRNF12C1S 7U Heia on Lee FRNF25C1S 7U FRNF50C1S 7U FRNOO1C1S 7U i i 4 33 110 B 0 26 6 5 3 82 97 4 0 20x0 28 ZI ig 4 5x7 n E ong ted hole Unit inch mm Powe
97. 0 to 40 C 14 to 104 F Oo m D i co SNOI IVOIJIO3dS 8 2 Models Available on Order 8 2 1 EMC filter built in type In the European version the EMC filter built in type is provided as a standard model In other versions it is available on order 8 2 1 4 Three phase 230 V Power supply voltage Three phase 230 V Type FRN CIE 2U F12 F25 F50 001 002 003 005 E Le j L2 Applicable motor rating HP 1 8 1 4 1 2 2 3 Rated capacity kVA 03 0 57 11 L9 3 0 4 1 64 Rated voltage V 3 Three phase 200 V 50 Hz 200 V 220 V 230 V 60 Hz 0 8 L5 3 0 5 0 8 0 11 0 17 0 0 7 1 4 2 5 4 2 7 0 10 0 16 5 Rated current A 150 of rated output current for min 200 of rated output current for 0 5 s Output Ratings Overload capability Rated frequency Hz 50 60 Hz Phases voltage frequency Three phase 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz Voltage and frequency Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less variations Frequency 5 to 5 Momentary voltage dip When the input voltage is 165 V or more the inverter may keep running capability es Even if it drops below 165 V the inverter may keep running for 15 ms liw DCR 0 57 0 93 1 6 3 0 5 7 v6 w o DER 1 T 21 53 9 5 Required power supply capacity kVA Torque 100 50 Torque 150 Input Ratings Rated current A 0 3
98. 00 3 Maximum availability factor For a load for elevators which provides intermittent operation or a load with a sufficient designed motor rating reduce the current by multiplying the equation by the maximum availability factor of the load The maximum availability factor of an appliance means the ratio of the capacity of the harmonic generator in operation at which the availability reaches the maximum to its total capacity and the capacity of the generator in operation is an average for 30 minutes In general the maximum availability factor is calculated according to this definition but the standard values shown in Table B 6 are recommended for inverters for building equipment Table B 6 Availability Factors of Inverters etc for Building Equipment Standard Values Equipment Inverter capacity Single inverter type category availability onani Over 300 HP a Eo o A E Sanay pomp 99 mewo 0s Refrigerator 50 kW or less freezer UPS 6 pulse 200 kVA Correction coefficient according to contract demand level Since the total availability factor decreases if the scale of a building increases calculating reduced harmonics with the correction coefficient D defined in Table B 7 is permitted Table B 7 Correction Coefficient according to the Building Scale dd Pee Correction HD coefficient p Note If the contract demand is between two specified values listed in Table B 7
99. 02 C03 Coa C05 C06 C07 POO Motor Characteristics No function code with same feature No setting H01 Operation time Check the alarm information from the keypad H02 Trip history Check the alarm information from the keypad EMEN Refer to Chapter 3 for details H03 Data initializing Data Initialization Data reset H04 Auto reset Times H04 Retry No of retries If the retry is disabled set 0 If enabled set 5times H05 Retry Latency time A 32 App G Replacement Information FVR C11S FRENIC Mini Function Function Remarks Name Name code code H06 H20 H21 PID control Terminal 12 Function selection To select the 12 as the feedback set the data of Feedback signal select 5 Terminal C1 Function selection To select the C1 as the feedback set the data of 5 Analog Input Adjustment Gain for When the frequency is commanded in 1 5V terminal input 12 Gain select the 12 and set the C32 analog input gain for 200 Use it as 0 5V range H22 H23 H24 H25 PID control Feedback filter 000 Option select RS 485 y10 Select 2 Fuji general purpose protocol 001 002 Mode select on no response error RS 485 Mode selection on no response error o03 Timer y03 RS 485 Timer 004 1200 bps is not supported 005 Data length y05 RS 485 Data length 006 007 o08 No response error detection time y08 RS 485 No response error detection time 009 010 RS 485 command select Communications
100. 05 to C11 Overload capability The overload current that an inverter can tolerate expressed as a percentage of the rated output current and also as a permissible energization time PID control The scheme of control that brings controlled objects to a desired value quickly and accurately and which consists of three categories of action proportional integral and derivative Proportional action minimizes errors from a set point Integral action resets errors from a desired value to 0 Derivative action applies a control value in proportion to a differential component of the difference between the PID reference and feedback values See Chapter 4 Figure 4 7 Related function codes E01 to E03 E40 E41 E43 E60 to E62 C51 C52 JO1 to J06 Programming mode One of the three operation modes supported by the inverter This mode uses the menu driven system and allows the user to set function codes or check the inverter status maintenance information G 4 PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient thermistor Type of thermistor with a positive temperature coefficient Used to safeguard a motor Related function codes H26 and H27 Rated capacity The rating of an inverter output capacity at the secondary side or the apparent power that is represented by the rated output voltage times the rated output current which is calculated by solving the following equation and is stated in kVA Rated capacity kVA 3 x Rated
101. 1 50 E 1 01 to 2 00 2 2 90 2 90 2 90 o 2 01 to 3 00 3 4 00 4 00 4 00 a 3 01 to 5 00 5 6 30 6 30 6 30 5 01 to 7 50 7 5 9 30 9 30 9 30 7 51 to 10 00 10 12 70 12 70 12 70 NOTE The above values in the Rated current column are exclusively applicable to the four pole Fuji standard motors rated for 230 V and 460 V at 60 Hz If you use non standard or other manufacturer s motors change the P02 data to the rated current printed on the motor s nameplate a c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Retry No of retries Retry Latency time To automatically exit from the alarm status and restart the inverter use the retry functions In doing so the inverter automatically exits from Alarm mode and restarts without issuing a block alarm even if it has entered the forced Alarm mode If the inverter has entered Alarm mode during retry specified by function code H04 it issues a block alarm and does not exit Alarm mode for restarting Listed below are the recoverable alarm statuses of the inverter Alarm Status LED monitor display Fer rIrWm Instantaneous overcurrent protection LIL h LIL cor L4 3 rx E INI I rmi cw Overvoltage protection LILI h LILIC OF LILIT ILI I LIII OY cb Heat sink overheated Motor overheated Braking resistor overheated Motor overloaded hf IU 11 LIL LI Inverter overloaded Settings and operations E Retry times H04 Set the number of retry times for auto
102. 1 Clear data automatically reset to 0 9 2 Details of Function Codes Protection Maintenance Functions Selection Refer to F26 Specifies a combination between the output phase loss protection input phase loss protection and lowering of automatic carrier frequency Data for H98 Output phase loss Input phase loss Automatic lowering of carrier frequency Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable Disable Disable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Output phase loss protection GEL The inverter will enter Alarm mode activated by the output phase loss protection and issue the alarm OPL if it detects an output phase loss while it is running If a magnetic contactor that has been inserted in the inverter output circuits switches off when the inverter is running this protection will not be activated Input phase loss protection _17 The inverter will enter Alarm mode and issue an alarm 17 if a phase loss is detected in the three phase input power source Do not enable this protection with inverters with single phase input as it is not effective When operating an inverter with a three phase input with a single phase for testing purposes this protection may be disabled but only if the load can be reduced Automatic lowering of carrier frequency When using an inverter in a critical syste
103. 1000s shown in in the table below To keep explanations as simple as possible the examples shown below are all written for the normal logic system When negative logic is active the inverter switches all output signals to the active side for example the alarm side To avoid system malfunctions caused by this interlock the signals to keep them ON using an external power source To use negative logic with the output signal set the data of 1000s in as listed in the table oe oe Note below Data for E20 or E27 To assign the following status signals to terminals Output signal symbols 0 1000 Inverter running Speed gt 0 RUN 1 1001 Frequency arrival signal FAR 2 1002 Frequency detection FDT 3 1003 Undervoltage detection LU 5 1005 Torque limiting Current limiting IOL 7 6 1006 Auto restart after recovery from instantaneous IPF S power failure Q 7 1007 Motor overload early warning OL 9 26 1026 Retry in operation TRY e 30 1030 Lifetime alarm LIFE 9 35 1035 Inverter running RUN2 p 36 1036 Overload prevention control OLP 37 1037 Current detection ID 4 1041 Low level current detection IDL 99 1099 Alarm relay contact output for any fault ALM Terminal function assignment and data setting m Inverter running Speed gt 0 RUN Function code data 0 This output signal is used to tell the external equipment that
104. 12 63 Available from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Model FM 60 10 VDC 1 mA 161 41 73 38 35 256 65 554 a3 0 rj Cover option LINAWdINOA 1veSaHdleadd ONILOAISS Terminal screws 2 M4 Mounting bolts 2 M3 Panel cutout size Sy Sm F e ET St 3 38 s 27 MM 2 635 Lter 50 _ approx 0 15 Ibs 709 Available from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Inverter Frequency FMA meter p L 11 Figure 6 15 Frequency Meter Dimensions and Connection Example 6 27 Part 4 Selecting Optimal Inverter Model Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES This chapter provides you with information about the inverter output torque characteristics selection procedure and equations for calculating capacities to help you select optimal motor and inverter models It also helps you select braking resistors Contents 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters ccccecccsseessesscesseeseesseeseceecesecesecesecaecaecaaecaecaecsaecseecaeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeerentees 7 1 7 1 1 Motor output torque characteristics ener ener enne 7 1 7 1 2 Selection procedure sse ente ete ids deceive P e E E e Es 7 4 7 153 Equations for selections esere RR RP WIR HRSG IRI HR RP tease 7 7 7 1 3 1 Load torque during constant speed running sss ene 7 7 EFI General Gta ony ai c ice toTc deti e eae ee REI
105. 2 140 180 182 118 64 2 5 4 6 47 394 3 54 120 100 90 4 72 3 94 3 54 120 100 90 4 72 4 53 3 54 120 115 90 12 547 3 90 130 139 99 5 7 09 717 4 65 180 182 118 7 09 7 17 4 65 180 182 118 Note In the FRENIC Mini columns dimensions in bold boxes denote that they are greater than those of standard models 2 Baking resistor built in type This model has the same dimensions as standard models listed in Section G 1 1 A 28 App G Replacement Information G 2 Terminal arrangements and symbols This section shows the difference in the terminal arrangements and their symbols between the FRENIC Mini series and the replaceable inverter series When replacing the conventional series with the FRENIC Mini series be careful with the wiring direction that may also differ depending upon models FVR C9S vs FRENIC Mini FVR C9S Three phase 230V 1 8 to 5 HP BE pere ow X J Us CODICI i io R s T U V W i J Direction of wire guide FRENIC Mini Three phase 230V 1 8 to 1 HP Yt IVIEJFMA C1 FLC X1 X2 X3 amp j 9t 12 33 11 OM Purev CM 30A 30B 30C 44 ud ec LRLzIS L3 T P4 PINY ec os u v w
106. 2 5 F50 V 60 Hz 5 0 4 2 11 0 10 0 1 5 1 4 150 of rated output current for min 200 of rated output current for 0 5 s Rated frequency Hz 50 60 Hz n oh E 3S lt a z Braking Phases voltage frequency Single phase 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz Voltage and frequency variations Voltage 10 to 10 Frequency 5 to 5 Momentary voltage dip capability 5 w DCR 6 w o DCR Rated current A Required power supply capacity KVA Torque Torque When the input voltage is 165 V or more the inverter may keep running Even if it drops below 165 V the inverter may keep running for 15 ms I I 20 3 5 64 11 6 1 8 33 54 97 16 4 0 3 0 4 0 7 L 150 100 150 DC injection braking Enclosure IEC60529 Cooling method Starting frequency 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Braking time 0 0 to 30 0 s Braking level 0 to 100 of rated current IP20 UL open type Natural cooling Fan cooling 2 3 4 T5 6 ni 8 Weight Ibs kg Fuji 4 pole standard motors The rated capacity is for 230 V output voltage Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage Use the inverter at the current given in or below when the carrier frequency is higher than 4 kHz c 1 5 0 7 1 5 0 7 1 5 0 7 2 7 1 2 5 3 2 4 6 4 2 9 y Li 1 to 5 or the ambient temperature is 40 C 140
107. 2 S L3 T U V W M grounding wire port A J L1 R L2 S L3 T P1 P f NO wire port Heat sink _ DB U V W grounding wire Cooling fan 7 port a FRNO01C1S 2U b FRNOO2C1S 2U When connecting the RS 485 communications cable remove the control circuit terminal block cover and snip off the barrier provided in it using nippers Figure 2 2 Bottom View of FRENIC Mini 2 Allocation of terminals RS 485 communications card connector S SINK SOURCE jumper switch Control circuit terminal block DC reactor braking resistor and DC link bus terminal block Grounding terminal Grounding terminal FRNOO2C1S 2U Power input terminal block Inverter output terminal block Figure 2 3 Enlarged View of the Terminal Blocks The above figures show three phase power source models The terminal allocation of the power input terminals L1 R L2 S L3 T and grounding terminals for single phase models differs from that shown in above figures Refer to Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS for details on terminal functions allocation and connection and to Chapter 6 Section 6 2 1 Recommended wires when selecting wires I For details on the keys and their functions refer to Section 2 2 LED Monitor Potentiometer and Keys on the Keypad For details on keying operation and function code setting refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 2 1 2 2 LED Monitor Potentiometer
108. 26 Note The dial plate and knob must be ordered as separated items Available from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Model WAR3W 3W B characteristics 1 KQ 0 91 23 0 79 20 Pinch ORI nit inch mm o e a oT t Dial plate Knob 1 01 02 26 pe A t amp hy Y og Ei lt b A 2 nic ba i 4 3 te t po 37 e 5 gt s 4 190 24 6 09 5 i Note The dial plate and knob are supplied together with the external potentiometer WAR3W Available from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Inverter 10Vdc External potentiometer Figure 6 14 External Potentiometer Dimensions and Connection Example 6 21 ile m D o D LINAWdINOA 1vSaHdledd ONILOAISS 2 RS 485 communications card OPC C1 RS The RS 485 communications card is designed exclusively for use with the FRENIC Mini series of inverter and enables data to be sent to or received from other equipment The RS 485 communications facility also enables remote operation of the inverters using the remote keypad and host controllers such as Windows based personal computers and PLCs Programmable Logic Controllers as follows Operating the inverters setting the frequency forward reverse running stopping coast to stop and resetting etc Monitoring the operation status of the inverter output frequency output current and alarm information etc Setting func
109. 4 Jump frequencies Frequencies that have a certain output with no change in the output frequency within the specified frequency band in order to skip the resonance frequency band of a machine Related function codes C01 to C04 Keypad operation To use a keypad to run an inverter Line speed Running speed of an object e g conveyor driven by the motor The unit is meter per minute m min a O o o lt Load shaft speed Number of revolutions per minute r min of a rotating load driven by the motor such as a fan Main circuit terminals Power input output terminals of an inverter which includes terminals to connect the power source motor DC rector braking resistor and other power components Maximum frequency The output frequency commanded by the input of the maximum value of a frequency setup signal for example 10 V for a voltage input range of 0 to 10 V or 20 mA for a current input range of 4 to 20 mA Related function code F03 Modbus RTU Communication protocol used in global FA network market which is developed by Modicon Inc USA Momentary voltage dip capability The minimum voltage V and time ms that permit continued rotation of the motor after a momentary voltage drop instantaneous power failure Multistep frequency selection To preset frequencies up to 7 stages then select them at some later time using external signals Related function codes E01 to E03 C
110. 400 b Setting for FRENIC Loader Set the same ps transmission speed as that specified for the 4800 bps connected PC 9600 bps 19200 bps m Transmission data length y05 Select the character data for transmission Data for y05 Data length Setting for FRENIC Loader The loader will set the length in 8 bits automatically The same applies to the Modbus RTU m Parity check y06 Select the property of the parity bit Data for y06 Setting for FRENIC Loader No parity bit The loader automatically sets it to the even parity Even parity Odd parity c Z O a O Z Q O Og m Q m Stop bits y07 Select the number of stop bits Data for y07 Setting for FRENIC Loader The loader m No response error detection time y08 automatically sets it to 1 bit The Modbus RTU protocol automatically determines number of the parity bits associated with its parity bit property so no setting is required Sets the time interval from the inverter Data for y08 detecting no access until it enters communications error 77 7 alarm mode due to Disable network failure 1 to 60 sec Setting for FRENIC Loader As communication between loader software and inverters is classified into two categories periodic access and event driven access depending on the selected facility disable communications error detection y08 0 When test running the access period is to be 800 ms
111. 5 1 07 1 09 1 15 1 07 1 09 1 15 1 07 2 0 41 to 0 75 0 75 1 71 1 80 1 68 1 71 1 80 1 68 1 71 1 80 1 68 a 7 0 76 to 1 50 1 5 3 04 3 05 2 94 3 04 3 05 2 94 3 04 3 05 2 94 o 1 51 to 2 20 2 2 4 54 4 60 4 40 4 54 4 60 4 40 4 54 4 60 4 40 2 21 to 3 70 3 7 7 43 7 50 7 20 7 43 7 50 7 20 7 43 7 50 7 20 3 71 to 5 50 5 5 10 97 11 00 10 59 10 97 11 00 10 59 10 97 11 00 10 59 5 51 to 10 00 7 5 114 63 14 50 14 08 14 63 114 50 14 08 14 63 14 50 14 08 NOTE The above values in the Rated current column are exclusively applicable to the four pole Fuji standard motors rated for 230 V and 460 V at 60 Hz If you use non standard or other manufacturer s motors change the P02 data to the rated current printed on the motor s nameplate 9 2 Details of Function Codes m If P99 Motor selection is set to 1 HP motors Rated current A Setting range If P99 Motor selection is set to Power HP 1 1 supply voltage Function Shipping destination Version code P02 EU 0 01 to 0 10 0 11 to 0 12 z 0 13 to 0 25 2 0 26 to 0 50 o E 8 0 51 to 1 00 h 1 01 to 2 00 9 9 2 2 01 to 3 00 ae 3 01 to 5 00 5 01 to 7 50 7 51 to 10 00 0 01 to 0 10 0 1 0 22 0 22 0 22 0 11 to 0 12 0 12 0 34 0 34 0 34 T 0 13 to 0 25 0 25 0 70 0 70 0 70 S 0 26 to 0 50 0 5 1 00 1 00 1 00 2 0 51 to 1 00 1 1 50 1 50
112. 5 80 e D 3 2 64 67 10 26 6 5 0 08 2 D1 T D2 E REIS wan which comes wi e E inverter as standard Name plate mm Clamp for shielded motor cable i Clamp for shielded control cable 0 39 10 L 2 36 60 Ss 4 Power Dimensions supply Inverier type mena voltage D D2 D3 _FRNF12C1E 2U __ 3 94 0 39 0 83 Three FRNF25C1E 2U phase 230V FRNF50C1E 2U FRNOO1C1E 2U Single FRNF12C1E 7U phase FRNF25C1E 7U 460 V FRNFSOC1E 7U 8 30 Unit inch mm 8 6 External Dimensions 0 26 4 33 110 0 26 D T 65 3 82 97 6 5 008 2 I Di T D2 Unit inch mm 4 0 20x0 28 4 5x7 Eiongated hole 5 12 130 4 85 118 7 09 180 gi 31 Unit inch mm EMC flange io which comes with the inverter as standard Nameplate s LXI 4 S 1 Clamp for shielded motor cable T 4 LN i1 Clamp for shielded contro cable t Power supply voltage 51 140 7 17 182 0 24 6 5 04 128 71 24 8 0 08 4 65 118 2 52 64 amp 2 0 20 5 o2 A F E F 28 mM galz Yra 3 eo m in EMC fla xt n S8 p 2 Which comes with the Nameplate 5 inverter as standard Bx Clamp for shielded motor cable I Clamp for shielded control cable 0 41 10 5 3 82 82 i _3 37 85 5 27 Pow
113. 50 words Read 1 word Read 50 words Write 41 words Read 41 words Messaging system Polling Selecting Broadcast Command message Transmission character format ASCII Binary Binary Character length 8 or 7 bits selectable by the function code 8 bits fixed 8 bits fixed Parity Even Odd or None selectable by the function code Even Stop bit length 1 or 2 bits selectable by the function code No parity 2 bits Even or Odd parity 1 bit 1 bit fixed Error checking Sum check CRC 16 5 2 Sum check 5 1 Overview on RS 485 Communication 5 1 2 Connector specifications The RS 485 communications card 1s equipped with an RJ 45 connector whose pin assignment is listed in the table below Signal name Function Remarks Power source for the remote keypad Reference voltage level Not used RS 485 data Built in terminator 112 Q RS 485 data Open close by SW1 ie m D o GNp Terminator l SW1 LAN Connector The RJ 45 connector has power source pins pins and 8 designed for the remote keypad When connecting other devices to the RJ 45 connector take care not to use those pins Failure to do so may cause a short circuit A K 5 1 3 Connection NOILdO NOILYOINNWNOOD S87 SY HONOYMHL ONINNNY You need to select devices suitable for your network configuration referring to the figure sh
114. 52 Frequency Command 2 Refer to F01 For details on frequency command 2 refer to the description for function code F01 Analog Input Adjustment Gain for terminal input 12 Refer to F18 Analog Input Adjustment Gain reference point for terminal input 12 Refer to F18 Analog Input Adjustment Gain for terminal input C1 Refer to F18 Analog Input Adjustment Gain reference point for terminal input C1 Refer to F18 For details on adjusting the analog inputs refer to the description for function code F18 Analog Input Adjustment Filter for terminal input 12 Analog Input Adjustment Filter for terminal input C1 C33 voltage input and C38 current input set the time constant of the filter for the analog input on terminal 12 and C1 respectively Data setting range 0 00 to 5 00 sec The larger the time constant the slower the response Set the time constant suitable to the load with consideration given to the system response When the analog input fluctuates due to electric noise first remove the noise factor or protect the input from noise by electric means grounding the shield ferrite core or capacitor After that increase the time constant if you cannot remove the noise factor to a sufficiently degree Bias Bias reference point for frequency command 1 Refer to F18 For details of setting the bias reference point for frequency command 1 refer to the descriptions of function cod
115. 6 22 4 646 130 158 118 5 118 130 65 118 5 51 7 09 7 17 4 65 140 180 182 118 5 51 7 09 7 17 4 65 140 180 182 118 472 394 3 54 120 100 90 4 72 3 94 3 54 120 90 472 453 3 5 120 115 90 5 12 5 47 3 90 130 139 99 7 09 7 17 4 65 180 182 118 7 09 7 17 4 65 180 182 118 Note In the FRENIC Mini columns dimensions in bold boxes denote that they are greater than those of standard models A 27 FVR C11S vs FRENIC Mini FVR C11S IP20 Standard unit wit a foot mount filter Ambient temperature 50 C 122 F FRENIC Mini Planning values IP20 Ambient temperature 50 C 122 F Mount External dimensions inch mm Mounting area Volume External dimensions inch mm ing area C m mini f m Mini 26 x102 3 x107 4 72 120 4 72 120 4 72 453 3 54 120 115 90 5 51 3 543 140 90 7 09 7 17 4 65 180 182 118 7 09 7 17 4 65 180 182 118 5 51 7 09 7 17 4 65 140 180 182 118 5 118 6 22 4 646 130 158 118 5 118 7 17 4 65 182 118 7 09 7 17 4 65 180 182 118 7 09 7 17 4 65 180 182 118 5 51 7 09 7 17 4 65 2 52 26 91 16
116. 6 explains the process in which the inverter drives the motor according to the internal run command lt FWD gt lt REV gt from the frequency generator or the PID frequency command from the PID controller and the ran commands Additional and supplemental information is given below The logic shown in the left part of the block diagram processes the drive frequency command so as to invert x 1 the command for reverse rotation of the motor or to replace it with 0 zero for stopping the motor The accelerator decelerator processor determines the output frequency of the inverter by referring to the set data of related function codes If the output frequency exceeds the peak frequency given by function code F15 the controller limits the output frequency at the peak Acceleration deceleration time is selectable from acceleration deceleration time 1 or 2 or acceleration deceleration time for jogging operation The suppression of the regenerative braking feature may multiply the commanded acceleration deceleration time by 3 Refer to role of function code H69 in the block diagram Ifthe overload prevention control feature is active then the logic automatically switches the output frequency to one of overload suppression control and controls the inverter using the switched frequency However if the current limit control is active F43 30 H12 1 the overload prevention control automatically becomes inactive If the current lim
117. 8 PID Frequency Command Generator enne ener enne entren 4 16 4 1 Symbols Used in the Block Diagrams and their Meanings FRENIC Mini inverters are equipped with a number of function codes to match a variety of motor operations required in your system Refer to Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES for details of the function codes The function codes have functional relationship with each other Several special function codes also work with execution priority with each other depending upon their data settings This chapter contains the main block diagrams for control logic in the inverter and describes the relationship between the inverter s logic and function codes It is important to fully understand this relationship and to set the function code data correctly The block diagrams contained in the chapter show only function codes having mutual relation For the function codes that work stand alone and for details of individual function codes refer to Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES 4 1 Symbols Used in the Block Diagrams and their Meanings Table 4 1 lists the symbols commonly used in the block diagrams and their meanings with some examples Table 4 1 Symbols and Meanings FWD Y1 etc Input output signals to from the inverter s control terminal block Function code FWD REV etc Control commands assigned to the control terminal block input signals Switch controlled by a function code Numbers assigned to the terminal
118. 89 350 0 508 325 793 747 702 650 591 533 520 487 455 409 0 625 400 908 856 804 745 677 610 596 558 521 469 0 781 500 1027 968 909 842 766 690 673 631 589 530 2 x 0 156 100 606 571 536 497 452 407 397 372 347 313 2 x 0 234 150 802 756 710 658 598 539 526 493 46 44 2x 0 313 200 954 641 625 586 547 492 2 x 0 391 250 1130 760 741 695 648 584 2 x 0 508 325 1321 888 866 812 758 682 2 x 0 625 400 1515 1018 993 931 869 782 2 x 0 781 500 1711 1150 1122 1052 982 883 A 23 M 600 V class of Cross linked Polyethylene insulated wires Maximum allowable temperature 90 C 194 F Wire size inch mm 0 003 0 005 0 009 0 013 8 0 0 022 14 0 034 22 0 059 38 0 094 60 0 156 100 0 234 150 0 313 200 0 391 250 0 508 325 0 625 400 0 781 500 2 x 0 156 100 2 0 3 5 5 5 2 x 0 234 150 2 x 0 313 200 2 x 0 391 250 2 x 0 508 325 2 x 0 625 400 2 x 0 781 500 Table F 1 c Allowable Current of Insulated Wires 50 C 122 F lox0 40 A 21 29 39 48 70 92 129 173 238 316 375 444 520 596 673 397 526 625 741 866 993 1122 Allowable current Wiring outside duct Wiring in the duct Max 3 wires in one duct reference value 35 C 95 F 40 C 104 F 45 C 113 F 50 C 122 F 55 C 131 F 35 C 95 F 40 C 104 F 45 C 113 F up to 86 F 30 C lox0 91 lox0 82 loxO 71 lox0 58 lox0 40
119. 9 IP20 UL open type Cooling method Fan cooling Weight Ibs kg 4 0 1 8 40 1 8 5 5 2 5 Fuji 4 pole standard motors 2 The rated capacity is for 460 V output voltage 3 Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 Tested under the standard load condition 85 load for applicable motor rating 5 Calculated under Fuji specified conditions 6 Indicates the value when using a DC reactor option 7 Average braking torque obtained with the AVR control off 75 7 Varies according to the efficiency of the motor Max voltage V Min voltage V 3 phase average voltage V If this value is 2 to 3 96 use an AC reactor ACR 9 Making FRENIC Mini conform to category TYPEI of the UL Standard or NEMA1 requires an optional NEMA kit Note that the TYPE1 listed FRENIC Mini should be used in the ambient temperature range from 10 to 40 C 14 to 104 F 8 Interphase voltage unbalance 96 x67 Refer to IEC 61800 3 5 2 3 8 8 8 3 Common Specifications 8 3 Common Specifications i i Related item Detail specifications function cede n Maximum frequency 25 to 400 Hz E Fo3 Ba Base frequency 25 lo 400 Hz Fo Starting frequency 0 4 t0 60 0 Hz o F23 2 Carrier frequency 075kto 15 kHz F26 F27 gi a Frequency may drop automatically to protect the in
120. Acceleration and deceleration time by link operation 1s effective e g Assigns the command RT1 to terminal X1 Note Switchable during the acceleration or deceleration operation Used for 3 wire operation X2 CM ON The inverter self holds the command FWD or REV The inverter releases self holding e g Assigns the command HLD to terminal X2 X2 CM OFF Related function codes Command Command name 8 4 Terminal Specifications Functions Related function codes 4 S amp E PR o 2 2 a g ot S 5p pde S o S o S 5b um n un S un ue S S g S QO Hz2 Hz1 Hz PID Coast to stop command Alarm from external equipment Jogging operation Freq set2 Freq setl Write enable for keypad PID control cancel Inverse mode changeover X3 CM ON The inverter output is stopped immediately and the motor will coast to stop No alarm signal will be output e g Assigns the command BX to terminal X3 X1 CM ON Alarm status is reset ON signal should be held for 0 1 s or longer e g Assigns the command RST to terminal X1 X2 CM OFF The inverter output is stopped and the motor coasts to stop Alarm signal for the alarm code OH2 will be output e g Assigns the command THR to terminal X2 X3 CM ON Jogging operation is effective FWD or REV ON
121. Braking level O to 100 Rated output current of the inverter 1 Y Y 0 9 23 interpreted as 100 F22 Braking time 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 30 00 0 01 s Y Y 0 00 F23 Start Frequency 0 1 to 60 0 0 1 Hz Y Y 1 0 9 25 F25 Stop Frequency 0 1 to 60 0 01 Hz Y Y 0 2 9 25 F26 Motor Sound 0 75 to 15 1 kHz Y X 2 9 25 Carrier frequency F27 Tone 0 Level 0 Y Y 0 9 26 1 Level 1 2 Level2 3 Level3 F30 Terminal FMA 0 to 200 1 Y Y 100 9 26 Gain to output voltage If 100 is set 10 VDC will be output from FMA at full scale F31 Analog Output Signal 0 Output frequency 1 Y Y 0 9 26 Selection for FMA Monitor object before slip compensation Maximum output frequency at full scale 1 Output frequency 2 after slip compensation Maximum output frequency at full scale 2 Output current Two times the inverter s rated output current at full scale 3 Output voltage 250 V 500 V at full scale 6 Input power Two times the inverter s rated output capacity at full scale 7 PID feedback value Feedback value is 100 at full scale 9 DC link bus voltage 500 VDC for 230 V 1000 VDC for 460 V at full scale 14 Test analog output voltage If F30 100 10 VDC at full scale c z O a O Z Q O 0 m 02 Change Code Name Data setting range iere Unit when Dalta DETAY peren ment copy set
122. Compact Inverter FRENIC Mini User s Manual Copyright 2002 2007 Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement Preface This manual provides all the information on the FRENIC Mini series of inverters including its operating procedure operation modes and selection of peripheral equipment Carefully read this manual for proper use Incorrect handling of the inverter may prevent the inverter and or related equipment from operating correctly shorten their lives or cause problems Listed below are the other materials related to the use of the FRENIC Mini Read them in conjunction with this manual as necessary FRENIC Mini Instruction Manual RS 485 Communication User s Manual Catalog Application Guide RS 485 Communications Card Installation Manual Rail Mounting Base Installation Manual Mounting Adapter Installation Manual FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual Remote Keypad Instruction Manual Built in Braking Resistor Installation Manual The materials are subject to change without notice Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use Do
123. E1 listed FRENIC Mini should be used in the ambient temperature range from 10 to 40 C 14 to 104 F x67 Refer to IEC 61800 3 5 2 3 9 Interphase voltage unbalance i9 m D SNOI VOIJIO3dS 8 2 2 2 Three phase 460 V Power supply voltage Type FRN___ CISAU21I Applicable motor rating HP lt Rated capacity kVA 4 1 Rated voltage V Three phase 380 400 415 V 50 Hz 380 400 440 460 V 60 Hiz Rated current A 37 5 5 9 0 150 of rated output current for min 200 of rated output current for 0 5 s Output Ratings Overload capability Rated frequency Hz 50 60 Hz Phases voltage frequency Three phase 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz Voltage and frequency Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 5 2 or less variations Frequency 5 to 5 Momentary voltage dip When the input voltage is 300 V or more the inverter may keep running capability ey Even if it drops below 300 V the inverter may keep running for 15 ms wi DCR 3 44 73 s w o DCR s 8 2 13 0 Required power supply um 1 3 E 4 capacity KVA 3 Torque 3 150 100 n oh E Z iz 4 ef amp S Rated current A Braking time s 18 8 Duty cycle qd 1 5 Braking Starting frequency 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Braking time 0 0 to 30 0 s De tyjpction nak Braking level 0 to 100 of rated current Enclosure IEC6052
124. ER e en e I een 7 1 7 1 1 Motor output torque characteristics eren eene 7 1 7 1 2 Selection procedure ede eee te E EE ete tule eee Dn 7 4 7 13 Equations for selections esse e DEG UI e im 7 7 7 1 3 1 Load torque during constant speed running 0 2 0 2 eceeceseceecseeeseeeneeeeeeeeeeseensecnsecaecaecnsecseenaeenaes 7 7 7 1 3 2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation sse 7 8 7 1 3 3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor sess 7 11 7 1 3 4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor sse nennen 7 12 7 2 Selecting a Braking EIRO E E A T eene enne ener entere teen trennen nere enne 7 13 7 2 1 Selection Procedure o DIR I eI ite AE aT 7 13 1 2 2 Notes on Selection 2 5 net Duae PI ER e P He EH ARR ERR 7 13 Part 5 Specifications Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS Sle Standard Models 0 e d be e to ih o eae ee 8 1 811 SEhreezpliase 230 Vc de Rea e oe tdi ae RG A ik lett 8 1 8 12 Three phase 460i i isst E tibiam bebe iiit 8 2 8 1 3 Single phase 230 V v cs ccecivscedacecescsdares edad she cseas tec tne eee eure tete E Ede e e eee eet 8 3 82 Models Available on Otdet ses vs seuss 3 ether o PU P teet Phi 8 4 82 1 EMG filter built in type inserere e espe einen eee ee deb eed eee dee e Re E 8 4 8 2 I T Three ph se 230 V conste eed RR TH Ue m E eo RU e ee EUR E Rede 8 4 8 2 1 2 Three phase 460 V eee ee eere OUR XE Re eed e Yen 8 5 8 2 1 3 Simgle phase 230 V ve
125. F or higher Tested under the standard load condition 85 load for applicable motor rating Calculated under Fuji specified conditions Indicates the value when using a DC reactor option Average braking torque obtained with the AVR control off 7 5 of the motor 9 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor standard type available as option 10 Making FRENIC Mini conform to category TYPEI of the UL Standard or NEMA1 requires an optional NEMA kit Note that the TYPE1 listed FRENIC Mini should be used in the ambient temperature range from 10 to 40 C 14 to 104 F F 75 7 Varies according to the efficiency 8 2 Models Available on Order 8 2 2 Braking resistor built in type 8 2 2 1 Three phase 230 V Power supply voltage Three phase 230 V Type FRN CIS2U2I Applicable motor rating HP 002 Rated capacity kVA Rated voltage V Rated current A Output Ratings Overload capability Rated frequeney Hz Phases voltage frequency Voltage and frequency variations Momentary voltage dip capability 5 w DCR 6 w o DCR n Sh E Gi x Q Rated current A Required power supply capacity kVA Torque Three phase 200 V S0 Hz 200 V 220 V 230 V 60 Hz 3 0 4 1 6 4 11 0 170 10 0 16 5 150 of rated output current for min 200 of rated output current for 0 5 s 50 60 Hz Three phase
126. FXCIW U 5 um 0 001 2 0 0 003 0 003 Lace 1 FRNOOICIE 7U_ 0 1 4 9 003 0 003 0 003 0 5 2 0 2 0 FRNOO2CIN 7U 17 09 20 eo 0 005 0 005 3 FRNOGCIM 7U 5 5 175 13 as 1 Assuming the use of bare wiring without rack or duct 600 V class of vinyl insulated IV wires for 60 C 140 F 600 V class of polyethylene insulated HIV wires for 75 C 167 F and 600 V class of polyethylene insulated cross link wires for 90 C 194 F Notes 1 A box B in the above tables replaces S or E depending on enclosure LL If environmental requirements such as power supply voltage and ambient temperature differ from those listed above select wires suitable for your system by referring to Table 6 1 and Appendices App F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires 6 4 6 2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals E If the internal temperature of your power control cabinet is 40 C 104 F or below Table 6 3 Wire Size for main circuit power input and inverter output Recommended wire size inch mm Power Applicable Main circuit power input L1 R L2 S L3 T or L1 L L2 N Inverter output U V W motor w DC reactor DCR w o DC reactor DCR d ee supply i Inverter type rating Allowable temp 1 Allowable temp 1 Current Allowable temp 1 Current A voltage 60 C 75 C 90 C 60 C 75 C 90 C 60 C 75 C 90 C 140 F 167 F 194 F 140 F 167 F 194 F A 140 F 167
127. H no condensation hurnicity ae O 8 10 8 4 Terminal Specifications 8 4 Terminal Specifications 8 4 1 Terminal functions Main circuit and analog input terminals Functions Related function codes PID feedback signal 8 11 LI R L2 S Main circuit Connects a three phase power supply L3 T power input three phase 230V 460V LL O Connects a single phase power supply O indicates L2 N the no connection terminal Single phase 230V E U V W Inverter output Connects a three phase induction motor H P1 P For DC reactor Connects a DC reactor NS P N DC link bus Connects a DC power device P DB For braking Used for connection of the optional external braking resistor resistor Wiring is required even for the braking resistor built in type e G Grounding Grounding terminal for inverter chassis Two terminals are provided 13 Potentiometer Power supply 10 VDC for frequency command power supply potentiometer Potentiometer 1 to 5 kQ Allowable maximum output current 10 mA 12 Voltage input The frequency is set according to the external analog F18 input voltage C32 to Normal 0 to 10 VDC O to 100 96 ae operation 0 to 5 VDC 0 to 100 or 1 to 5 VDC 0 to 100 96 can be selected by function code setting EA Inverse 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 switchable by digital input operation signal m PID control Used for reference
128. I O terminals Refer to Section 3 3 4 1 Displaying control I O signal terminals for details No of consecutive occurrences This is the number of times the same alarm has occurred consecutively Overlapping alarm 1 Simultaneously occurring alarm codes 1 is displayed if no alarms have occurred Overlapping alarm 2 Simultaneously occurring alarm codes 2 7 is displayed if no alarms have occurred Terminal I O signal status under communication control displayed with the ON OFF of LED segments Shows the ON OFF status of the digital I O terminals under communication control Refer to Section 3 3 4 2 Displaying control I O signal terminals under communication control for details 3 23 O Q m S O z c a Z I m A m lt gt oO Table 3 13 Continued LED monitor shows Item No Display contents Description Terminal input signal status under communication control in Shows the ON OFF status of the digital I O terminals under hexadecimal format communication control Refer to Section 3 3 4 2 Displaying control I O signal terminals under communication control for details Terminal output signal status under communication control in hexadecimal display Note When the same alarm occurs a number of times in succession the alarm information for the Nore first time is retained and the information for the f
129. I2CIN2U 1 4 FRNF25C1 2U OFL 0 4 2 3 1 2 FRNF50C1 2U 150 for 1 min Three phase Three phase 1 FRNOO1C1 2U eases 5 200 for 0 5 sec 200 to 240 V 8 to 15 400 230 V Pu 2 FRNOO2C1N 2U 50 60 Hz 3 FRNO03C18 2U OFL 3 7 2 17 5 FRNOOSC1N 2U 1 2 X FRNFSOCIB 4U OFL 0 4 4A 1 5 B o 1 T Three 1 FRNO01C1 4U eae T 150 for Imin Three phase phase 2 FRNO02C18 4U 200 for 0 5 sec 380 to 480 V 0 75 to 15 400 460 V 3 FRNO03C18 4U 50 60 Hz OFL 3 7 4A 9 5 FRNO05C18 4U Note 1 The OFL 4A models have no restrictions on carrier frequency Note 2 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on enclosure 6 19 5 Ferrite ring reactors for reducing radio noise ACL An ACL is used to reduce radio frequency noise emitted by the inverter An ACL suppresses the outflow of high frequency harmonics caused by switching operation for the power supply lines inside the inverter Pass the power supply lines together through the ACL If wiring length between the inverter and motor is less than 66 ft 20 m insert an ACL to the power supply lines if it is more than 66 ft 20 m insert it to the power output lines of the inverter Wire size is determined depending upon the ACL size I D and installation requirements Unit inch mm 8 03 0 04 8204 0 E bd E ui 5 16 131 MAX 3 74 95 MAX 9 80 22 1 02 26 MAX 1 38 no 35 10 0 1 02
130. ID feedback value Timer value If 0 Disable is set for function code J01 appears on the LED Tf 0 Disable is set for function code C21 appears on the LED 9 43 a c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo LED Monitor Speed monitor item Selects the speed monitoring format on the Data for E48 The LED monitor displays LED monitor the sub item Output frequency before slip compensation Output frequency after slip compensation Set frequency Load shaft speed in r min Line speed in m min Constant feeding rate time Coefficient for Speed Indication Refer to E39 Detail for the speed display coefficient setting is given in the description of function code E39 em Menu Display Mode for Keypad Selects the menu display mode for the keypad in Programming mode Data for E52 The keypad will enter Function code data setting mode in which Menu 1 Data setting only 1s displayed Function code data check mode in which Menu 2 Data checking only is displayed Full menu mode in which all menus may be displayed Built in Potentiometer Function selection Analog Input Signal Definition for 12 Analog Input Signal Definition for C1 E60 E61 and E62 define the function of the built in potentiometer terminals 12 and C1 respectively Data for E60 This function will be defined E61 or E62 for potentiometer and ter
131. Input Rated Capacities of General purpose Inverters Determined by the Applicable Motor Ratings Applicable 1 2 1 2 3 5 7 5 motor rating HP GA 2 Values of Ki conversion factor Depending on whether an optional ACR AC reactor or DCR DC reactor is used apply the appropriate conversion factor specified in the appendix to the guideline The values of the conversion factor are listed in Table B 3 Table B 3 Conversion Factors Ki for General purpose Inverters Determined by Reactors Circuit uu Conversion Main applications w o reactor K31 3 4 e General purpose inverters 3 phase bridge W teactor ACR K32 1 8 e Elevators capacitor w reactor DCR K33 1 8 e Refrigerators air smoothing conditioning systems w reactors ACR and DCR K34 1 4 e Other general appliances a Note Some models are equipped with a reactor as a built in standard accessory 3 Exception to this guideline Inverters whose inputs are 115V or 230V lines and capacities are 5 HP or less are an exception to this guideline Those excluded inverters are already regulated by the Japanese guideline for suppressing harmonics in home electric and general purpose appliances so that all of them are not regulated by this guideline regardless of the quantity of the units used by a single customer 2 Calculation of Harmonic Current 1 Value of input fundamental current When you calculate the amount of harmonics according to Table 2
132. Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor etc and is used for variable speed motor control Switching noise is generated by high speed on off switching of the six transistors Noise current i is emitted and at each high speed on off switching the noise current flows through stray capacitance C of the inverter cable and motor to the ground The amount of the noise current is expressed as follows i C dv dt It is related to the stray capacitance C and dv dt switching speed of the transistors Further this noise current is related to the carrier frequency since the noise current flows each time the transistors are switched on or off In addition to the main power inverter the DC to DC switching power regulator DC DC converter which is the power source for the control electronics of the inverter may be a noise source in the same principles as stated above The frequency band of this noise is less than approximately 30 to 40 MHz Therefore the noise will affect devices such as AM radios using low frequency band but will not virtually affect FM radios and television sets using higher frequency than this frequency band Figure A 1 Outline of Inverter Configuration A 2 App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise 2 Types of noise Noise generated in an inverter is propagated through the main circuit wiring to the power supply and the motor so as to affect a wide range of applications from the power
133. Kg IP20 UL open typc Fan cooling Natural cooling 3 3 1 5 3 5 1 6 5 5 2 5 6 6 3 0 SNOI VOIJIO3dS 1 Fuji 4 pole standard motors 2 The rated capacity is for 460 V output voltage 3 Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 Tested under the standard load condition 85 load for applicable motor rating 5 Calculated under Fuji specified conditions 6 Indicates the value when using a DC reactor option 7 Average braking torque obtained with the AVR control off 5 2 7 Varies according to the efficiency of the motor 8 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor standard type available as option Max voltage V Min voltage V 3 phase average voltage V If this value is 2 to 3 96 use an AC reactor ACR 10 Making FRENIC Mini conform to category TYPE1 of the UL Standard or NEMA1 requires an optional NEMA kit Note that the TYPE1 listed FRENIC Mini should be used in the ambient temperature range from 10 to 40 C 14 to 104 F 9 Interphase voltage unbalance 96 x67 Refer to IEC 61800 3 5 2 3 8 2 1 3 Single phase 230 V Power supply voltage Jype FRN CIE 7U Applicable motor rating HP Output Ratings Rated capacity KVA Rated voltage V Rated current A Overload capability Single phase 230 V F12 F25 1 8 ET 1 2 0 3 0 57 ER Three phase 200 V 50 Hz 200 V 220 V 230 3 0
134. NO0O1CIN 2U 133 20 phase FRN002C1 2U 73 14 230V DB2 2 2C 40 400 55 0 110 FRNO003CIB 2U 50 10 FRN00SCIN 2U DB3 7 2C 33 140 75 0 185 10 FRNF50C1m 4U 250 37 DB0 75 AC 200 200 50 0 075 Three FRNO01C1N 4U i 133 20 phase FRN002C1m 4U 73 14 460V DB2 2 4C 160 55 0 110 FRNO003CIB A4U 400 50 10 FRN005CIN AU DB3 7 4C 130 140 75 0 185 10 FRNF50C1 7U 250 37 Single DB0 75 2C 100 200 50 0 075 IFRNO0OICINI 7U 133 20 phase z 230V FRNOO2CIN 7U 73 14 DB2 2 2C 40 400 55 0 110 FRN003C1m 7U 50 10 Note 1 A box WW in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure 2 Asterisks in the above table denote the following 21 Braking resistor built in type None Standard a c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Calculating discharging capability and allowable average loss and then setting function code data m Discharging capability F50 Discharging capability stands for the amount of electric power that a braking resistor can discharge for a single cycle of braking operation It can be calculated using the braking period and rated motor capacity using equation 1 which is based on the regenerative power in deceleration or equation 2 which is based on that in constant speed operation Braking Time s Rated Motor Capacity HP Discharging Capability kWs d 2
135. O z Az r r O O 4 7 Drive Command Controller uoieredicy siiejep 40j uojeoiunutuoo Ggr S Jo entew SJasn ay oj Jejes won Aousnbay uunuruy sapos VONOUIN peyere uoneoiunuiuloo aJe sepoo S eu saur ouanbosd Jayury Kuanbaia wo aoN gia X ovo Q0 vaH 00x V9H 8AIjoe si uorsseiddns peopia o uatjw uana sjoe ajui MO AY Ze tra uogoajes uopEsedo uonexejeoep oi Ajuo eigeoudde sawn Ea eeJu Le Aemur usum waung nding paved O Eg i ssi 4 pta Crea 9e uonuedo Ps 023 Jar uang Yee on LE ea AounnbniJ Jte pee iman uoneuedo 94 Bug 2a Sues 2d Aowanbesy eue iad ca asi EA jeu yuan pavers C04 H ure uon OH edi Ay esuediuog UOQuBAD d PRODAO E r KE e n H H E LL Xm zi M Re Hoa cay bas t Lade 4oBeyoA a lateron CDa ang wu 30 fouanbasy COSH u amp 4 atur Aauenbed y 504 Aouonbu 4 sng ye abao Guiang BIOL onmuoinynsoog MWAL aleuoun woioeres pec ey 2 po fauanbeu eseg inog onto 8045 ong wened JA JH9urpuow 04 uandaa wniueyy jase iui lt AaBenoA sng wur Da pu yr uana M N n Yuan dng l DUET 777773 davanbei dois ves Kausobaia peas Ca KougnbaiJ oseg Qu Aouenbej3 Winn 04 mi rni quawing mamo Figure 4 6 Drive Command Controller and Related Part of the Inverter 4 14 4 7 Drive Command Controller The simplified block diagram shown in Figure 4
136. O2CIMI 2U 2 0 2 0 2 0 8 0 FRNO003CIMI 2U 11 0 005 FRN005C1W 2U 17 FRNFS0CIM 4U 1 5 i i 2 5 pin oe a 0 003 0 003 0 003 0 003 0 003 7 P E 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 FRNOO3CIMI 4U 5 5 FRNOOSC 9 B D lt u I 0 8 v4 FRNF2SCIM 7U_ 3 15 Single 2 FRNFSOCIM 7U_ 0 003 3 0 phase L1 rFRNooicim 7U 2 0 0 003 7 0 003 0 003 0 003 50 Ye a 2 0 eo eo eo 0 005 phase FRNOO2CIMI 4U 460 V FRNO03CIN 4U FRNO0SCINI 4U 2 0 2 0 FRNFSOCIM 4U Three FRNOOICIM 4U o 493 2 0 0 001 0 003 0 5 Q 0 Recommended wire size inch mm Applicable ac al 2 Power PPPS DC reactor Braking resistor Control circuit Inverter grounding Goes Siete ee ere P1 PC PC DB eG t rating Allowable temp 1 Current Allowable temp 1 Current Allowable temp 1 Allowable temp 1 volmage HP 60 C 75 C 90 C 60 C 75 C 90 C 60 C 75 C 909C 60 C 75 C 90 C 1409F 167 F 194 F A 1409F 167 F 194 F A 140 F 167 F 194 F 140 F 167 F 194 F FRNFI2CIM 2U FRNE25CIM 2U Vins FRNFSOCINI 2U 0 003 2 0 I f 0 001 0 003 0 003 0 003 Hase FRNOOICIWI2U 2 0 L6 2330y 2 FRN002C1W 2U 0 003 0 5 2 0 2 0 2 0 FRNOO3CIM 2U 2 x 0 005 FRNOOSCIWD2U 3 5 0 003 0 003 FRNFDCIM 7U FRNE25CIW 7U 0 003 0 003 Single 12 FRN
137. Operating environment ou wr cae seek eae ede eas i eee ee 8 26 8 512 Storage environment 2 2 2 sss reg et e ee pU reg Og ate i vea da eiceiten 8 27 8 5 2 Temporary Storage 1e eere sven tote canes ri eee retenti Tee e ee e ere ER ee dene 8 27 8 5 2 2 Long term storage ote iet EEN tette tient de i deese edb eects 8 27 8 6 External Dimensions oe EOD IP Eger Te e eg Pe e E Eee a 8 28 8 6 1 Standard models and models available on order braking resistor built in type 8 28 8 6 2 Models available on order EMC filter built in type 8 30 87 Connection Didgrams o iacet eate Hiec eA ee Ie e a de eee tie da ashe dete Eee tee veis cote ia 8 32 8 7 1 Keypad operatiom eese no DURER OSEE Rote tie dites 8 32 8 7 2 Operation by external signal inputs esses eee 8 33 8 8 Details of Protective Functions 0 cecccccceecsccecsssceceessececeessececsseceseseeeceesseeecessecserseeeceessecensssaeeseniseeesenas 8 34 8 1 Standard Models 8 1 Standard Models In the European version these models listed in Section 8 1 are available on order 8 1 1 Three phase 230 V Power supply voltage Type FRN C1S 2U Applicable motor rating HP Rated capacity kVA lhree phase 230 V F12 F25 Fso 001 002 U8 1 4 1 2 1 2 0 3 0 57 ET 19 30 gs Rated voltage V Rated current A Output Ratin Overload capability Rated frequency Hz Phases voltage frequen
138. Other motors the parameters of the Fuji standard 8 series NUUS motor will apply as an alternative The inverter also supports motors rated by HP horse power typical in North America P99 1 9 50 9 2 Details of Function Codes 9 2 5 H codes High performance functions Data Initialization Initializes the current function code settings to the factory defaults or initializes the motor constants parameters Data for H03 Function Setting procedure Disables initialization Settings made by the user manually will be retained ox Simultaneous keying of 6r Initializes all function code data to the factory A keys changes data in deta order of 0 1 2 and of CV Initializes the P03 data Rated current of the keys changes data in the motor and internally used constants to the motor constants determined by P02 data Motor capacity and P99 Motor Pressing the amp key will fix characteristics as listed on the next page the set data reverse order Initializes P09 data Slip compensation gain to 0 0 If you do initialization while H03 is set at 1 or 2 H03 will automatically go back to 0 factory default at the completion of initialization Procedure for initializing motor constants To initialize the motor constants set the related function codes as follows 1 P02 Motor Parameters Set the rated capacity of the motor to be used in kW Rated capacity 2 P99 Motor Sel
139. Pequency Hysteresis width Set frequency Detection level Release level Time Frequency detection so Time Overload Early Warning Current Detection Low Current Detection Level Current Detection Low Current Detection Timer E34 and E35 set the operation level for overload early warning current detection and low current detection and the timer count m Operation Level E34 Sets the operation level for the motor overload early warning OL inverter output current detection ID or low current output detection IDL Data setting range Current value of 1 to 200 of the rated inverter current in units of amperes m Timer E35 Sets the timer for the inverter output current detection ID and low current output detection IDL Data setting range 0 01 to 600 00 sec 9 42 9 2 Details of Function Codes Coefficient for Constant Feeding Rate Time Refer to E50 E39 and E50 set a coefficient to be used for setting the constant feeding rate time load shaft speed or line speed and for displaying its output status Data setting ranges and calculation equations Data setting range for E39 0 000 to 9 999 for E50 0 01 to 200 00 Coeff of Speed Indication E50 Freq x Coeff for Const Feeding Rate Time E39 Const Feeding Rate Time min Load Shaft Speed E50 Coeff for Speed Indication x Frequency Hz Line Speed E50 Coeff for Speed Indication x Frequency Hz Where Freq is
140. Sos a NC 231 o Swed Mullistep zm 9 es ut PID RST X2 SS2 roses Select Mullisiip Tequency xsl SS4 NormaliNegstive Logic Selection X3 Q d O O Select AOCIDEC Ame o sso um SES Commumeavens Ling Function E ss GD Oa im Switch Frequency 0M o Rmo AER fun command I gh ig i Pere eg ee 11 79 m i Canes PID Cont Hur ess IF Wo Normal Nagative Lowe Selection Switch find Inverse ral D Q FWD taon Nee 5 IVS 0 SSD Feat PID inlogral ce eene ares E bad Thur sso O PIO RST oj O RWD Q Romi I Sole ie 1 24 Hold PIO Integral C506 tO 223 Component I sewo PID HLD REV Normal Negallva toge Selection REV t Q The final output T O O turns ON if one of ae A signals is ON by 1000 Communications Link Function a ORing operation oD Supporting when E01 E02 m E03 E98 and E99 Mo a7 a are set to the same Run Command 1 oi I data G9 t MEE 23 Ot Vi 34 m RM Notes Each number shown at switches E01 to E03 E98 and E99 is data in normal logic system The S codes are communication related function codes Refer to the user s manual of RS 485 communication for details Figure 4 3 a Terminal Command Decoder General 4 6 x1 Normal Negative Logic Selection pa a0 9 gt o 21000 E02 X2 Normal Negative Logic Selection UI x2 do 44 Sto 21000 x3 Normal Negative Logic Selection
141. Table 6 7 Braking Resistor Standard Model o m r gt m O d Z Q U m D v I z r m o c TU m Zz Option Max braking torque 76 f Continuous braking 100 Repetitive braking id Braking resistor 50 Hz 60 Hz torque conversion value 100 sec or less cycle supply nverter type AU TT z voltage Type Q t sistanc Ib in Ib in MU Braking time n Duty cycle y y capability SR 0 N m N m kWs s HP ED FRNF50CIW 2U 0 059 22 FRN001CIN 2U 0 091 18 Three phase FRNO02CIN 2U 0 101 10 230 V FRN003CIN 2U 0 103 7 FRN005C1IN 2U 0 124 5 FRNF50CIW 4U 0 059 22 FRN001CIN 4U 0 091 18 Three phase FRN002C1 4U 0 101 10 460 V FRN003C1IN 4U 0 103 Y FRN005C1N 4U 0 124 5 FRNF50CIW 7U 0 059 22 Single FRNOO1CIN 7U 0 091 18 phase 230V FRN002CIN 7U 0 101 10 FRN003CIN 7U 0 103 7 Notes 1 A box Bl in the above table replaces S or E depending on enclosure 6 13 1 2 10 ED model Braking resistor P DB Inverter PO Figure 6 7 Braking Resistor 10 ED Model and Connection Example Table 6 8 Braking Resistor 10 ED Model Option Max braking torque 96 Continuous braking 100 Repetitive braking ee Braking resistor 50Hz 60Hz torque conversion value 100 sec or less cycle supply nverter type f Discha um X voltage Type Qty Resistance I
142. The allowable braking energy depends on the maximum regenerative braking power The allowable values are listed in Chapter 6 Section 6 4 1 1 Braking resistors Motor RMS current For detailed calculation refer to Section 7 1 3 4 In metal processing machine and materials handling machines requiring positioning control highly frequent running for a short time is repeated In this case calculate the maximum equivalent RMS current value effective value of current not to exceed the allowable value rated current for the motor 7 6 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters 7 1 3 Equations for selections 7 1 3 1 Load torque during constant speed running 1 General equation The frictional force acting on a horizontally moved load must be calculated Calculation for driving a load along a straight line with the motor is shown below Where the force to move a load linearly at constant speed v m s is F N and the motor speed for driving this is Nm r min the required motor output torque tm N m is as follows gg OF M 2m Nm Nc z N m 7 1 where ng is Reduction gear efficiency When the inverter brakes the motor efficiency works inversely so the required motor torque should be calculated as follows 60 vV 8 8507 x F Nem 7 2 TM 2 Nm NG 60 0 21 Ny in the above equation is an equivalent turning radius corresponding to speed v around the motor shaft The value F N in the above eq
143. The inverter runs the motor with jogging frequency e g Assigns the command JOG to terminal X3 X1 CM ON Frequency command source 2 is effective e g Assigns the command Hz2 Hz1 to terminal The function code data can be changed from the keypad X2 CM ON Data can be changed when this function is not allocated e g Assigns the command WE KP to terminal X3 CM ON The PID control is cancelled and the set frequency is set by the Multistep frequency keypad or analog input e g Assigns the command Hz PID to terminal X3 ELI For details about JO1 to J06 data refer to Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES X1 CM ON Normal mode operation or inverse mode operation can be changed in the frequency command and PID control e g Assigns the command IVS to terminal X1 E03 7 E03 10 C20 0 00 to 400 0 Hz H54 0 00 to E01 11 FO1 0 to 4 C30 0 E02 19 a 2 m Q I S o Z 77 Classifi cation Command Command name Functions Related function codes un Ss E A o a g A s on ye S o S o e E n nN fo E l G g g o O LE PID HLD Link enable PID integral differential reset PID integral hold X2 CM ON The link operation is effective RS 485 communications card option or models available on order e g Assigns the comman
144. There are two methods for suppressing the surge voltages one is to reduce the voltage rise time and another is to reduce the voltage peak value 1 Output reactor If wiring length is relatively short the surge voltages can be suppressed by reducing the voltage rise time dv dt with the installation of an AC reactor on the output side of the inverter Refer to Figure C 3 1 However if the wiring length becomes long suppressing the peak voltage due to surge voltage may be difficult 2 Output filter Installing a filter on the output side of the inverter allows a peak value of the motor terminal voltage to be reduced Refer to Figure C 3 2 A 18 App C Effect on Insulation of General purpose Motors Driven with 460 V Class Inverters Haud l1 E_j ieeee e32c5e3 j cf Gon Commercial TERI Commercial Leve 1 power source Inverter 1 meer power source Vivarter i Noor IN a a een d J E iy Hn e s L 1 oR l i o8 L i 3 Surge suppressing filter circuit 1 Output reactor 2 Output filter Figure C 3 Method to Suppress Surge Voltage C 4 Regarding existing equipment 1 Incase of a motor being driven with 460 V class inverter A survey over the last five years on motor insulation damage due to the surge voltages originating from switching of inverter elements shows that the damage incidence is 0 013 under the surge voltage condition of over 1 100 V and most o
145. UCTION TO FRENIC Mini This chapter describes the features and control system of the FRENIC Mini series and the recommended configuration for the inverter and peripheral equipment Contents Tiel RO uc 1 1 1 2 Control Syst m es Re DR A tiv BAN IU Eee A a Ae et Ree 1 8 1 3 Recommended Configuration ec eene dieit rein ie e ege eee dee dee etn 1 9 1 1 Features 1 1 Features Optimum performance for traversing conveyors High starting torque at 150 or more Equipped with Fuji s original simplified torque vector control system and the automatic torque boost function these inverters ensure consistent and powerful operation when automatic torque boost and slip compensation control are ON and start frequency is set at 5 Hz or more Output torque 95 Torque w Short time operation torque 10076 output torque refers to the rated torque of the motor driven at 60 Hz 150 200 100 4 amp Continuous operation 100 allowable range 50 500 1000 1500 2000 6 60 120 Motor speed r min 5 50 100 Output frequency Hz The above graph shows an example of torque characteristics obtained when FRENIC Mini is combined one to one with Fuji standard three phase molor 8 type series 4 poles Figure 1 1 Torque Characteristics Data Figure 1 2 Example of Output Torque Characteristics Automatic torque boost ON Braking resistor connectable to the inverter FRENIC Mini se
146. Units This section explains how to convert expressions to other units 1 Conversion of units 1 Force 1 kgf 9 8 N 1 N 70 102 kgf 2 Torque 1 kgfm 9 8 N m N m 0 102 kgfm 3 Work and Energy 1 kgfm 9 8 N m 9 8 J 9 8 W s 4 Power 1 kgf m s 9 8 N m s 9 8 J s 9 8 W 1 N m s 1 J s 1 W 0 102 kgf m s 5 Rotation speed r min rad s 0 1047 rad s e 1 rad s r min 9 549 r min T 6 Inertia constant J kg m moment of inertia GD kgm flywheel effect GD 4J GD J 4 7 Pressure and stress mmAq 9 8 Pa 9 8 N m 1 Pa 1 N m2 0 102 mmAq 1 bar 100000 Pa 1 02 kg cm 1 kg cm 98000 Pa 980 mbar atmospheric pressure 1013 mbar 760 mmHg 101300 Pa 1 033 kg cm 2 Calculation formula 1 Torque power and rotation speed 2n 60 P W 1 026 N r min T kgf m e P W z N r min t N m P W N r min P W N r min t Nem 9 55 T kgf m 40 974 2 Kinetic energy EQ er gem N o min AR e 2 e m2 e N2 in EQ 339 OP kg em N min 3 Torque of linear moving load Driving mode lt N m aise 0min EN Ny r min ng e T kgfem x0 159 or kgf Ny r min e ng Braking mode amp NER x0 159 mN FEN Ny r min ng T kgf m a
147. Y Y 0 100 J04 Integration time 0 0 to 3600 0 0 1 S Y Y 0 0 J05 D Differentiation time 0 00 to 600 00 0 01 s Y Y 0 00 J06 Feedback filter 0 0 to 900 0 0 1 s Y Y 0 5 y codes Link Functions Change Code Name Data setting range pie Unit when a cane pun running y01 Link Functions for 1 to 255 1 N Y 1 RS 485 Communication Station address yO2 Mode selection on no 0 Immediate trip and alarm Er 8 Y Y 0 response error 4 Trip and alarm Er 8 after running for the period of the timer set by y03 2 Retry during the period of the timer set by y03 If retry fails trip and alarm Er 8 3 Continue to run y03 Timer 0 0 to 60 0 0 1 S Y Y 2 0 y04 Baud rate 0 2400 bps Y Y 3 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 9 70 y05 Data length 0 8 bits Y Y 0 1 7 bits y06 Parity check 0 None Y Y 0 1 Even parity 2 Odd parity y07 Stop bits 0 2 bits Y Y 0 1 1 bit y08 No response error 0 No detection 1 to 60 1 s Y Y 0 detection time y09 Response interval 0 00 to 1 00 0 01 s Y Y 0 01 y10 Protocol selection 0 Modbus RTU protocol Y Y 0 1 SX protocol Loader protocol 2 Fuji general purpose inverter protocol y99 Link Function for Frequency command Run command Y N 0 9 73 Supporting Data Input source source 0 by H30 by H30 1 via RS 485 by H30 communication option 2 by H30 via RS 485 communication option 3 via RS 485 v
148. able 9 63 Gg 1 Disable Disable Enable m 2 Disable Enable Disable gr 3 Disable Enable Enable 4 Enable Disable Disable 5 Enable Disable Enable 6 Enable Enable Disable 7 Enable Enable Enable opL Output Phase Loss Protection Lin Input Phase Loss Protection ADFCF Automatic DEC Function for Carrier Frequency Note For single phase power input inverters Lin is always invalid regardless of H98 setting Note 1 Function code H71 appears on the LED monitor however the FRENIC Mini series of inverters does not recognize this code Note 2 Function code H95 is valid on the inverters with ROM versions of C1S11000 or higher The lowest four digits of the ROM version can be displayed on the LED monitor For details refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 3 5 Reading maintenance information Note 3 Function code H89 is valid on inverters with ROM version C1S11300 or later J codes Application Functions Change Code Name Data setting range Mn Unit when uas S UG ped running J01 PID Control 0 Disable N Y 0 Selection 1 Process control use Normal action 2 Process control use Inverse action J02 Remote process 0 Keypad N Y 0 command 4 PID process command 1 Data settings of E60 E61 and E62 are also required 9 64 4 Communication J03 P Gain 0 000 to 10 00 0 001 Times
149. able above no response will be returned as the inverter will be unable to receive any enquiries Settings for FRENIC Loader Set the same address as that specified in the connected PC 9 2 Details of Function Codes m Communications error processing y02 Specifies the error processing operation for RS 485 communication Data for y02 The inverter will Immediately enter Alarm mode issue RS 485 communications error 4 and shut down its output Continue to run for the period preset by the timer then enter Alarm mode issue RS 485 communications error 7 7 and shut down its output Retry to receive send the query response during the period preset by the timer If communications have not recovered the inverter will enter Alarm mode issue RS 485 communications error and shut down its output If communications have recovered the inverter will continue to run Continue to run even if a communications error occurs Setting for FRENIC Loader If the connected PC runs out during test running of the inverter no stop command may be able to be sent to stop the inverter For safety select the setting for this function code so as to prevent this happening m Error processing timer yO3 Sets the error processing timer for waiting time Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 sec m Transmission speed y04 Selects the transmission speed for RS 485 Data for y04 Transmission speed communication 7
150. ailable in the FRENIC Mini The function codes are displayed on the LED monitor on the keypad as shown below Setting the function codes Data Setting O U m o Z c Er Z 4 I m A m lt gt ju Ha LIL ID number in each function code group Function code group Table 3 4 List of FRENIC Mini Function Codes Function code group F codes Fundamental functions Function code F00 to F51 Function Basic functions Description To be used for basic motor running E codes Extension terminal functions E01 to E99 Terminal functions To be used to select the functions of the control circuit terminals To be used to set functions related to the LED monitor display C codes Control functions of frequency C01 to C52 Control functions To be used to set application functions related to frequency settings P codes Motor parameters P02 to P99 Motor parameters To be used to set specific parameters for the motor capacity etc H codes High performance functions H03 to H98 High level functions To be used for high added value functions and complicated control etc J codes Application functions JO1 to J06 Application functions To be used for PID control y codes Link functions y01 to y99 Link functions To be used for communications Refer to Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES for details on the function c
151. ails lUIN OINJ H4 OL NOILONGOYLNI Compact size Side by side mounting More than one FRENIC Mini inverter can be mounted side by side without any gap inside your system control panel thereby reducing the amount of space required for installation Ambient temperature 40 C 104 F or lower E 4 72 120 o 3 15 80 3 15 80 3 15 80 9 45 240 Unit inch mm Example Inverters of 3 phase 230 V 1 HP or less External dimensions compatible with Fuji FVR C11S series Sc 1 3 RS 485 communications card option can be installed internally This card can be installed inside the inverter s body without changing the dimensions RS 485 communication is available as option LL Refer to Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS 485 COMMUNICATION OPTION RS 485 communications card option Example Inverters of 3 phase 230 V 1 HP or less Models with built in braking resistor are available on order Inverters of 2 HP or over are available in a braking resistor built in type Requiring no installation or wiring of an external braking resistor reduces the total mounting space Refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 2 2 Braking resistor built in type U MUN QNOD LLLI M Example Inverters of 3 phase 230V 2 HP Simplified operation and wiring Frequency setting potentiometer is standard equipment The frequency can be adjusted easily by hand 1 1 Features Easy to remove re
152. alarm may not be outputted depending upon the data setting of the function code CPU error If the inverter detects a CPU error caused by noise or some other factor the inverter stops Yes Operation Protection Pressing the 69 key on the keypad forces the inverter to decelerate and stop the motor even 1f the inverter is running by any run commands given via the terminals or communications link operation After the motor stops the inverter issues alarm C A A STOP key priority Start check function Inverters prohibit any run operations wl Ly and displays 5 on the LED of keypad if any run command is present when Powering up An alarm the CJ key turned ON is released or an alarm reset RST is input Link command LE has switched inverter operation and the run command in the source to be switched is active Yes RS 485 communication error On detecting an RS 485 communication error the inverter displays the alarm code Data save error during undervoltage Ifthe data could not be saved during activation of the undervoltage protection function the inverter displays the alarm code Overload prevention control In the event of overheating of the cooling fan or an overload condition alarm display Y or oi the output frequency of the inverter is reduced to keep the inverter from tripping 8 36 Not applicable Ch
153. ale m Selecting object to be monitored F31 Select the output to terminal FMA for monitoring Data for F31 Function Output frequency before slip compensation Based on the following Monitor the following defined as 100 full scale Maximum output frequency Output frequency after slip compensation Maximum output frequency Output current Two times the inverter s rated output current 230 V class Output voltage 460 V class 250 V 500 V Input power Two times the inverter s rated output capacity PID feedback value Feedback value is 100 230 V class DC link bus voltage 460 V class 500 V 1000 V Test output 10 V with gain 100 9 2 Details of Function Codes F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation Allows you to select the load type and enable disable auto torque boost and auto energy saving operation The load selection enables an optimal V f pattern to be selected Load selection There are two different properties of loads the torque load which is in proportion to the square of speed and the constant torque load You can select a V f pattern optimized to the load property Refer to the figure in the descriptions for function code F09 for details Auto torque boost This feature optimizes the output voltage automatically to the motor and its load Even if the load varies the inverter can maintain the exciting current fed to the motor
154. and Options Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT This chapter describes how to use a range of peripheral equipment and options FRENIC Mini s configuration with them and requirements and precautions for selecting wires and crimp terminals Contents 6 1 Configuring the FRENIC Mini essere neret enne entr nnt nnne nennt nennen rr en nnne 6 1 6 2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals esses ener rennen nennen nennen 6 2 6 2 1 Recommended wites 2 ete on RES eile peti queden e ferebat arated oe 6 4 6 2 2 Crimp terminals eie tiU RH RH ec e dee vie E Ie ee A E eee 6 6 6 3 Peripheral Equipment ict te mU nan RO RN EN RR alte 6 7 1 Molded case circuit breaker MCCB ground fault circuit interrupter GFCT and magnetic Contactor MG it teen Re deni ete ep hodie vr ere e Eoo DRE 6 7 2 S tge killers teer tere Dee eth eH Ue ERIT ANE td ier na 6 11 L31 Arresten iioc e e ee en d ete eee En Eee tite eod ri i eden 6 11 4 Surge absorbers eoe eret e Nee RE ER AERE SERERE Ie Reed 6 12 6 4 Selecting Options s sotutiet eene qe tied dent ntes ex o feme need 6 13 6 4 1 Peripheral equipment options eren nennen nennen nnne ennt 6 13 T Braking feststorSc e Recette aede si tie deu A i eee AR 6 13 2 DC reactors DORS Se be esed dame ime des 6 16 3 AGreactors AGRS s cte RE RE RU NU RE etus 6 18 4 Output circuit filters OFLs sese e
155. and 3 Jump Frequency Band These function codes enable the inverter to jump up to three different points on the output frequency in order to skip the resonance frequency caused by the motor drive frequency and natural frequency of the driven mechanism During acceleration the moment the set frequency reaches the bottom of the set jump frequency band the inverter keeps the output at that bottom frequency until the output frequency reaches the upper limit and proceeds with the acceleration until the next set point is reached or set speed is reached During deceleration the inverter processes the set jump frequency band in reverse to the acceleration curve Refer to the left hand figure below When the set jump frequency bands overlap the overlapped band is ignored the inverter takes the lowest frequency within the overlapped bands as the bottom frequency and the highest as the peak Refer to the right hand figure below Internally set Internally set frequency frequency Jump frequency band Jump frequency band Jump frequency band L Jump frequency 1 Actual jump ump frequenc and bang y Jump frequency 3 Jump frequency 2 Jump frequency 2 Jump frequency 1 Set frequency Set frequency m Jump frequencies 1 2 and 3 C01 C02 and C03 Set the center of the jump frequency band Data setting range 0 0 to 400 0 Hz Setting to 0 0 results in no jump band m Jump frequency band C04 S
156. and pressing the 6 key brings the motor to a decelerated stop The amp key is enabled only in Running mode Changing function code F02 data makes it possible to run the motor in the reverse direction by pressing the fun key determine the motor rotational direction by entering input signals to the terminals and En m control the motor by pressing Fun 6 keys 3 2 2 Setup the set frequency and others By using the potentiometer and 9 V keys on the keypad you may set up the desired set frequency and PID process commands It is also possible to set up the set frequency as frequency load shaft speed line speed and constant feeding rate time by setting function code E48 Setting up the set frequency with the potentiometer on the keypad factory default If you set function code F01 to 4 Potentiometer on the keypad factory default and select frequency setting 1 with function codes E01 through E03 Hz2 Hzl OFF then the potentiometer becomes enabled to set up the set frequency Setting function code C30 to 4 Potentiometer on the keypad and selecting frequency setting 2 Hz2 Hzl ON also produce the same effect Setting up the set frequency with keys If you set function code F01 to 0 Keypad operation and select frequency setting 1 then J V keys become enabled to set up the set frequency in Running mode In any other operation modes those keys remain disabled Pressing C31 GA keys calls up the set f
157. apter 9 FUNCTION CODES This chapter contains overview lists of seven groups of function codes available for the FRENIC Mini series of inverters and details of each function code Contents 9 1 Functioni Code Tables 52 8 SER dta qa ano 9 1 92 Details ot Function Codes eine tre een cd eire eret e eed tacere ees a rend TR 9 12 9 2 1 F codes Fundamental functions ener nennen enne 9 12 9 2 2 E codes Extension terminal functions eene 9 33 9 2 3 C codes Control functions of frequency sssssssesessesee ener 9 46 9 2 4 Pcodes Motor parameters seien ede istic dete eee le eR eh ede Yd 9 49 9 2 5 H codes High performance functions sesssssesessseeee ener enne 9 5 9 2 6 J codes Application functions ener nennen nnne enn 9 64 92 1 Sy codes Linke functiotis ee ett Er RT INE E eed dase eens 9 70 9 1 Function Code Tables 9 1 Function Code Tables Function codes set up the FRENIC Mini series of inverters to match your system requirements Each function code consists of a 3 letter string The first letter is an alphabet that identifies its group and the following two letters are numerals that identify each individual code in the group The function codes are classified into seven groups Fundamental Functions F codes Extension Terminal Functions E codes Control Functions of Frequency C codes Motor Parameters P codes High Performance Functions H codes Application Functions
158. are OFF the display on LED4 to LEDI would be 0005 Bit 0 is assigned to digital output terminal Y 1 The value 1 is set when the terminal is short circuited with Y 1E and the value 0 is set when it opens The status of the mechanical relay contact output terminal 30A 30B and 30C are assigned to bit 8 The value 1 is set when the circuit between output terminals 30A and 30C is closed and the value 0 when the circuit between 30B and 30C is closed For example if Y1 is ON and the circuit between 30A and 30C are short circuited with each other then the display for LED4 to LED1 would be 0101 How the hexadecimal display is configured for the terminals to which bits 0 to 15 are assigned and the 7 segment LED is shown below Table 3 11 Segment Display for I O Signal Status in Hexadecimal Format LED No LED4 LED3 LED2 LEDI Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Input terminal RST XR XF _ X3 X2 X1 REV FWD Output terminal P0A C vi Binary 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Hexa decimal on the LED monitor LED4 LED3 LED2 LEDI Example No correlating control terminals XF XR and RST are reserved for communications Refer to 2 Displaying control I O signal terminals under communication control below 2 Displaying control I O
159. arm output 30A B C Yes Related function code H43 Braking resistor When the built in or external braking resistor overheats discharging and the operation of the inverter are stopped Tt is necessary to set the function code data according to the braking resistor used built in or external ALI LIL Yes F50 F51 Overload protection Stops the inverter output 1f the Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor IGBT internal temperature calculated from the output current and cooling fan temperature detection is over the preset value Full LIL LI Yes Motor protection Electronic thermal overload relay In the following cases the inverter stops running the motor to protect the motor in accordance with the electronic thermal overload protection Protects general purpose motors over the entire frequency range Protects inverter motors over the entire frequency range The operation level and thermal time constant can be set ri LIL I Yes F10 F11 F12 PTC thermistor A PTC thermistor input stops the inverter output for motor protection A PTC thermistor is connected between terminals C1 and 11 and a 1 kQ external resistor is connected between terminals 13 and C1 Yes H26 H27 Overload early warning Outputs a preliminary alarm at a preset level before the motor is stopped by the electronic thermal overload protection for the purpose o
160. arm using 9 amp keys 5 Press the C key to return to the alarm list Press the S key again to return to the menu E UTL C Q Tip If the menu cannot switch to any other one set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode 3 25 3 4 Alarm Mode When the protective function is activated to issue an alarm the inverter automatically transfers to Alarm mode and the alarm code will appear in the LED monitor Figure 3 11 shows the status transition of Alarm mode eS ye ee eo Sy Running Programming X Mode o a Mode eed d p Alarm occurs ror i m x ERG X f N EN c E M 1 t l P4 f j si A item No Switches at approx Output frequency Current alarm code t second intervals 56 03 e a 9000 E im em g iun e tO item tem No Switches at approx Output current J 1 second intervals 6 0 isc N i Terminal output signal status under communi Item No Switches at approx cation control 1 second intervals 5 29 je ee Uc Latest alarm code Ay m Same as above Eg 2aue O E fune r 2nd latest alarm code os S ame as above Eg 3 LU oe Sy X L 3rd latest alarm code e ji gt Same as above Eg sou ta E S V Running status info at the t
161. as reference point 0 00 to 100 00 0 01 Y Y 0 00 9 48 P codes Motor Parameters Change Code Name Data setting range nee Unit when Pale Delos Reter ment copy setting to running P02 Motor Parameters 0 01 to 10 00 kW where the data of function 0 01 kw N Y1 Nominal Rated capacity code P99 is 0 3 or 4 0 01 HP Y2 Er d 0 01 to 10 00 HP where the data of function laud ji code P99 is 1 standard motor P03 Rated current 0 00 to 99 99 0 01 A N Y1 Nominal 7 Y2 rated 9 49 current of Fuji standard motor P09 Slip compensation 0 0 to 200 0 0 1 Y Y 0 0 gain Typical rated slip frequency at 100 P99 Motor Selection 0 Characteristics of motor 0 Ee N Y1 1 9 50 Fuji standard 8 series motors Y2 1 Characteristics of motor 1 HP motors 3 Characteristics of motor 3 Fuji standard 6 series motors 4 Other motors H codes High Performance Functions Change Code Name Data setting range inen Unit when pa Bejauls Reten ment copy setting to running H03 Data Initialization 0 Disable initialization N N 0 9 51 Data reset 1 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults 2 Initialize motor parameters H04 Retry 0 Disable 1 Times Y Y 0 No of retries 1 to 10 9 54 H05 Latency time 0 5 to 20 0 0 1 S Y Y 5 0 H06 Cooling Fan ON OFF 0 Disable Y Y 0 9 55 Enable 2 HP or more
162. assigned to any terminal the inverter runs in 2 wire operation using FWD and REV m Coast to a stop BX Function code data 7 Shorting the circuit between the Output BX assigned terminal and terminal frequency CM will immediately shut down the inverter output so that the motor will FWD coast to a stop without issuing any REV ES alarms e NEM EZ m Reset alarm RST Function code data 8 oO m D P co When the protective function has been activated the inverter is in Alarm mode shorting the circuit between the RST assigned terminal and terminal CM will reset the alarm output on terminals Y1 and 30A B C Opening the circuit will release all the alarm indications to restart operation Allow 10 ms or more for the short circuit time RST should be kept OFF for normal inverter operation m Enable external alarm trip THR Function code data 9 S302 NOILONNA When the motor is running opening the circuit between the THR assigned terminal and terminal CM will immediately shut down the inverter output and issue the alarm 0H2 The motor will coast to a stop This signal will be self held inside the inverter until the amp key is pressed to reset it or any other reset action is taken If THR is not assigned to any terminal the inverter interprets this as THR always being ON amp Tip Use this function to protect the external braking resistor from overheating m Ready fo
163. atalogs of conventional inverters do not contain input rated capacities so a description of the input rated capacity is shown below 1 Inverter rated capacity corresponding to Pi Inthe guideline the conversion factor of a 6 pulse converter is used as reference conversion factor 1 It is therefore necessary to express the rated input capacity of inverters in a value including harmonic component current equivalent to conversion factor 1 Calculate the input fundamental current I1 from the kW rating and efficiency of the load motor as well as the efficiency of the inverter Then calculate the input rated capacity as shown below Input rated capacity J3 x power supply voltage x J x 1 0228 1000 kVA where 1 0228 is the 6 pulse converter s value of effective current fundamental current When a general purpose motor or inverter motor is used the appropriate value shown in Table B 2 can be used Select a value based on the kW rating of the motor used irrespective of the inverter type note The input rated capacity shown above is for the dedicated use in the equation to calculate a capacity of the inverters following the guideline Note that the capacity can not be applied to the reference for selection of the equipment or wires to be used in the inverter input circuits For selection of capacity for the peripheral equipment refer to the catalogs or technical documents issued from their manufacturers Table B 2
164. avina operation Variable torque load increasing in proportion to the square of speed during acceleration deceleration 4 Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during acceleration deceleration 5 Auto energy saving operation 9 t Auto torque boost during acceleration deceleration zr Starting torque 150 or mare Automatic torque boost in 5 Hz operation a Start stop Keypad operation Start forward reverse and stop with aun and stor keys F02 o9 Remote keypad is also usable External signal 5 digital inputs FWD REV coast to stop command etc on Link operation Communication via RS 485 RS 485 communications functions are optional 7 Frequency setting Can be set with built in potentiometer standard F01 C30 Q Can be set with v key m Remote keypad is also usable O Can be set wilh external potentiometer 1 to5kQ F01 C30 A Connected to analog input terminals 13 12 and 11 o z Potentiometer must be provided z amp Analog input Can be set with external vollage current output T 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 5 VDCyO to 100 96 terminal 12 4 to 20 mADC 0 to 100 terminal C1 A Inverse mode Can be reversed with digital input signal IVS E01 to E03 operation 10 to 0 VDC 5 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 terminal 12 E98 E99 ____ 20 to 4 mADC O to 100 terminal C1 an Mile cie Multistep frequency Selectable from B steps step 0 to 7 C05 to C11 Link operation
165. b in Ib in Bpod Braking time i cn Duty cycle E 0 Q m Wm AW qp CED FRNFSOCI 2U 0 027 FRNOO1C1 2U 0 050 Three phase FRNO02C1 2U 0 101 10 230 V FRN003CIN 2U 0 148 FRNOOSCIN 2U 0 248 FRNFS0CIN 4U 0 027 FRNO001C1N 4U 0 050 Three phase FRNOO2CINI AU 0 101 10 460 V FRNO003CINI 4U 0 148 FRNO05C1 4U 0 248 FRNFSOCI 7U 0 027 Single FRNOOICIN 7U 0 050 phase 10 230 V FRN0O2CIN 7U 0 501 FRNO03C1 7U 0 248 Notes 1 A box B in the above table replaces S or E depending on enclosure The 10 ED braking resistor does not support overheating detection or warning output so an electronic thermal overload relay needs to be set up using function codes F50 and F51 to protect the braking resistor from overheating 6 14 6 4 Selecting Options 1 3 Compact model Power supply voltage Braking resistor Inverter Figure 6 8 Braking Resistor Compact Model and Connection Example Resistor Table 6 9 Braking Resistor Compact Model Capacity HP Model TK80W 120Q Resistance Q 120 Applicable inverter model FRNF50 CIBE 2U FRNOO1 Cl1m 2U FRN002 CIB 2U FRN003 CIB 2U FRN005 CIBE 2U Applicable motor output HP 1 2 1 2 3 5 Average braking torque 150 100 Allowable braking properties Allowable duty cycle 5 5 Allowable continuous braking time
166. bove Alarm mode Displays the cause of trip by codes as follows OC 1 Overcurrent during acceleration gC Overcurrent during deceleration 5 OC 3 Overcurrent at constant speed L n Input phase loss tu Undervoltage ODPL Output phase loss 8 Ou 1 Overvoltage during acceleration Que Overvoltage during deceleration Hi D 3 Overvoltage during constant speed OH 1 Overheating of the heat sink OH2 External thermal relay tripped OHY Motor protection PTC thermistor obH Overheating of the DB circuit OL Motor overload OLU Inverter unit overload Er t Memory error Er e Remote keypad communications error 3 CPU error Ec 5 Operation procedure error E 8 RS 4B5 error E F Data save error due to undervoltage For details refer to Section 8 8 Details of Protective Functions Runningor Alarm history Saves and displays the last 4 trip codes and their detailed description Alarm mode Even with the main power off the alarm history data of the last 4 trips are retained l Overcurrent Protects the inverter to stop the inverter output when the following overcurrent flows during acceleration deceleration of constant speed rotation _ J Overcurrent caused by overload Short circult Overcurrent caused by short circuit in output circuit __ Ground fault Overcurrent caused by ground fault Ground fault can be detected at starting Overvoltage Stops the inverter output by detecting overvoltage in DC link circuit during braking
167. carrier frequency is higher than 4 kHz Er 5 to 5 or the ambient temperature is 40 C 104 F or higher 5 Tested under the standard load condition 85 load for applicable motor rating 6 Calculated under Fuji specified conditions 7 Indicates the value when using a DC reactor option 8 Average braking torque obtained with the AVR control off 5 7 Varies according to the efficiency of the motor 9 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor standard type available as option Max voltage V Min voltage V 3 phase average voltage V If this value is 2 to 3 96 use an AC reactor ACR 11 Making FRENIC Mini conform to category TYPEI of the UL Standard or NEMA1 requires an optional NEMA kit Note that the TYPE1 listed FRENIC Mini should be used in the ambient temperature range from 10 to 40 C 14 to 104 F x67 Refer to IEC 61800 3 5 2 3 10 Interphase voltage unbalance 96 8 1 2 Three phase 460 V Power supply voltage Fhrec phase 460 V f Type FRN___C1S 4U F50 001 002 003 Applicable motor rating HP 1 2 2 3 Rated capacity kVA 2 Lal 1 9 2 8 4 1 Rated voltage V 3 Three phase 380 400 415 V 50 Hz 380 400 440 460 V 60 Hz Rated current A fe 2 3 ES ON 55 9 0 150 of rated output current for 1 min Overload capability 200 of rated output current for 0 5 s Output Ratings Rated frequency Hz 50 60 Hz
168. cceeceeeceecceseceseceecaeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeeeeenseenseenaees 3 14 3 3 4 Checking I O signal status I O Checking sess 3 17 3 3 5 Reading maintenance information Maintenance Information ssssssssseeeeeeenee 3 21 3 3 6 Reading alarm information Alarm Information nennen 3 22 3 4 Alarm Mode 31 tesmnddeeonnndbdecotii tatem dont BRN dan aed 3 26 3 4 1 Releasing the alarm and transferring the inverter to Running mode sss 3 26 3 4 2 Displaying the alarm history essere ener enne nennen enn 3 26 3 4 3 Displaying the running information when an alarm occurs sese 3 27 3 4 4 Transferring to Programming mode ssessssssssssesseseeeee eere ener nnne nennen 3 27 3 1 Overview of Operation Modes 3 1 Overview of Operation Modes FRENIC Mini features the following three operation modes E Running mode This mode allows you to enter run stop commands in regular operation You may also monitor the running status in realtime Bi Programming mode This mode allows you to set function code data and check a variety of information relating to the inverter status and maintenance E Alarm mode If an alarm occurs the inverter automatically enters this Alarm mode in which the corresponding alarm code and its related information may be displayed on the LED monitor Alarm code Shows the error factor that has activated the protective function For detail
169. ccessible via RS 485 communication set each data to function code H30 as shown in the table below N represents information that cannot be accessed via by RS 485 communication but by commands from the terminals Refer to Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC and the RS 485 Communication User s Manual for details Function Data for H30 Remarks Monitoring Frequency setting Operation command Y Possible N Not possible Assign the terminal command LE to one of terminals X1 to X3 using function codes E01 to E03 to enable disable the function specified by code H30 by terminal command and short circuit between the terminal assigned for LE command and CM To disable the function open the circuit LE OFF When LE is set to OFF the inverter enters the operation mode where the commands and frequencies given by the terminals or keypad are effective Capacity of DC Link Bus Capacitor This function code is used to clear the information related to the DC link bus capacitor if it is replaced Follow the instructions for replacement Accumulated Run Time of Cooling Fan This function code is used to clear the information related to the cooling fan if it is replaced Follow the instruction for the replacement c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Non linear V f Pattern Frequency Refer to F04 Non linear V f Pattern Voltage Refer to F04 For details of setting the non linear V
170. celeration Deceleration Data for H07 Function Disable Linear Specifies the acceleration and deceleration patterns output frequency patterns Linear acceleration deceleration S curve weak S curve strong Curvilinear The inverter runs the motor with the constant acceleration and deceleration S curved acceleration deceleration To reduce the impact on the inverter driven motor during acceleration deceleration the inverter gradually accelerates decelerates the motor during both the acceleration deceleration Zones Two frequencies can be selected for S curved acceleration deceleration 596 weak or 1096 strong of the maximum output frequency The four centers of S curves are not affected by this selection Note the set acceleration deceleration time defines the linear acceleration deceleration in the zones so that the actual zone exceeds the set zone in this case Zones are defined in units of time Refer to the figure at the right Curvilinear acceleration deceleration The inverter drives the motor to output the maximum performance with the following acceleration deceleration pat terns n the zone under the base frequency linear acceleration deceleration of constant torque output for the motor In the zone above the base frequency speed two times the base frequency and acceleration deceleration half of the base frequency p m K CAPACITIES for details Ou
171. cess command with the lowest digit blinking on the LED monitor Pressing 9 amp 2 keys again makes it possible to change the PID process command Once the PID process command is modified it will be saved internally Even if the inverter is switched to any other PID process command entry method and then returned to the keypad entry method the setting will be retained Further even turning OFF the inverter will automatically save the setting into the non volatile memory At the next time when the inverter is turned ON the setting will become the default PID process command Even if the PID process command is selected SS4 ON in the multistep frequency it is still possible to set the process command using the keypad When function code J02 has been set to any value except 0 pressing N V keys displays the PID process command currently selected setting 1s not possible When the PID process command is displayed the decimal point next to the lowest digit on the LED display blinks to discriminate it from the frequency setting IG Blinking 3 4 3 2 Running Mode Setting up the set frequency with V keys under the PID control To set the set frequency with N V keys under the PID control you need to specify the following conditions Set function code F01 to 0 Keypad operation Select frequency setting 1 Frequency settings from communications link Disabled and Multistep frequency settings Disabled as
172. cial High Voltage nei e e teretes ecce rte ee ens A 12 Application to general purpose inverters esssseseeseeeee eene enn A 12 Compliance to the harmonic suppression for customers receiving high voltage or special high Voltage uos soe tee ete reor Sasedaxceoc cesta TTA cusses cabs dee cst EUR E OEE A 13 Effect on Insulation of General purpose Motors Driven with 460 V Class Inverters A 17 Generating mechanism of surge voltages sse eee A 17 Effect of surge voltages ssssssssssssesessseeseeeee eene enne ener A 18 Countermeasures against surge voltages ssssssssssssssssseeeeeneeenenerenerenr ener ener eren A 18 Regarding existing equipment sss ener enne nnne nnne nnne trennen nre A 19 Inverter Generating Loss ete e e de ERU e Re E E o He EU eda A 20 Conversion tron SI Units e onset utem tmt e OR ties A 21 Allowable Current of Insulated Wires eese eene nennen rennen enne enne A 23 Replacement Informations 2 eite es WAS ARE e RR Dee Eee RORIS acheter eee ei A 25 External dimensions comparison tables esssseeseseeeee ener enne A 25 Terminal arrangements and symbols sse enne nnne A 29 Function Codes oce tutt prt EN A 31 Glossary xi Part 1 General Information Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC Mini Chapter 2 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD Chapter 1 INTROD
173. code display and the next alarm to be released If a run command had been input at this stage the motor will start up Pt amp Note ae OS 3 4 4 Transferring to Programming mode o Q m o Z c Er Z 4 I m A m lt gt iw PRA Further it is also possible to transfer the inverter to Programming mode by pressing 69 5x keys simultaneously while the alarm is displayed and to then check and adjust the function code data Part 2 Driving the Motor Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS 485 COMMUNICATION OPTION Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC This chapter describes the main block diagrams for the control logic of the FRENIC Mini series of inverters Contents 4 1 Symbols Used in the Block Diagrams and their Meanings ccccesecesceseceseeececseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenrens 4 1 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Generator ccesccescesseesseeseeeseeeeeeccnseceseceaeceaecsaecaeecaeeeseeaaecaeeeaeeneeseeeeereeaees 4 2 4 3 Drive Command Generator secs n ORC IT ERG RO ICH UO SU OR 4 4 4 4 Terminal Command Decoderts ssec ee eie e tui EH TET edu eee Te ROS 4 6 4 5 Digital Output Selector icc ie hs eee ease TR TH RW IT oe v S it ies 4 10 4 6 Analog Output FMA Selector cceecccecccesecssecsseeseeeseeeeeeseecseeeeeecesecssecseceaeceaecsaecaaecaeecaeeeaecaeecneeeereees 4 12 4 7 Drive Command Controller rre ode dra a 4 14 4
174. cteristics data to these function codes To disable the electronic thermal motor overload protection set data of F11 to 0 00 m Motor characteristics F10 F10 selects the cooling mechanism of the motor built in cooling fan or externally powered forced ventilation fan Data for F10 Function For general purpose motors with built in self cooling fan The cooling effect will decrease in low frequency operation For inverter driven motors or high speed motors with forced ventilation fan The cooling effect will be kept constant regardless of the output frequency The figures below illustrate the cooling characteristics for the motor selected by function code P99 Motor selection Actual output current Continuous Actual output current Continuous Overload detection current F11 Overload detection current F11 4 gt 2HP 1 5 KW Piss 4 F10 2 100 100 85 in at 90 10 1 75 69 s F10 1 i fe Base frequency gt 1HP If base frequency was 0 75 kW over 60 Hz fe 60 Hz Output Output frequency l frequency 0 5 7 fo Hz O fex0 33 fe fo Hz P99 0 3 P99 1 2 Characteristics of motor 0 Fuji standard 8 series motors Characteristics of motor 3 Fuji standard 6 series motors Others Characteristics of motor 1 Typical motors rated in HP Cooling Characteristics of Motors m Overload detection current F11 F11 specifies the operation level of the e
175. cuments related to Fuji inverters Catalogs FRENIC5000G11S P11S FRENIC Eco FRENIC5000VG7S User s Manuals and Technical Information FRENIC5000G11S P118 Technical Information FRENIC Eco User s Manual FRENIC5000VG7S Series User s Manual Safety precautions Read this manual thoroughly before proceeding with installation connections wiring operation or maintenance and inspection Ensure you have sound knowledge of the device and familiarize yourself with all safety information and precautions before proceeding to operate the inverter Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual AW ARNING Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to dangerous conditions possibly resulting in death or serious bodily injuries Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to CAUTION dangerous conditions possibly resulting in minor or light bodily injuries and or substantial property damage Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious consequences These safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at all times ANCAUTION This product is not designed for use in appliances and machinery on which lives depend Consult your Fuji Electric representative before considering the FRENIC Mini series of inverters for equipment and machinery related to nuclear power control aerospace u
176. cy Voltage and frequency variations Momentary voltage dip Three phase 200 V 50 Hz 200 V 220 V 230 V 60 Hz 0 8 L5 3 0 0 8 0 0 7 1 4 2 5 4 2 7 0 150 of rated output current for min 200 of rated output current for 0 5 s 50 60 Hz Three phase 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 9 2 or less Frequency 5 to 5 When the input voltage is 165 V or more the inverter may keep running r capability s Even if it drops below 165 V the inverter may keep running for 15 ms w DCR 0 57 0 93 1 6 30 5 7 8 3 6 w o DCR I 1 8 3 1 3 13 2 Required power supply capacity kVA u n GI x az e z Rated current A Oo m D O 0 3 0 6 Torque i4 5 100 an 7 ak Torque t 150 EE E s x 1 5 DC injection braking Starting frequency 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Braking time 0 0 to 30 0 s ue Braking level 0 to 100 of rated current Enclosure IEC60529 IP20 UL open type SNOI VOIJIO3dS Cooling method Fan cooling Weight lbs kg Natural cooling 1 3 0 6 1 3 0 6 13 060 15 07 3 7 1 7 3703 5 1 23 _ Fuji 4 pole standard motors 2 The rated capacity is for 230 V output voltage 3 Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage i LI LI 7 4 Use the inverter at the current given in or below when the
177. d LE to terminal X2 X3 CM ON PID integration and differentiation are reset e g Assigns the command PID RST to terminal X3 X1 CM ON PID integration is temporarily stopped e g Assigns the command PID HLD to terminal X1 E02 24 H30 23 y99 1 8 4 Terminal Specifications Analog output transistor output and relay output terminals Analog output Analog monitor Functions The monitor signal for analog DC voltage 0 to 10 VDC is output The signal functions can be selected with the function code F31 from the following Output frequency before slip compensation Output frequency after slip compensation Output current Output voltage Input power PID feedback value DC link bus voltage Analog output test Output voltage 0 to 10 VDC maximum current 2 mA Up to two analog voltmeters can be connected Related function codes F30 F31 Analog common Common for analog output signal FMA This terminal is electrically isolated from terminals CM and Y1E Transistor output Transistor output Commands listed below can be assigned to terminal Y1 and the signal is output according to the command Normal negative logic output switching feature Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals between Y1 and Y1E If the logic value for ON between Y1 and Y1E is 1 in the normal logic system for example OFF
178. d is turned ON preceding the JOG command the inverter runs the motor in ordinary operation until the JOG is turned ON m Switch frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 Function code data 11 Turning the digital input signal Hz2 Hz1 ON OFF can switch the frequency setting means between frequency command 1 defined by function code F01 and frequency command 2 defined by function code C30 If Hz2 Hz1 is not assigned to any terminal the frequency setting means defined by function code F01 will take effect Hz2 Hz1 Frequency setting means OFF F01 Frequency command 1 ON C30 Frequency command 2 For details of the relationship for frequency settings other than frequency command 1 or 2 refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Generator 9 2 Details of Function Codes m Enable write from keypad WE KP Function code data 19 Turning OFF the WE KP command prohibits changing of function code data from the keypad Only when the WE KP command is turned ON you may access function code data from the keypad according to the setting of function code F00 as listed below If the WE KP command is not assigned to any terminal the inverter will interpret WE KP as being always ON If WE KP Function 1s set to Disabled Inhibit editing of function code data 0 Permit editing of function code data 1 Inhibit editing of function code data except F00 and H03 Note If you mis
179. d transport machines that decreases in Required torque N m oe Required power d Required torque a Required power HP Rotating speed of load machine Control circuit terminals Terminals on the inverter which are used for input output of signals to control or manage the inverter external equipment directly or indirectly Current limiter A device that keeps an inverter output frequency within the specified current limit Cursor Marker blinking on the four digit 7 segment LED monitor which shows that data in the blinking digit can be changed modified by keying operation Curvilinear V f pattern A generic name for the inverter output patterns with curvilinear relation between the frequency and voltage Refer to function code H07 in Chapter 9 Section 9 2 5 H codes DC braking DC injection braking DC current braking that an inverter injects into the motor to brake and stop it against the moment of inertia of the motor or its load The inertial energy generated is consumed as heat in the motor If a motor having the load with large moment of inertia is going to stop abruptly the moment of inertia may force to rotate the motor after the inverter output frequency has been reduced to 0 Hz Use DC injection braking to stop the motor completely Related function codes F20 and F21 DC link bus voltage Voltage at the DC link bus that is the end stage of the converter part of inverters T
180. dd optional braking resistor Deceleration time calculation The calculated time is correct Regenerative energy calculation Is the loss permissible Select a braking resistor of higher rating Is the loss permissible Highly frequent acceleration and deceleration Equivalent RMS current calculation Is the RMS current lower or equal to the rated current Figure 7 3 Selection Procedure 7 4 1 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters Calculating the load torque during constant speed running For detailed calculation refer to Section 7 1 3 1 It is essential to calculate the load torque during constant speed running for all loads First calculate the load torque of the motor during constant speed running and then select a tentative capacity so that the continuous rated torque of the motor during constant speed running becomes higher than the load torque To perform capacity selection efficiently it is necessary to match the rated speeds base speeds of the motor and load To do this select an appropriate reduction gear mechanical transmission ratio and the number of motor poles If the acceleration or deceleration time is not restricted the tentative capacity can apply as a defined capacity Calculating the acceleration time For detailed calculation refer to Section 7 1 3 2 When there are some specified requirements for the acceleration time calculate it according to the following procedure
181. direction respectively If both of FWD and REV are turned on simultaneously the inverter immediately decelerates to stop the motor Data for F02 Function Enable amp and 69 keys on the built in keypad to run and stop the motor The FWD or REV command should be ON for forward or reverse rotation beforehand Enable the FWD or REV command to run the motor To turn on the FWD command short circuit terminals FWD and CM to turn on the REV command short circuit terminals REV and CM c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Enable un and 69 keys on the built in keypad to run and stop the motor in the forward direction Enable un and 69 keys on the built in keypad to run and stop the motor in the reverse direction The table below lists the operational relationship between function code F02 Running stopping and rotational direction the un key operation and control signal inputs to terminals FWD and REV which determines the rotational direction Data for F02 Key on the built in keypad Control Signal Inputs to Terminals FWD and REV Function code E98 FWD command Function code E99 REV command Motor rotational direction uN key Be ee Okey s ee Nu M forward fixed D key Stop eee euey c T RE LN reverse fixed D key Stop F03 Maximum Frequency Sets the maximum frequency to
182. e Note that the torque value varies according to the inverter capacity Selecting an optimal braking unit enables a braking torque value to be selected comparatively freely in the range below the short time maximum torque in the driving mode as shown in curve f For braking related values when the inverter and braking resistor are normally combined refer to Chapter 6 Section 6 4 1 1 Braking resistors 7 3 e m r m O d Z O Q a gt r O 4 O E gt Z U z lt m A 4 m A O b gt Q a m n 7 1 2 Selection procedure Figure 7 3 shows the general selection procedure for optimal inverters Items numbered 1 through 5 are described on the following pages You may easily select inverter capacity if there are no restrictions on acceleration and deceleration times If there are any restrictions on acceleration or deceleration time or acceleration and deceleration are frequent then the selection procedure is more complex START Load torque calculation during 1 constant speed running f 1 Select capacity under the condition of Constant speed running torque Rated torque gt No Acceleration and deceleration time restricted Yes Acceleration time calculation 2 Raise the capacity class Acceleration time calculation 2 The calculated time is correct Deceleration time calculation The calculated time is correct A
183. e power supply treatment of the proximity limit switches The proximity limit switches can be replaced with superior noise immunity types such as magnetic types 4 Effect on pressure sensors Phenomenon If an inverter operates pressure sensors may malfunction Probable cause Noise may penetrate through a grounding wire into the signal line Measures It is effective to install a noise filter on the power supply side of the inverter or to change the wiring 5 Effect on position detectors pulse generators PGs or pulse encoders Phenomenon If an inverter operates pulse encoders may produce erroneous pulses that shift the stop position of a machine Probable cause Erroneous pulses are liable to occur when the signal lines of the PG and power lines are bundled together Measure The influence of induction noise and radiation noise can be reduced by separating the PG signal lines and power lines Providing noise filters at the input and output terminals is also an effective measure A 1 A 2 Noise This section gives a summary of noises generated in inverters and their effects on devices subject to noise 1 Inverter noise Figure A 1 shows an outline of the inverter configuration The inverter converts AC to DC rectification in a converter unit and converts DC to AC inversion with 3 phase variable voltage and variable frequency The conversion inversion is performed by PWM implemented by switching six transistors IGBT
184. e in the wires connected to the phases Ensure that and motor the wiring is shorter than 164 ft 50 m If this length must be exceeded Wiring lower the carrier frequency or mount an output circuit filter OFL Wnngsi Select wires with a sufficient capacity by referring to the current value or iring size Man recommended wire size f Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with Wiring type motors Grounding Securely ground the inverter using the grounding terminal Select an inverter according to the applicable motor ratings listed in the Driving standard specifications table for the inverter Selecting general purpose When high starting torque is required or quick acceleration or deceleration inverter motor is required select an inverter with a capacity one size greater than the capacity standard Driving special Select an inverter that meets the following condition motors Inverter rated current gt Motor rated current Transpor When transporting or storing inverters follow the procedures and select locations that meet the tation and environmental conditions listed in Chapter 1 Section 1 3 Transportation and Section 1 4 storage Storage Environment How this manual is organized This manual contains chapters 1 through 9 appendices and glossary Part 1 General Information Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC Mini This chapter describes the features and control system of the FRENIC Mini series and the
185. e EC Retry Latency time H04 5 H05 0 5s F19 Motor Characteristics No function code with same feature No setting F20 Jump Frequency Band F21 Jump Frequency 1 F22 Jump Frequency 2 F23 Jump Frequency 3 F24 F25 F27 THR terminal function E01 X1 Terminal Function Assign THR to the terminal X1 F28 BX terminal function E02 X2 Terminal Function Assign BX to the terminal X2 F29 F30 F31 F32 FM terminal Voltage adjustment F30 Terminal FMA Gain to output The data has different feature each other poo NECI ES voltage Readjust the meter F33 When selecting the output frequency F33 0 FM terminal Select Terminal FMA Monitor object A 31 set F31 0 If the output current F33 1 set F31 2 FVR C11S vs FRENIC Mini FVR C11S FRENIC Mini Name Name code code FOO F01 F02 F03 F04 F07 F08 F09 Torque boost F09 Torque Boost The data implements other function For details refer to the torque boost setting conversion table on page A 33 F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Select the reduced constant torque using F37 em Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation F10 Electronic thermal overload relay F10 Electronic Thermal Motor Overload Select Disable using F11 0 00 instead of Select Protection Select motor F10 characteristics F11 Electronic thermal overload relay F11 Electronic Thermal Motor Overload Level Protection Overload detection current F12 Electronic
186. e F18 Bias Bias for PID command 1 Bias Bias reference point for PID command 1 These function codes modify the analog input of the PID process command 1 by gain and bias enabling defining the arbitrary relationship between the analog input and PID process command to be arbitrarily defined The actual setting is the same as that of function code F18 For details refer to the description of function code F18 m Bias C51 Data setting range 100 00 to 100 00 96 m Bias reference point C52 Data setting range 0 00 to 100 00 96 9 48 9 2 4 9 2 Details of Function Codes P codes Motor parameters Motor Parameter Rated capacity Sets the nominal rated capacity that is denoted on the rating nameplate of the motor Data for P02 If the nominal rated capacity is 0 01 to 10 00 kW when function code P99 is set to 0 3 or 4 0 01 to 10 00 HP when function code P99 is set to 1 Motor Parameter Rated current Sets the nominal rated current that is printed on the rating nameplate of the motor Data setting range 0 00 to 99 99 Amp Motor Parameter Slip compensation gain Sets the gain to compensate for the motor slip frequency Data setting range 0 0 to 200 0 Compensation gains for the rated slip frequencies listed in the following table are ones for Fuji standard motors Typical rated slip frequencies for 100 Rated capacity HP Fuji standard 8 series motors Hz T
187. ection Select the characteristics of the motor Refer to the descriptions given for P99 3 H03 Data Initialization Initialize the motor constants H03 2 4 P03 Motor Parameters Set the rated current printed on the nameplate if the set data Rated current differs from the rated current f any value out of the general motor capacity is set for P02 the capacity will be internally converted to the applicable motor rating see the table on the next page a c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo m If P99 Motor selection is set to 0 Fuji standard 8 series motors 3 Fuji standard 6 series motors or 4 Other motors Rated current A Setting range Appli If P99 Motor selection is set to Power cable 0 3 4 supply med Shipping Shipping Shipping VONESE Function code pues destination destination destination P02 kW Version Version Version Asia Japan Asia EU Japan Asia Japan 0 01 to 0 06 0 07 to 0 10 0 11 to 0 20 gt Z am 0 21 to 0 40 NN 2 2 0 41 to 0 75 ea 8 as Fu md 0 76 to 1 50 9 2 BR 1 51 to 2 20 eC uu 2 21 to 3 70 3 71 to 5 50 5 51 to 10 00 0 01 to 0 06 0 06 0 19 0 22 0 19 0 19 0 22 0 19 0 19 0 22 0 19 0 07 to 0 10 0 1 0 31 0 34 0 31 0 31 0 34 0 31 0 31 0 34 0 31 0 11 to 0 20 0 2 0 58 0 65 0 58 0 59 0 65 0 59 0 58 0 65 0 58 gt S 0 21 to 0 40 0 4 1 09 1 1
188. ed Press the G5 key to switch between monitor items Table 3 1 Monitor Items Display Sample on the LED monitor Meaning of Displayed Value Monitor Items Speed monitor CIIN Hz r min ft min m min min LLL ALI Refer to Table 3 2 Output current A LS IH Detected value Input power HP LLLI P An alternative expression for kW Output voltage V CLL Commanded value PID d Not wa PID process command or PID feedback value x process commis Nofe ne PID display coefficient A B B PID display coefficient A and B Refer to function codes E40 and E41 Timer sec Note Remaining effective timer count PID feedback value Note Zi Note The PID process command and PID feedback value are displayed only under the PID control using a process command J01 1 or 2 Further the timer for timer operation is only displayed when timer is enabled C21 1 3 5 Figure 3 3 shows the procedure example for selecting the desired monitor item Power ON Running Mode Monitoring of running status t Speed monitor Hz Eg soca Output current A Eg SGA Input power kW aoe Output voltage V Eg eon PID process command Eg 0 PID feedback value Eg E g GS key Timer s E g 7 The speed monitor may display the output frequency Hz set frequency Hz load
189. eding rate E50 time Frequency setting x E39 Tp If you set function code C30 to 0 Keypad operation and select frequency setting 2 then A W V keys become also enabled to set up the set frequency E Make setting under PID control To enable PID control you need to set function code JO1 to 1 or 2 In the PID control mode the items that can be set or checked with J V keys are different from those under normal frequency control depending upon the current LED monitor setting If the LED monitor is set to the speed monitor E43 0 you may access manual feed commands Set frequency with S keys if it is set to any other you may access PID process commands with those keys LL Refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 8 PID Frequency Command Generator for details on the PID control Setting the PID process command with the built in potentiometer Set function code E60 to 3 PID process command 1 and J02 to 1 PID process command 1 After that selecting PID control remote process command enables you to set the PID process command using the built in potentiometer Setting the PID process command with V keys Set function code J02 to 0 Keypad operation and set the LED monitor to the setting other than the speed monitor E43 0 in Running mode This makes it possible to set the PID process command using N V keys This setting is possible only in Running mode Pressing 9 amp 2 keys displays the PID pro
190. ejs uoreorunuiuJoo ale sapoo S By wieJ6elp x2ojq Siy Woy sapp 9160 eu BANE s 0309 Cid USuM Creo zo x SIfejep 10 jepooeg puewwog Aouenbai4 Qld L Y eJnI4 0 JeJ8H Z Lm 19 jeunes lt zi jeuiuda lt 1818 u0nuejog uriing 293 pue 93 093 10 uasouo uaeq seu uonouny aules 3y usu Ajuoud sexe x 5 E 3 i zi HOC E emn E pamu AUAN AAM y Al Kouanbai OLG ee i tia 9 Aouenbary GRANN Or GE a p Advanta Or SN OHD ag Z ouanbay OL RD ns 9n EJ lez ASS am 4m peay Kauanbau dejsajmw suongorumunuo pass wq yzHiZzH SA L zpuesauog uogRJOd REA A3umnbaus NMS PEMLUDN 3j e D Figure 4 1 Block Diagram for Drive Frequency Command Generator 4 2 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Generator Figure 4 1 shows the processes that generate the final drive frequency command from the frequency settings given by various means and those switched modified by function codes If PID process control takes effect JO1 1 or 2 the drive frequency generation will differ from that shown in this diagram Refer to Section 4 8 PID Frequency Command Generator Additional and supplemental information is given below Frequency settings using the 9 V key on the keypad may take a different format by means of the data setting for function code E48 Refer to function code E48 in Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES for details C1 input as a frequency settings signal wi
191. elay F10 Electronic Thermal Motor Overload Select Disable using F11 0 00 instead of Select Protection Select motor F10 characteristics F09 Electronic thermal overload relay F11 Electronic Thermal Motor Overload Level Protection Overload detection current F12 Electronic Thermal Motor Overload Set the data at 1 0min Protection Thermal time constant F10 Restart mode after momentary F14 Restart after Instantaneous Power F10 0 F10 1 is equivalent to F14 1 F14 4 oerte Farm F11 Frequency setting gain C32 Analog Input Adjustment Gain for Analog input is applied to 12 so that the gain terminal input 12 Gain for set frequency is equal to the gain for 12 Setting differs each other Refer to Chapter 9 C34 Analog Input Adjustment Gain for FUNCTION CODES for details terminal input 12 Gain reference point F26 Bias frequency F18 Bias for Frequency Command 1 F01 C50 Bias Frequency command 1 Bias reference point F12 DC brake Braking current F21 DC Braking Braking level F20 DC Braking Start frequency Set at 3 Hz Fi Start Frequency F15 Motor sound F26 Motor Sound Carrier frequency F15 0 to 5 sets the carrier frequency at 2 5 to 15kHz equivalently Check the motor sound and select the frequency correctly F16 Alarm history Check the alarm information from the keypad F17 Data initializing F18 Auto reset H04 Retry No of retries When the retry is enabled F18 1 set proses
192. elay contacts are programmable You can assign various functions to these terminals using function codes E20 and E27 Setting data of 1000s allows you to use these terminals for the negative logic system 4 11 UJ w o e z gt EU 2 e xi O A Q e z Z O o Q Q O 4 6 Analog Output FMA Selector FMA Output Gain FMA Selector F30 Fal a4A Analog Output Output Frequency 1 o Q O FMA Before Slip Compensation Output Frequency 2 After Slip Compensation Output Current Output Voltage Input Power Ss PID Feedback Value o DC Link Bus Voltage R Test Analog Output se x MU iul N O o e E r Figure 4 5 Analog Output FMA Selector 4 12 4 6 Analog Output FMA Selector The block diagram shown in Figure 4 5 shows the process for selecting and processing the analog signals to be outputted to the analog output terminal FMA Function code F31 determines the signals to be outputted to FMA Function code F30 scales the output signal to a level suitable for the meters to be connected to the FMA terminal The output voltage range is 0 to 10 VDC and the maximum allowable load current is 2 mA This is capable of driving two analog voltmeters with a common rating The test analog output is full scale voltage output that adjusts the scale of the connected meter UJ r Q A z gt D E S n TI E Q
193. election and connection of peripheral equipment Figure 1 9 shows the recommended configuration for an inverter and peripheral equipment Three phase or single phase power supply Molded case circuit breaker or Ground fault circuit interrupter with overcurrent protection Magnetic contactor Braking resistor DC reactor DCR E Induction motor Figure 1 9 Recommended Configuration Diagram 1 9 i9 m o 9 IUlA OIN34H OL NOILONGOYLNI Chapter 2 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS This chapter contains external views of the FRENIC Mini series and an overview of terminal blocks including a description of the 7 segment LED monitor and keys on the keypad Contents 2 1 External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks 2 1 2 2 LED Monitor Potentiometer and Keys on the Keypad sese 2 2 2 1 External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks 2 1 External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks Figures 2 1 and 2 2 show the external and bottom views of the FRENIC Mini 1 External and bottom views Tu Control circuit terminal block cover Q gt o E N Keypad Nameplate Control circuit terminal Main circuit terminal bock cover block cover Figure 2 1 External Views of FRENIC Mini SNOILONN4 ANY S3IAVN SLYVd Barrier for the RS 485 _ communications port Ss ff AE fi Control circuit wire port ll A DB P1 P and N cable port A 1 L1 R L
194. ent protection in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring At this time ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity o Y m Q a O Z o Note 2 A magnetic contactor MC should if necessary be mounted independent of the MCCB or GFCI to cut off the power fed to the inverter Refer to page 6 7 for details MCs or solenoids that will be installed close to the inverter require surge absorbers to be connected in parallel to their coils Note 3 When connecting a DC reactor optional accessory remove the jumper bar from terminals P1 and P Note 4 THR function can be used by assigning code 9 Alarm from external equipment to any of terminals X1 to X3 FWD or REV function code E01 to E03 E98 or E99 For details refer to Chapter 9 Note 5 Frequency can be set by connecting a frequency setting device external potentiometer between the terminals 11 12 and 13 instead of inputting voltage signal 0 to 10 VDC or 0 to 5 VDC between the terminals 12 and 11 Note 6 For the wiring of the control circuit use shielded or twisted wires When using shielded wires connect the shields to earth To prevent malfunction due to noise keep the control circuit wiring away from the main circuit wiring as far as possible recommended 3 94 in 100 mm or longer and never set them in the same wire duct When crossing the control circuit wiring with
195. er EMC filter built in type 8 30 8 7 J Connection Dia grams secet Ee Reed d e e eroe elite ete ie Rats 8 32 8U LI Keypad operation recte at tent as EH RAG Ad He REB Qe RE eb EUH EUR 8 32 8 7 2 Operation by external signal inputs enne ener enne 8 33 8 8 Details of Protective Functions eene enne nnne trennen rre 8 34 Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES 9 1 JEunction Code Tables c d DEREN ERES 9 1 92 D teils of Function Codes oae se hin aati bedevil ative orte dtp o ee Pepe Hore iA 9 12 9 2 1 F codes Fundamental functions eee nennen eren 9 12 9 2 2 E codes Extension terminal functions ener nnne nnne nnne 9 33 9 2 3 C codes Control functions of frequency ener nennen nnne 9 46 9 2 4 P codes Motor parameters eere eei RH ERE ERR 9 49 9 2 5 H codes High performance functions essessssssesseeeeeee enne 9 5 9 2 6 J codes Application functions enne ener nennen enne nnne 9 64 9271 lt y Codes Link functions ete e qa t ed etse bete dites 9 70 App A A l A 2 A 3 App B B 1 B 2 App C C 1 C 2 C 3 C 4 App D App E App F App G Gl G2 G3 Appendices Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise A 1 Effect of inverters on other deyiceS iiien nunes isre ai ro i eiere ra i e ara ae aa aieia A 1 NoiSe erea Rm A 2 Noise prevention v e ss E her CER EE tetgotsd A 4 Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or Spe
196. er supply Inverter type voltage Three FRNO02C1E 2U phase FRNOO3C1E 2U 30V FRNOOSC1E 2U Three FRNOO2C1E 4U phase FRNOO3C1E 4U 460V FRNOOSC1E 4U Single FRNOO2C1E 7U e phase is 230 V FRNOOGCTE 7U 8 31 ile m D D SNOILVOIJIO3dS 8 7 Connection Diagrams 8 7 1 Keypad operation The connection diagram below shows an example for a keypad operation with the built in potentiometer and keys MCCB or GFCI Note 1 MC Note 2 Power supply X LiL single phase a 230V X L2 N 60Hz ad MCCB or GFCI Note 1 MC Note 2 Power supply three phase X ST it 230V 60Hz ae or Ihree phase X Kiei 460V porte Grounding terminal r e GO Grounding terminal Control circuit Alarm output for any fault Analog input RCO GFCE Residual current operated Protective Device Ground Faull Circuit interrupter MC Magnetic Contactor MCCB Molded Case Circuit Breaker Digital input Transistor output Note 1 Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or a residual current operated protective device RCD a ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI with overcurrent protection in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring At this time ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity Note 2 A magnetic contactor MC should if necessary be mounted inde
197. eration time deceleration time and frequency in operation of the load machine to be driven by the motor selected in 1 above calculate the acceleration deceleration braking torque This section describes the selection procedure for 1 and 2 above First it explains the output torque obtained by using the motor driven by the inverter FRENIC Mini 7 1 1 Motor output torque characteristics Figures 7 1 and 7 2 graph the output torque characteristics of motors at the rated output frequency individually for 50 Hz and 60 Hz base The horizontal and vertical axes show the output frequency and output torque respectively Curves a through f depend on the running conditions 250 Q i E 200 ad i 180 i i BERE o 150 m b hA m r t b 5x iu o r ms nd w j 100 M e ua 3 d i 1 S 50 eek Q s Output E S 50 60 pipu 5 0 i s i frequency Z 5 Hz amp I j S o 50 we i gt O i e az a I 100 we 2 act 150 Z i i m i a 200 m i A I O 250 gt 6 Figure 7 1 Output Torque Characteristics Base frequency 50 Hz E m p 7 1 250 HBI am deri mmm nmn cite m i i 200 _ 180 ee eS sees i S 1 i 150 EAE D t t se eR 100 T 2 i a 50 o L 3 T Output c i 5 0 i 50 29g frequency amp 50 r SSS 1 6 seer mpm PROS 100 i 120
198. eresis width 0 to 30 Hz can be set C01 to C04 Jogging operation Can be operated using digital input signal or keypad Acceleration and deceleration time same duration used only for jogging can be set H54 Jogging frequency 0 00 to 400 0 Hz c20 Timer operation Operation starts and stops at the time set from keypad 1 cycle c21 Aulo restart after Restarts the inverter without stopping the motor after instantaneous power failure TF14 instantaneous power f failure Slip compensation IB Compensates for decrease In speed according t to the load enabling stable running P09 Current limit Keeps the current under the preset value F43 F44 8 9 ltem Detail specifications Ihurediori codes PID contrat PID control is possible using analog input signals J01 Inverse mode operation can be set using digital input signal IVS or the function code JO Select the control mode with J01 f Process commands Select the kind of remote process command with J02 E60 to E62 J02 E key operation Set frequency Hz Max frequency Hz x 100 96 Built in potentiometer E60 Voltage input terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC O to 100 E61 Current input terminal C4 4 to 20 mADC D to 100 E62 RS 485 communication Set frequency Hz Max frequency Hz x 100 402 8 Feedback signal Feedback signal can be
199. eripheral equipment options and electric wires for each inverter including supplied power voltage and applicable motor rating Table 6 1 Currents Flowing through Inverter power Applicable 230 V 460 V 380 V 50 Hz Z 230 V 200 V 460 V 380 V 60 Hz supply motor Input RMS current A DC link Braking resistor Input RMS current A DC link Braking resistor rating DC reactor DCR circuit current DC reactor DCR circuit current voltage HP bus current A bus current A A w DCR w o DCR w DCR w o DCR 1 8 0 51 0 55 1 1 1 1 0 62 0 67 z 1 4 0 85 0 92 1 7 1 8 1 0 1 1 k Three 1 2 1 5 L6 3 0 3 0 1 8 2 0 12 phase 2 8 3 0 5 0 5 3 3 43 7 1 6 230 V 2 52 5 6 9 0 9 5 6 3 6 9 3 6 3 7 6 8 3 12 3 13 2 93 10 1 3 5 5 12 7 13 9 20 6 22 2 15 6 17 0 41 1 2 0 81 0 85 1 6 1 7 0 99 1 0 0 74 0 85 1 7 1 7 0 91 1 0 0 8 Three 1 1 5 1 6 2 9 3 0 1 8 1 9 14 1 6 3 0 3 0 1 7 2 0 11 phase 2 2 9 3 0 5 7 5 7 3 5 3 6 F 2 6 3 0 5 1 5 9 3 2 3 6 1 8 460 V 3 42 44 79 7 9 5 1 5 3 3 8 43 71 82 4 6 5 3 1 8 5 7 0 7 3 12 5 13 0 8 6 9 0 64 73 11 1 12 9 7 8 8 9 2 1 1 8 1 0 1 1 1 8 1 8 1 0 1 1 z 1 4 1 8 1 9 3 16 2 1 8 1 9 z xd 1 2 3 1 3 4 5 0 5 4 3 13 4 0 82 230 1 5 8 6 3 9 1 9 7 5 8 6 3 14 2 10 5 11 3 15 5 16 4 10 5 11 3 14 3 15 8 17 0 234 24 8 15 8 17 0 17
200. erload early warning OL and low level current detection DL a c z O a O Z Q O Og m Q m Low level current detection IDL Function code data 41 This signal is turned ON when the output current drops below the operation level specified by function code E34 and stays in this status for the duration specified by function code E35 on delay timer If the output current exceeds the sum of the current level of operation and 5 of the rated current of the inverter then this signal 1s turned OFF Use this signal to indicate 0A output current due to a broken output wire zero motor torque or any such factor undetectable by the inverter alarm facilities Function codes E34 and E35 are effective not only for the low level current detection IDL but often also for the overload early warning OL and current detection ID m Alarm relay contact output for any fault ALM Function code data 99 Note This signal is turned ON if the protection facility is activated so that the inverter enters Alarm mode In a system which monitors inverter alarm information through 30A B C relay contacts make sure that function code data of E20 or E27 is set to 99 Frequency Detection FDT Detection level Specifies an operating level for the set frequency detection signal The hysteresis frequency band between detection and release levels is 1 0 Hz Data setting range 0 0 to 400 0 Hz Output
201. erter output current approaches a sinusoidal waveform and the quieter the motor becomes Related function code F26 Coast to stop If the inverter stops its output when the motor is running the motor will coast to a stop due to inertial force Communications link function A feature to control an inverter from external equipment serially linked to the inverter such as a PC or PLC Related function code H30 Constant feeding rate time Time required for an object to move in a constant distance previously defined The faster speed the shorter time and vise versa This facility may be applied to a chemical process that determines a processing time of materials as the speed such as heating cooling drying or doping in some constant speed machinery Related function codes E39 and E50 Constant output load A constant output load is characterized by 1 The required torque is in inverse proportion to the load r min 2 An essentially constant power requirement Related function code F37 Applications Machine tool spindles Required torque N m Required power HP Required power Required torque o Rotating speed of load machine G 2 Constant torque load A constant torque load is characterized by 1 A requirement for an essentially constant torque regardless of the r min 2 A power requirement proportion to the r min Related function code F37 Applications Conveyors elevators an
202. et the width of the jump frequency band Data setting range 0 0 to 30 0 Hz Setting to 0 0 results in no jump band C05 to C11 Multistep Frequency Settings 1 to 7 These function codes set frequencies required for driving the motor at frequencies 1 to 7 Data setting range 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Turning terminal commands SS1 SS2 and SS4 ON OFF selectively switches the set frequency of the inverter in 7 steps For details of the terminal function assignment refer to the descriptions for function codes E01 to E03 Command Assignment to Terminals X1 to X3 For the multistep frequency driving refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Generator 9 2 Details of Function Codes Jogging Frequency Sets the frequency for jogging operations Data setting range 0 00 to 400 00 Hz For details on jogging operations refer to the descriptions for function codes E01 to E03 Command Assignment to Terminals X1 to X3 C21 Timer Operation Enables or disables timer operation If it is enabled entering a run command will run the inverter to drive the motor for the period preset to the timer 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Pressing the 9 key during the timer countdown cancels the timer operation If the timer has counted down to zero 0 pressing the amp 9 key will not start the inverter to drive the motor even with C21 being set to 1 Timer operation can be started by turning ON the ter
203. exe vow xoeqpob ve fuic Qld jonuos qu Uomesedo asunAu ig News CD A anpa xoeqpeaa Old BWL uonenueunjin tou Old SOF Po Fanai eui oeubaquj jotos did OF ae p Wem Or Wioeounuxeos ma MUN ump 100009 aid POR zd i UBIO 9004 Old ae So ct pate tls x i T L 4 t Old l puewwog 90014 Old JILOLI ec Xs C OO O O C ix z i uang N47 t 10 swai Nm Fig o sjusuoduio ELN ey 0 i L je l pue jgibatui hd Wings OQ faa vormd 0 gt pusi Emm qai rss pec mid os p Cn ibm Cia PRH Anba moway 1 Od unna moa vea daanin PRES v03u07 Qld Masi J pus Oriol A aro _ Say Cum CD srenog wr XD KAP Kauanbal res 0 seg ules Jp uipiasag i o 105 tanbaid p T I oaa dun Gon denny la MOT 00 z Auanbasg L S o C Go Edar s fausnbaj4 Coat LE LOTI OED ew r mua GED idandid Old Kau amp nbai4 O i i Ch aur ns xi ix VOIP TY cuoqeomunuugo duin i an ed s Aqu uta mam E189 m tonuo dms EUONEIUNUWOJ Old PoR pees kai Figure 4 7 PID Frequency Command Generator 4 16 4 8 PID Frequency Command Generator The block diagram shown in Figure 4 7 shows the PID frequency command generator that becomes active when the PID control is enabled JO1 1 or 2 The logic shown generates the final frequency command according to the PID process command given by various means of setting and feedback or frequency settings as a speed
204. f lower than 50 C 120 F The rated current is factored by a correction coefficient of 0 85 as the MCCBs and GFCIs original rated current is specified when using them in an ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F or lower Select an MCCB and or GFCI suitable for the actual short circuit breaking capacity needed for your power systems For the selection of the MC type it is assumed that the 600V HIV allowable ambient temperature 75 C 167 F wires for the power input output of the inverter are used If an MC type for another class of wires is selected the wire size suitable for the terminal size of both the inverter and the MC type should be taken into account m m O zi z 9 U m D T T r m o c T m z Use GFCIs with overcurrent protection To protect your power systems from secondary accidents caused by the broken inverter use an MCCB and or GFCI with the rated current listed 1n the above table Do not use an MCCB or GFCI with a rating higher than that listed Notes 1 A box B in the above table replace S or E depending on enclosure 2 Values in parentheses in the above table denote rated currents for the European version 6 9 Table 6 6 lists the relationship between the rated leakage current sensitivity of GFCIs with overcurrent protection and wiring length of the inverter output circuits Note that the sensitivity levels listed in the table are estimated values based on the result
205. f protecting the motor E34 E35 Stall prevention Operates when instantaneous overcurrent limiting is active Instantaneous overcurrent limiting Operates if the inverter s output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limit level avoiding tripping of the inverter during constant speed operation or during acceleration H12 External alarm input Stops the inverter output with an alarm through the digital input signal THR Yes E01 to E03 E98 E99 Alarm relay output for any fault The inverter outputs a relay contact signal when the inverter issues an alarm and stops the inverter output lt Alarm Reset gt g The alarm stop state is reset by pressing the CJ key or by the digital input signal RST lt Saving the alarm history and detailed data gt The information on the previous 4 alarms can be saved and displayed 8 35 Yes E20 E27 E01 to E03 E98 E99 Not applicable o UU m Q I S d o Z 27 Memory error Description The inverter checks memory data after power on and when the data is written If a memory error is detected the inverter stops LED monitor displays Alarm output 30A B C Related function code Remote keypad communications error The inverter stops by detecting a communication error between the inverter and the remote keypad option during operation from the remote keypad Yes This
206. f the damage occurs several months after commissioning the inverter Therefore there seems to be little probability of occurrence of motor insulation damage after a lapse of several months of commissioning 2 Incase of an existing motor driven using a newly installed 460 V class inverter We recommend suppressing the surge voltages with the method of Section C 3 App D Inverter Generating Loss The table below lists the inverter generating loss Generating loss W Power Applicable supply RS Inverter type Low carrier High carrier voltage HP frequency frequency 2 kHz 15 kHz 1 8 FRNFI2CIBI 2U 20 23 1 4 FRNF25CIBI 2U 27 32 1 2 FRNF50C1BI 2U 40 50 Three phase 1 FRN001CIBI 2U 60 77 230 V 2 FRN002CIMI 2U 91 110 3 FRN003CIMI 2U 128 165 5 FRN005CIMI 2U 203 260 1 2 FRNF50C1BI 4U 28 45 1 FRN001CIMI 4U 4 64 Three phase 2 FRN002CIMI 4U 63 103 460 V 3 FRN003CIII 4U 89 149 5 FRN005CIMI 4AU 135 235 1 8 FRNFI2CIBI 7U 21 24 1 4 FRNF25CIB 7U 29 34 Single 1 2 FRNF50C1IBI 7U 41 51 phase 230 V 1 FRN00ICIMI 7U 64 80 2 FRN002CIMI 7U 101 129 3 FRN003CIM 7U 143 180 Notes 1 A box Bl in the above table replaces S or E depending on enclosure App E Conversion from SI Units App E Conversion from SI Units All expressions given in Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES are based on SI units International Metric System of
207. ffective for not only the motor overload early warning OL Nolo but also the current detection ID and low level current detection IDL m Retry in operation TRY Function code data 26 This signal is turned ON when the retry facility specified by function codes H04 number of retries and H05 retry interval is being activated LL Refer to function codes H04 and H05 for details of the output timing and number of retries 9 2 Details of Function Codes m Lifetime alarm LIFE Function code data 30 This signal is turned ON when it is judged that the service life of any of capacitors capacitor in the DC link bus and electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards and cooling fan has expired The judgement level for service life are as follows This information can be checked in Menu 5 Maintenance information of Programming mode Parts Judgement level for service life Capacitor in the DC link Capacitance Max 85 of factory default bus Capacitor s on the Accumulated run time 61 000 hours or more printed circuit boards Cooling fan Accumulated run time 61 000 hours or more 2 to 5 HP models Based on the assumption that the inverter runs in an ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F This facility provides tentative information for service life of the parts If this signal is issued check the service life of these parts in your system according to the maintenance procedure to
208. flows the 15 Hd alarm will be activated after approx 13 HR minutes x 3 10 Changes with F12 The thermal time constant includes the time interval from the time when actual ERN Bias current flowing into the motor exceeds H g the allowable continuous current 100 BL F12 5 of the rated current to the time when 0 PEE F12 0 5 0 50 100 150 200 the current reaches 150 of the rated Actual output current Overload detection current x 100 current Therefore the actual time when the alarm is issued will be earlier than Typical operational characteristics of electronic the time specified by F12 thermal motor overload protection Note When an inverter drives the motor with a very frequent running stopping operation the loaded current to the motor may fluctuate largely and enters the short time rated current range 100 or more of the motor repeatedly This may cause an abnormal operation of the electronic thermal motor overload protection e g for an externally powered forced ventilation fan To prevent such a problem calculate the equivalent RMS current and keep the loaded current within the motor rated current Refer to Chapter 7 Section 7 1 3 4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor Restart Mode after Instantaneous Power Failure Selects the action of the inverter to be Data for F14 Function followed when an instantaneous power failure occurs m c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Trip immediately
209. for jogging The JOG appears on the LED monitor To return the inverter from the ready to jog state to the usual running state you need to press 69 t keys simultaneously Using the external input signal command JOG also allows the transition between the ready to jog state and usual running state LL Refer to function codes E01 to E03 in Chapter 9 Section 9 2 2 E codes Extension terminal functions for details During jogging the jogging frequency C20 and acceleration deceleration time for jogging H54 will apply They are exclusively prepared for jogging and required to be set up individually When jogging the motor from the keypad the inverter will only run while the uy key is held down and contrarily the moment the Guy key is released the inverter will decelerate and stop the motor Cnote The transition E9 J keys between the ready to jog state and usual running state is C enabled only when the inverter is not in operation O U m O Z C D z 4 I m A m lt gt ju 3 7 3 3 Programming Mode Pressing the e key in Running mode switches the inverter to Programming mode This mode provides the following functions which can be easily selected with the menu driven system 1 Data setting Menu 1 2 Data checking Menu 2 3 Drive monitoring Menu 3 4 TO checking Menu 4 5 Maintenance information Menu 5 6 Alarm information Menu 6 7 Data copying Menu 7
210. from 0 001 to 9 999 is displayed the display increases by 0 001 per startup and when any number from 10 00 to 65 53 is displayed the display increases by 0 01 every 10 startups No of RS 485 errors Shows the total number of times RS 485 communications error has occurred after the power is turned ON Once the number of errors exceeds 9 999 the display count returns to 0 RS 485 error contents Shows the latest error that has occurred with RS 485 communications in hexadecimal format Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual ROM version of inverter Shows the ROM version of the inverter as a 4 digit display ROM version of keypad Shows the ROM version of the keypad as a 4 digit display For remote keypad only 3 21 O Q m S O z c Ur Z I m A m lt gt oO Power ON lt ai Running mode A a2 AE Programming gt mode t i a i List of maintenance Maintenance info i ec items i FTN T e 0190 amp V te on i S CHE i ry J Bt Accumulated run time i RH hi faa merei oeer eiei amp j icd fo Ir 1 oo S 50i Ss DC link circuit voltage E I foe A i feu i A 1 5 5 M iS Keypad ROM version The part in the dotted line box is applicable only when a remote keypad is set up for operation Figure 3 9 Status T
211. g a stand alone gain or bias without changing any reference points the setting procedure for the function codes is the same as that of Fuji conventional inverter models ul Ki ote DC Braking Start frequency DC Braking Braking level Refer to H95 DC Braking Braking time These function codes specify the parameters for DC braking a mechanism to pre vent the motor from coasting due to the inertia of moving loads while it is decelerating to a stop During a decelerated stop cycle i e when any Run command OFF has been issued or the set frequency has dropped below the stop frequency DC braking is invoked as soon as the output frequency has reached the start frequency F20 for DC braking Set function codes F20 for the start frequency F21 for the braking level and F22 for the braking time Optionally you can also select the quick response DC braking with H95 m Start frequency F20 Set the frequency with which to start DC braking Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Chote Set function code F20 to a frequency that approximately equals the CERE slip compensated frequency of the motor If you set it to an extremely high frequency the inverter will be unstable and in some cases the overvoltage protective function may work m Braking level F21 Set the output current level to be applied when DC braking is activated Set the function code data assuming the rated output current of the inverter as 100 with 1 96 resoluti
212. g procedure Disable data protection Press 69 and QO keys or 69 and O keys simultaneously to change data from 1 to 0 or from 0 Enable data protection to 1 respectively Press the G5 key to save the change Frequency Command 1 Refer to C30 Selects the devices to set the set frequency 1 for driving the motor Data for F01 Function Enable and V keys on the built in keypad Refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD Enable the voltage input to terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC maximum output frequency obtained at 10 VDC Enable the current input to terminal C1 4 to 20 mA maximum output frequency obtained at 20 mA Enable the sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 See the two items listed above for the setting range and maximum frequencies Note If the sum exceeds the maximum output frequency the maximum output frequency will apply Enable the built in potentiometer POT Maximum frequency obtained at full scale of the POT There are other frequency setting means such as the communications facility multistep frequency and etc with higher priority than that of F01 Refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Generator for more details z a 9 2 Details of Function Codes Cin For frequency settings by terminals 12 voltage and C1 current and by the SC built in potentiometer setting the gain and bias changes
213. g resistor standard type available as option Max voltage V Min voltage V 3 phase average voltage V If this value is 2 to 3 96 use an AC reactor ACR 10 Making FRENIC Mini conform to category TYPEI of the UL Standard or NEMA1 requires an optional NEMA kit Note that the TYPE1 listed FRENIC Mini should be used in the ambient temperature range from 10 to 40 C 14 to 104 F 9 Interphase voltage unbalance 96 x67 Refer to IEC 61800 3 5 2 3 8 1 Standard Models 8 1 3 Single phase 230 V Power supply voltage Single phase 230 V Type PRN CIS 7U PZ F25 F50 001 __ 002 Applicable motor rating HP 1 8 1 4 1 2 1 2 4 Rated capacity kVA 2103 0 57 I I Lo 3 0 4 1 mt il T yp i a th Rated voltage V Three phase 200 V 50 Hz 200 V 220 V 230 V 60 Hz 0 8 1 5 3 0 5 0 8 0 11 0 0 7 1 4 2 5 4 2 7 0 10 0 g Rated current A Output Ratin as 50 of rate urrent ft 1 Overload capability 150 of rated output current for l min 200 of rated output current for 0 5 s Rated frequency Hz 50 60 Hz Single phase 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz Voltage and frequency Voltage 10 to 10 94 variations Frequency 5 to 5 Momentary voltage dip When the input voltage is 165 V or more the inverter may keep running capability s Even if it drops below 165 V the inverter may keep running for 15 ms w DCR I I 2 0 3 6 4 11 6
214. grounding wiring These noise prevention measures can avoid most noise problems A 4 App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise 2 Implementation of noise prevention measures There are two types of noise prevention measures one for noise propagation routes and the other for noise receiving sides that are affected by noise The basic measures for lessening the effect of noise at the receiving side include Separating the main circuit wiring from the control circuit wiring avoiding noise effect The basic measures for lessening the effect of noise at the generating side include 1 Inserting a noise filter that reduces the noise level 2 Applying a metal conduit pipe or metal control panel that will confine noise and 3 Applying an insulated transformer for the power supply that cuts off the noise propagation route Table A 1 lists the noise prevention measures their goals and propagation routes Table A 1 Noise Prevention Measures Goal of noise prevention 1 Conduction route measures Noise prevention method from control circuit distance Avoid parallel and Wiri d bundled wiring ring an installation Uss appropriate grounding Use shielded wire and twisted shielded wire Use shielded cable in main circuit Use metal conduit pipe Y Y Appropriate arrangement Control of devices in panel panel Metal control panel Anti noise Line filter device Insulation transformer
215. hase voltage unbalance 96 x67 Refer to IEC 61800 3 5 2 3 8 2 Models Available on Order 8 2 1 2 Three phase 460 V Power supply voltage Three phase 460 V Type FRN CIE 4U Applicable motor rating HP F50 001 1 8 l 2 Rated capacity kVA Rated voltage V Rated current A Overload capability Output Ratings Rated frequency Hz Phases voltage frequency L1 19 28 4 68 Three phase 380 400 415 V 50 Hz 380 400 440 460 V 60 Hz 1 5 2 5 33 5 9 0 150 of rated output current for min 200 of rated output current for 0 5 s 50 60 Hz Fhree phase 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz Voltage and frequency variations Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less Frequency 5 to 5 Jas When the input voltage is 300 V or more the inverter may keep Momentary voltage dip gt tet d 2 2 ADIT running Even if it drops below 300 V the inverter may keep capability PS E abo 4 running for 15 ms wi DCR 0 85 s w o DCR 1 7 si oh u 7 2 2 i L6 ai 73 3 1 Rated current A Required power supply capacity k VA Torque 7 100 0 6 1 1 Torque 8 150 i9 m D Starting frequency 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Braking time 0 0 to 30 0 s DC injection braking z ue Braking level 0 to 100 of rated current Enclosure 1EC60529 Cooling method Weight lbs
216. he deviation in the P control An increase in gain speeds up response an excessive gain can cause vibration and a decrease in gain delays response m Integration time J04 Sets the integration time for the PID processor Data setting range 0 0 to 3600 0 sec I Integral control The PID operation having the proportional relationship of deviation Deviation between the commanded frequency E rate Hz s and control amounts is called Time the I control The I control outputs the re control amount proportional to the Aniount integral amount of the deviation i Therefore it is effective for making the Time feedback value consistent with the commanded one such as frequency For the system whose deviation of response rapidly changes however this control cannot make the system react quickly The effectiveness of I control is expressed by a parameter of integration time The longer the integration time the slower the response The reaction force of the system to an external stimulus force becomes weak The shorter integration time the faster response Setting too short integration time however makes the system tend to oscillate 9 66 9 2 Details of Function Codes m Differentiation time J05 Sets the differentiation time for the PID processor Data setting range 0 00 to 600 00 sec D Derivative control The PID operation having the Deviation proportional relationshi
217. he part rectifies the input AC power to charge the DC link bus capacitor s as the DC power to be inverted to AC power Deceleration time Period during which an inverter slows its output frequency down from the maximum to 0 Hz Related function codes F03 F08 E11 and H54 Digital input Input signals given to the programmable input terminals or the programmable input terminals themselves A command assigned to the digital input is called the terminal command to control the inverter externally Refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 4 1 functions Terminal Electronic thermal overload protection Electronic thermal overload protection to issue an early warning of the motor overheating to safeguard a motor An inverter calculates the motor overheat condition based on the internal data given by function code P99 about the properties of the motor and the driving conditions such as the drive current voltage and frequency External potentiometer A potentiometer optional that is used to set frequencies as well as built in one Fan stop operation A mode of control in which the cooling fan is shut down if the internal temperature in the inverter is low and when no operation command is issued Related function code H06 Frequency accuracy stability The percentage of variations in output frequency to a predefined maximum frequency Frequency limiter Frequency limiter used inside the inverter to control the internal dri
218. he table below shows the main circuit terminal arrangements screw sizes and tightening torque Note that the terminal arrangements differ according to the inverter types Two terminals designed for grounding shown as the symbol in Figures A to D make no distinction between a power supply source Main circuit terminals a primary circuit and a motor a secondary circuit Table 8 1 Main Circuit Terminal Arrangements Screw Sizes and Tightening Torque Power ee supply sae Inverter type Refer to voltage HP 1 8 FRNFI2CIB 2U 1 4 FRNF25CIB 2U Figure A 1 2 FRNF50CIB 2U Three phase 1 FRN001CIB 2U 230V 2 FRN002CIB 2U 3 FRN003CIBI 2U 5 FRN005CIMB 2U 1 2 FRNF50CIB 4U Figure B 1 FRN001CIB 4U Three phase 2 FRN002CIBI 4U 460 V 3 FRN003CIB 4U 5 FRNO005CIBI 4U 1 8 FRNFI2CIB 7U 1 4 FRNF25CIB 7U Figure C Single 1 2 FRNF50CIB 7U phase 230V 1 FRN001CIBI 7U 2 FRN002CIB 7U Figure D 3 FRN003CIB 7U Figure A e c a e A k A A du is n Screw size M 3 5 Screw size M 3 5 pB P1 J PLIL NC aT Iob elTe ele L1 L L2N U v_ w Screw size M 4 Figure D e ec Notes 1 A box Bl in the above table replaces S or E depending on enclosure Screw size M 3 5 Tightening torque 9 7 b in 1 2 N m M 4 0 14 6 Ib in 1 8 N m 8 4 Terminal Specifications 8 4 3 2 Control circuit terminal The diagram and
219. however it may vary depending on the operating system running on the PC and or its processing status m Response latency time yO9 Sets the latency time from the end of receiving a query sent from the host such as the PC or PLC to the start of sending the response This function allows using equipment whose response time is slow for a network requiring quick response Data setting range 0 00 to 1 00 sec Master Query Inverter T1 Response T1 Latency time a where a is the processing time of the inverter may vary depending upon the processing status and the run command in the inverter LL Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual Setting for FRENIC Loader Set the correct data to the function code depending on the performance and or configuration of the PC and protocol converter such as RS 485 RS 232C Note that some protocol converters monitor the communications status and switch the send receive of transmission data by timer m Protocol selection y10 Selects the communications protocol Data for y10 Protocol Setting for FRENIC Loader Select the Modbus RTU loader protocol y10 1 au FRENIC Loader Fuji general purpose inverter y99 9 2 Details of Function Codes Link Function for Supporting Data Input This function code switches an RS 485 communications link with FRENIC Loader Enabling the RS 485 communications link allows the inverter to receive frequency and
220. ia RS 485 communication communication option option 9 10 9 1 Function Code Tables The table below lists the factory settings of Fuji s standard torque boost Nominal rated current of Fuji standard motor and Nominal rated capacity of Fuji standard motor in the Default setting column of the above tables Table 9 1 Fuji Standard Motor Parameters Fuji s Nominal rated standard Nominal rated current of capacity of Fuji torque Fuji standard motor A standard motor 0 Applicable Boast SV a motor Function codes 1 Invert MdL rating a F11 E34 and P03 HP Function ue Function code code Shipping destination P02 F09 version Asia EU Japan 1 8 FRNF12CIB 2U 8 4 0 62 0 68 0 61 0 1 1 4 FRNF25CIB 2U 8 4 1 18 1 30 1 16 0 2 1 2 FRNF50CIB 2U 7 1 2 10 2 30 2 13 0 4 Three phase 1 FRNO001CIN 2U 6 8 3 29 3 60 3 36 0 75 230 V 2 FRN002CIB 2U 6 8 5 55 6 10 5 87 1 5 3 FRNO03C1m 2U 6 8 8 39 9 20 8 80 2 2 5 FRNOOS5C1m 2U 5 5 13 67 15 00 14 38 3 7 1 2 FRNF50CIB 4U 7 1 1 09 1 15 1 07 0 4 1 FRN001CIB 4U 6 8 1 71 1 80 1 68 0 75 Three phase 2 FRN002CINB 4U 6 8 3 04 3 05 2 94 1 5 460 V n 3 FRNO03C1m 4U 6 8 4 54 4 60 4 40 2 2 lt 5 FRNOOSC1m 4U 5 5 7 43 7 50 7 20 3 7 g o 1 8 FRNFI2CIB 7U 8 4 0 62 0 68 0 61 0 1 S 1 4 FRNF25CIB 7U 8 4 1 18 1 30 1 16 0 2 S m Single 1 2 FRNFSOCIN 7U 7 1 2 10 2 30
221. idering the reduction gear efficiency Ji kgesm Jz kg m Ne fom HHHH Motor shaft moment Moment of inertia of inertia converted to motor shaft Figure 7 9 Load Model Including Reduction gear 3 Calculation of the deceleration time In a load system shown in Figure 7 9 the time needed to stop the motor rotating at a speed of Ny r min is calculated with the following equation Jit Joe 2m 0 N torc zs s o x s 7 11 TM 7 TLeN where J Motor shaft moment of inertia kg m Jz Load shaft moment of inertia converted to motor shaft kg m tw Minimum motor output torque in braking or decelerating motor N m tL Maximum load torque converted to motor shaft N m na Reduction gear efficiency In the above equation generally output torque ty is negative and load torque Tt is positive So deceleration time becomes shorter 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters 7 1 3 3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor If the inverter brakes the motor the kinetic energy of mechanical load is converted to electric energy to be regenerated into the inverter circuit This regenerative energy is often consumed in so called braking resistors as heat The following explains the braking resistor rating 1 Calculation of regenerative energy In the inverter operation one of the regenerative energy sources is the kinetic energy that is generated at the time an object is moved by an inertial force Kinetic energ
222. ility at low speed to about a half or under at 1 Hz compared with that of conventional inverters Refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 7 Drive Command Controller for details FRENIG Mini l i Motor speed r min AA AA A A rA ATLA MA PAA ANA AA RNA 0 aa Conventional Fuji inverter TAT i LLLTLILTUTLTEITLTLTLPLIL IT LLTI I LILILILILIA HWY AV YT I n 1 ANNAA TATATATA WV YY YL yy Figure 1 5 Example of Instability Characteristics Default functions for fans and pumps Automatic energy saving function provided as standard To minimize the total loss motor loss plus inverter loss rather than just the motor loss as in the predecessor models FRENIC Mini saves even more power when used with fans or pumps LL Refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 7 Drive Command Controller for details Required power P 110 100 When damper or valve is used O 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Air or liquid flow rate Q 961 Energy savings vary depending on the motor characteristics Figure 1 6 Example of Energy Savings PID control function Permits motor operation while controlling temperature pressure or flow rate without using an external device such as a temperature regulator Refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 8 PID Frequency Command Generator for details Cooling fan ON OFF control function The inverter s cooling fan can be turned off while the fan or pump is stopped for noise reducti
223. ils fole Depending on the discharging capability margin of a braking resistor the electronic ALY thermal function may operate and issue the overheat alarm gM even if the actual temperature of the resistor is lower than that specified Check braking resistor performance again and review the data setting of function codes F50 and F51 9 28 9 2 Details of Function Codes The following tables list the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the FRENIC Mini series of inverters These values are determined by inverter model and specifications built in or external type of braking resistors B Built in braking resistor Continuous braking Repetitive braking Power Ca Braking torque 100 _ Period 100 sec or less supply Inverter type pacity Discharging Braking Allowable Duty voltage W capability time average loss cycle kWs s kW ED FRNO02C1 2U FRNO03C1 2U FRNO05CIN 2U FRN002C1B 4U FRN003CIB 4U FRNO05CIB 4U Note 1 A box WW in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure a c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo B External braking resistor Standard Models The braking resistor is protected from overheating by a thermal relay incorporated in the braking resistor Assign external thermal relay tripped THR to one of the inverter s digital input terminals X1 X2 X3 FWD and REV and connec
224. imary resistance of the motor in the low frequency zone Data setting range 0 0 to 20 0 The set voltage at base frequency for F05 is 100 Cnote Set an appropriate torque boost rate that will keep the starting torque of the motor within the voltage level in the low frequency zone Setting an excessive torque boost rate may result in over excitation or overheat of the motor during no load operation The F09 data setting is effective for auto torque boost auto energy saving operations specified by function code F37 being set to 0 1 3 or 4 Variable torque characteristics F37 0 Constant torque characteristics F37 1 Output voltage V utput voltag Output voltage V 100 Rated voltage 100 Torque boost 0 Output Torque Base frequency boost 0 Output frequency Base frequency frequency 9 17 c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Electronic Thermal Overload for motor protection Select motor characteristics Electronic Thermal Overload Overload detection level Electronic Thermal Overload Thermal time constant F10 through F12 set the thermal characteristics of the motor for its electronic thermal overload protection that is used to detect overload conditions of the motor inside the inverter f Note Thermal characteristics of the motor specified by F10 and F12 are also used for the overload early warning Even if you need only the overload early warning set these chara
225. ime List of alarm codes an alarm occurred Figure 3 11 Status Transition of Alarm Mode 3 4 4 Releasing the alarm and transferring the inverter to Running mode Remove the cause of the alarm and press the key to release the alarm and return to Running mode The 5 key is enabled only when the alarm code is displayed 3 4 2 Displaying the alarm history Itis possible to display the most recent 3 alarm codes in addition to the one currently displayed Previous alarm codes can be displayed by pressing N amp keys while the current alarm code is displayed 3 26 3 4 Alarm Mode 3 4 3 Displaying the running information when an alarm occurs If an alarm occurs you may check various running status information output frequency and output em key when the alarm code is displayed The item number and data for ez current etc by pressing the each running information is displayed in alternation Further you can switch between the various running information using J amp keys Detailed running information is the same as for Menu 6 Alarm information in Programming mode Refer to Table 3 13 in Section 3 3 6 Reading alarm information Pressing the S key while the running information is displayed returns the display to the alarm codes Pressing the e key continuously a number of times while the running information is displayed after removing the cause of the alarm will cause the inverter to transit to the alarm
226. ing or vibration dampening rubber is recommended Use the inverter s jump frequency control feature to skip the resonance frequency zone s Noise When an inverter is used with a general purpose motor the motor noise level is higher than that with a commercial power supply To reduce noise raise carrier frequency of the inverter Operation at 60 Hz or higher can also result in higher noise level In running special motors High speed motors If the set frequency is set to 120 Hz or more to drive a high speed motor test run the combination of the inverter and motor beforehand to check for safe operation Explosion proof motors When driving an explosion proof motor with an inverter use a combination of a motor and an inverter that has been approved in advance Submersible motors and pumps These motors have a larger rated current than general purpose motors Select an inverter whose rated output current is greater than that of the motor These motors differ from general purpose motors in thermal characteristics Set a low value in the thermal time constant of the motor when setting the electronic thermal overload protection Brake motors For motors equipped with parallel connected brakes their braking power must be supplied from the primary circuit If the brake power is connected to the inverter s power output circuit by mistake the brake will not work Do not use inverters for driving motor
227. inverter The output voltage will vary in line with any variance in input voltage If the data is set to anything other than 0 the inverter automatically keeps the output voltage constant in line with the setting When any of the automatic torque boost settings automatic energy saving or slip compensation is active the voltage settings should be equal to the rating of the motor If F05 is set to match the rated voltage of the motor the motor efficiency will be Note improved better than that it is set to 0 Therefore when brakes are applied to the motor energy loss decreases and the motor regenerates larger braking energy which can easily activate the overvoltage protection function Note that the allowable power consumption capacity of the inverter for braking energy is limited by the specifications If the overvoltage protection function is activated it may be necessary to increase deceleration time or use an external braking resistor N t Data for F05 Function Output voltage in line with variance in input voltage The AVR is disabled AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator 80 to 240 V Output AVR controlled voltage for 230 V class motors 160 to 500 V Output AVR controlled voltage for 460 V class motors 0 m Non linear V f pattern for frequency H50 Sets the non linear V f pattern for frequency component Data setting range 0 0 to 400 0 Hz Setting 0 0 to H50 disables the non linear V f pattern
228. inverter records and displays the accumulated running time of the inverter itself the printed circuit board and cooling fan Alarm history for up to 4 latest alarms The inverter records detailed information for up to 4 alarms that occurred most recently which can also be displayed on the LED Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 3 6 Reading alarm information Lifetime forecast signal via transistor output This signal is output when the reservoir capacitor in the DC link bus the electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit board or the cooling fans have been nearing the end of their service life LL Refer to function code E20 in Chapter 9 Section 9 2 2 E codes Extension terminal functions for details Interface for peripheral devices and comprehensive protective functions All models are equipped with an inrush current suppression circuit FRENIC Mini series features an inrush current suppression circuit as standard in all models to reduce the cost of peripheral devices such as input magnetic contactor Terminals for a DC reactor DCR provided as standard Terminals for connection of a DCR which are necessary for suppressing harmonics are provided as standard in all models Input output phase loss protective function FRENIC Mini series can detect output phase loss at all times during starting and running This feature assists you for keeping operation of your system stable Switchable sink source The input output mode sin
229. inverter to other destination inverters If the specifications of the source inverter and destination inverter differ from each other some data may not be copied to ensure safe operation of your power system Whether data will be copied or not is detailed with the following symbols in the Data copy column ofthe function code tables given below Y Will be copied unconditionally Y1 Will not be copied if the rated capacity differs from the source inverter Y2 Will not be copied if the rated input voltage differs from the source inverter N Will not be copied If necessary manually set the function code data that cannot be copied c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Using negative logic for programmable l O terminals The negative logic signaling system can be used for the digital input and output terminals by setting the function codes specifying the properties for those terminals Negative logic refers to inverted ON OFF logical value 1 true 0 false state of input or output signal An ON active signal the function takes effect for the ON signal in the normal logic system is functionally equivalent to OFF active signal the function takes effect for the OFF signal in the negative logic system To set the negative logic system for an I O signal terminal display data of 1000s by adding 1000 to the data for the normal logic in the corresponding function code and then press the amp key For example if a coast to stop c
230. ion 1 With the menu displayed use N Q keys to select Drive monitoring 2 Press the eS key to display the desired code in the monitoring items list e g 7 77 3 Use 79 G2 keys to select the desired monitoring item then press the eS key The running status information for the selected item will appear f 4 Press the amp S key to return to the monitoring items list Press the key again to return to the y Key 8 y Key ag menu Tip Ifthe menu cannot switch to any other one set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode 3 15 O Q m S O z c a Z I m A m lt gt oO Displaying running status To display the running status in hexadecimal format each state has been assigned to bit 0 to 15 as listed in Table 3 6 Table 3 7 shows the relationship between each of the status assignments and the LED monitor display Table 3 8 gives the conversion table from 4 bit binary to hexadecimal Table 3 6 Running Status Bit Allocation Notation Content 1 when function code data is being written Always 0 Always 0 1 when communications is effective when run commands and set frequencies commands are issued via communications 1 when an alarm has occurred 1 during deceleration 1 during acceleration 1 during current limitation 1 under voltage control Always 0 1 when DC link bus voltage has increased up to the specified level 0
231. is 1 in the negative logic system Digital output circuit specification Control circuit Photocoupler Current E Y D Operation ON level voltage OFF level fp St to soy Maximum load current at ON miei Leakage current at OFF Figure 8 5 shows examples of connection between the control circuit and a PLC fNote Check the polarity of an external power input To connect a control relay connect a surge absorbing diode across the coil of the relay Transistor output common Common for transistor output signal Isolated from terminals CM and 11 a U m Q I S o Z 77 Related Functions function codes W Connecting Programmable Controller PLC to Terminal Y1 Figure 8 5 shows two examples of circuit connection between the transistor output of the inverter s control circuit and a PLC In example a the input circuit of the PLC serves as the sink for the control circuit whereas in example b it serves as the source for the control circuit lt Control circuit gt lt Control circuit gt Serves as Sink Transistor output Serves as Source a PLC serving as Sink b PLC serving as Source Figure 8 5 Connecting PLC to Control Circuit Alarm relay 1 Outputs a contact signal SPDT when a output for any protective fu
232. issued during an instantaneous power failure the inverter exits from the state of waiting for restarting and enters Running mode If any run command is issued the inverter will start at the start frequency preset Power failure Power recovery Set value 4 Y V DC link Undervoltage bus voltage Time iw Synchronization Output frequency motor speed Acceleration time Auto restarting E wry Li on Set value 5 DC link oed bus voltage Time Output frequency motor speed Auto restarting 4 1 IPF ON Frequency Limiter High a c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Frequency Limiter Low Frequency limiter F15 limits the peak Output frequency of output frequency Frequency limiter Maximum F16 maintains the output frequency at frequency the bottom even if the set frequency is lower than the bottom Refer to the figure at the right High NR Data setting range 0 0 to 400 0 Hz limiter Low i limiter Set 0 gt 0 100 frequency Cnote Set the peak and bottom frequencies correctly otherwise the inverter may not Aa operate Maintain the following relationship between the limiters Peak frequency gt Bottom frequency Start frequency Stop frequency Bottom frequency Maximum frequency 9 21 Bias for frequency command 1 Refer to C50 C32 C34 C37 and C39 If you select any analog input for freq
233. istics 9 18 F11 Overload detection 0 00 Disable 0 01 A Y Y1 Nominal level 1 to 13596 of rated current allowable continuos Y2 raten load current of the inverter Fui 9 standard motor Fuji s standard torque boost Nominal rated current of Fuji standard motor and Nominal rated capacity of Fuji standard motor differ depending upon the rated input voltage and rated capacity Refer to Table 9 1 Fuji Standard Motor Parameters on page 9 11 AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator Note 1 For the three phase 230 V and single phase 230 V Note 2 For the three phase 460 V 9 1 Function Code Tables Change Code Name Data setting range nere Unit when Data Deis Refer ment copy setting to running F12 Thermal time constant 0 5 to 75 0 0 1 min Y 5 0 9 18 F14 Restart Mode after 0 Disable Trip immediately without restart Y 0 9 19 Instantaneous Power 4 Disable Trip without restart after recovery of Failure power 4 Enable Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for general load 5 Enable Restart at the start frequency for low inertia load F15 Frequency Limiter 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz Y Y 70 0 High 9 21 F16 Low 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz Y 0 0 F18 Bias for frequency 100 00 to 100 00 0 01 96 Y 0 00 9 22 command 1 F20 DC Braking 0 0 to 60 0 0 1 Hz a Y 0 0 Start frequency F21
234. it control is active then the logic automatically switches the output frequency to one of current limit control and controls inverter using the switched frequency The slip compensation facility adds frequency components calculated from the load based on the preset rated slip frequency inside the inverter to the frequency currently commanded The logic adjusts the error between the rated slip frequency of the motor currently under load and the preset frequency according to the set data of function code P09 that controls slip compensation gain for the motor The voltage processor determines the output voltage of the inverter The processor adjusts the output voltage to control the motor output torque UJ r Q A z gt D E S n ui E Q O z Az Q E O O If DC braking control is active the logic switches the voltage and frequency control components to ones determined by the DC braking block to feed the proper power to the motor for DC braking 4 15 4 8 PID Frequency Command Generator SIIEV P JO UONEIIUNWWOS G8p SH JO ENUEW sJesn al oj 49j93 sapo2 uomounj Payejas UOHEIUNWWOD aie sapoo S ay 40jeJeuec puewwog Aguanbaly eA ug Lp anba 0 Jajay uieiGerp xoojq SIY Woy siaylp 9 60 ayy SAgoeul s joju09 Ald eui usuM seioN JOJesauag puewwoy AouanbaJ4 Lp anila 0 ajay Zz i9 euwe lt z euu lt aawo od urimg 293 pue 193 093 JO uasoyI ueeq seu uonouny wes ay ueuw Ajuoud s
235. itches AONO he operation source to the remote keypad so no function code setting is required For FRENIC loader however you need to set up function code H30 for some communications conditions although the dedicated protocol is used Az c z zZ Z 0 X pu O C 0 I Az o A co e Oo O c zZ S zi O z o U d O 5 1 5 1 1 Common specifications Items Specifications Protocol FGI BUS Modbus RTU FRENIC Loader Compliance Modicon Modbus RTU compliant only in RTU mode Fuji general purpose inverter protocol Dedicated protocol Not disclosed No of supporting stations Host device 1 Inverters up to 31 Electrical specifications EIA RS 485 Connection to RS 485 8 wire RJ 45 connector Synchronization Start Stop system Transmission mode Half duplex Transmission speed 2400 4800 9600 or 19200 bps Max transmission cable length 1 640 ft 500 m No of available station addresses 1 to31 1 to 247 1 to 255 Message frame format FGI BUS Modbus RTU FRENIC loader Frame synchronization Detection of no data transmission time for 3 byte period Detection SOH Start Of Header character Start code 96H detection Frame length 16 bytes fixed in normal transmission 8 or 12 bytes in high speed transmission Variable length Variable length Max transfer data Write 1 word Write
236. ivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity If a magnetic contactor MC is mounted in the inverter s secondary circuit for switching the motor to commercial power or for any other purpose Installing an MC ensure that both the inverter and the motor are completely stopped before m A NU you turn the MC on or off circui 1 i Do not connect a magnet contactor united with a surge killer to the inverter s secondary circuit eee D h i MC in the pri ircuit ff i i o not turn the magnetic contactor in the primary circuit on or o MA Installing an MC more than once an fone as an inverter failure ma result peripheral in the primary 4 i devices circuit If frequent starts or stops are required during motor operation use FWD REV signals or the RUN STOP key The electronic thermal overload protection function of the inverter can protect the motor The operation level and the motor type general purpose motor inverter motor should be set For high speed motors or water cooled motors set a small value for the thermal time constant and Protecting the protect the motor motor If you connect the motor thermal relay to the motor with a long wire a high frequency current may flow into the wiring stray capacitance This may cause the relay to trip at a current lower than the set value for the thermal relay If this happens lower the carrier frequency or use the output circuit filter OFL Discontinuance of power factor correcting
237. k source of the digital input terminals can be switched by means of an internal jumper switch No engineering change is required in other control devices including PLC Motor can be protected by a PTC thermistor The motor is protected by PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient thermistor which detects the motor s temperature and stops the inverter before the motor is overheated 1 6 1 1 Features Flexible through optionals Function code copy function The optional remote keypad includes a built in copy facility so you can copy function code data set in a source inverter and duplicate it into a destination inverter Inverter support loader software available The inverter support loader program Windows based which simplifies the setting of function codes is provided as an option LL Refer to Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS 485 COMMUNICATION OPTION for details Mounting on DIN rail Using the rail mounting base option the inverter can easily be mounted on a DIN rail 1 38 inch 35 mm wide Refer to Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT for details z 4 D O i e O d o z O T D m zZ 2 3 Easy replacement of older models with new ones Using the mounting adapter option makes it possible to mount the latest models without drilling any additional holes Refer to Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT for details Remote operation Using the optional RS 485 communication
238. l The default setting is normal logic that is Active ON To assign negative logic input to any input terminal set the function code to the value of 1000s shown in in the table below To keep explanations as simple as possible the examples shown below are all written for the normal logic system Data for E01 to E03 Terminal mom E98 and E99 erminal command assigne Command symbols Input signals SS1 SS2 and SS4 1000 ce 1002 Select multistep frequency 0 to 7 steps 4 1004 Select ACC DEC time RT1 6 1006 Enable 3 wire operation 2 steps HLD 7 1007 Coarse to a stop BX 8 1008 Reset alarm RST 9 1009 Enable external alarm trip THR 10 1010 Ready for jogging JOG 11 1011 Switch frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 19 1019 Enable write from keypad WE KP 20 1020 Cancel PID control Hz PID 21 1021 Switch normal inverse operation IVS 24 1024 Enable communications link LE RS 485 communication option 33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST 34 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD Run forward Short circuiting terminals 98 FWD and CM runs the motor forward FWD Opening them decelerates the motor to stop c Z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Run reverse Short circuiting terminals REV and CM runs the motor reverse Opening REV them decelerates the motor to stop No nega
239. l does not oscillate 9 2 Details of Function Codes Refining the system response waveforms is shown below 1 Suppressing overshoot Increase the data value of function code coniraled J04 integration time and decrease that Response for code J05 differentiation time 2 Quick stabilizing small overshoot allowable Decrease the data value of function code Controlled J03 gain and increase that for code JOS Response 5 differentiation time Natural at af 3 Suppressing oscillation longer than the integration time set by function code J04 Increase the data value set to function i Conirolled code J04 integration time Response Natural Time 4 Suppressing oscillation of approximately same period as the time set for function code J05 differentiation time Decrease the data value set for function Gontrolled code J05 differentiation time Response Decrease the data value set for function code J03 gain even if the Natural differentiation time is set at 0 sec Time m Feedback filter J06 Sets the time constant of the filter for PID feedback signals Data setting range 0 0 to 900 0 sec This setting is used to stabilize the PID control loop Setting too long a time constant makes the system response slow 9 69 oO m D P co S302 NOILONNA 9 2 7 y codes Link functions Mounting an RS 485 communications card o
240. l it is turned OFF This allows you to run the inverter in 3 Wire Operation Refer to the function code E01 in Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES for details If you do not assign a hold command HLD to any digital input terminals then the 2 Wire Operation using the FWD and REV command will be active Setting 0 zero for function code F02 allows you to operate the inverter using the amp n 69 key on the built in keypad for the run command while the FWD and REV commands determine direction of motor rotation The logic shown in the block diagram shows you that if the run command from the RuN key and either the FWD or REV command are given then the internal run command lt FWD gt or lt REV gt decoded internally by the logic turns ON S06 2 byte data for bit 15 through bit 0 can be manipulated the operation command by the communications link includes Bit 0 assigned to FWD Bit 1 assigned to REV Bits 13 and 14 programmable bits equivalent to the terminal inputs FWD and REV Inthe block diagram all of these are noted as operation commands The data setting for function code E98 to specify the terminal signal property for FWD and E99 for REV determine which bit value should be selected as the run command If bits 13 and 14 have the same setting to specify the property for FWD or REV the output of bit 13 14 processor logic will follow the truth table listed in Figure 4 2 Ifeither one of bits 13 a
241. lectronic thermal motor overload protection that detects an overload condition Data setting range 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the inverter n general set the rated current of the motor when driven at base frequency to F11 that 1s 1 0 to 1 1 multiple of the rated current of motor P03 To disable the electronic thermal motor overload protection set 0 00 to F11 9 18 9 2 Details of Function Codes m Thermal time constant F12 F12 specifies the thermal time constant of the motor The inverter uses the time constant as an operation period of the electronic thermal motor overload protection If 15096 of the overload detection current specified by F11 flows continuously the inverter activates the electronic thermal motor overload protection during the specified operation period For Fuji general purpose motors and other induction motors set 5 minutes factory default to F12 Data setting range 0 5 to 75 0 minutes in 0 1 minute increment Example When 5 0 5 minutes has been set to F12 Current operation time characteristics example As shown at the right if 150 current Operation time min of the operation level flows 20 a continuously for 5 minutes the motor Hs overload alarm will be activated alarm H code OL 1 If 120 current
242. les 6 7 to 6 9 in Chapter 6 Section 6 4 1 1 Braking resistors For detailed calculation refer to Section 7 1 3 3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor 3 The average loss that is calculated by dividing the discharge energy by the cyclic period must not exceed the average loss KW listed in Tables 6 7 to 6 9 in Chapter 6 Section 6 4 1 1 Braking resistors 7 2 2 Notes on selection The braking time T cyclic period To and duty cycle ED are converted under deceleration braking conditions based on the rated torque as shown below However you do not need to consider these values when selecting the braking resistor capacity 15096 Braking power Braking time Tu Braking time T i Time pae e Cyclic period To Figure 7 11 Duty Cycle e m r ITI O d Z O U a gt r O O E gt Z U z lt m E 4 m E O gt Q a m Yn Part 5 Specifications Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes specifications of the output ratings control system and terminal functions for the FRENIC Mini series of inverters It also provides descriptions of the operating and storage environment external dimensions examples of basic connection diagrams and details of the protective functions Contents 84 Standard Models nn EE t RR CO EA PERS 8 1 8 121 Thr e ph se 230 Vii essit eie n e ROR
243. lity 0 55 Fundamental current onto 6 6 kV lines mA Harmonic current onto 6 6 kV lines mA 5th 49 o idum o 29 Tis 25th 394 xX 15 5910 28 9 1 7 2 4 1 3 2 2 4 1 6 1 A 5910 X0 55 3250 5 910 1 295 8 295 8 T to Tables B 4 and Refer to Table B 5 App C Effect on Insulation of General purpose Motors Driven with 460 V Class Inverters App C Effect on Insulation of General purpose Motors Driven with 460 V Class Inverters Disclaimer This document provides you with a summary of the Technical Document of the Japan Electrical Manufacturers Association JEMA March 1995 It is intended to apply to the domestic market only It is only for reference for the foreign market C 1 Preface When an inverter drives a motor surge voltages generated by switching the inverter elements are superimposed on the inverter output voltage and applied to the motor terminals If the surge voltages are too high they may have an effect on the motor insulation and some cases have resulted in damage For preventing such cases this document describes the generating mechanism of the surge voltages and countermeasures against them LL Refer to A 2 1 Inverter noise for details of the principle of inverter operation Generating mechanism of surge voltages As the inverter rectifies a commercial power source voltage and smoothes into a DC voltage the magnitude E of the DC voltage becomes abo
244. ll always be interpreted as 0 when the current input signal terminal C1 is specified for the thermistor H26 1 Settings for both gain and bias will take effect concurrently only for frequency setting 1 F01 For frequency setting 2 C30 and auxiliary frequency settings 1 and 2 E60 to E62 only the gain will take effect Gain for the built in potentiometer cannot be changed by any function code or other means Switching between normal and inverse operation is only effective for frequency setting from the analog input signal terminal 12 C1 or built in potentiometer Frequency settings from the J V key are only valid for normal operation The command formats for frequency settings by S01 and S05 for the communications link facility take a different form as follows S01 the setting range is 32768 to 32767 where the maximum output frequency is obtained at 120000 S05 the setting range is 0 00 to 655 35 Hz in 0 01 Hz step or 0 1 Hz step for over 600 Hz Priority level for setting for SOI is higher than that for S05 If a value other than 0 is set for S01 then the data set to S01 will take effect If S01 0 then the setting for S05 will take effect Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual for details 4 3 UJ r Q A z gt D E S n ui E Q O z Az Q E O O 4 3 Drive Command Generator syerep 404 uojjeaiunuiuoo Ggt s JO jenustu sJasn BLI 0 Jejf4
245. ll cause condensation to form 2 Do not install the inverter in an environment where it may be exposed to cotton waste or moist dust or dirt which will clog the heat sink in the inverter If the inverter is to be used in such an environment install it in the control board of your system or other dustproof containers 3 Ifyou use the inverter in altitude above 3300 ft 1000 m you should apply a reduction factor of withstand voltage test and an output current reduction factor as listed below when selecting the inverter properly Reduction factor of Output current Altitude ft m withstand voltage test reduction factor 3300 1000 or lower 1 00 1 00 3300 to 4900 1000 1500 0 95 0 97 4900 to 6600 1500 2000 0 90 0 95 6600 to 8200 2000 2500 0 85 0 91 8200 to 9800 2500 3000 0 80 0 88 8 26 8 5 Operating Environment and Storage Environment 8 5 2 Storage environment 8 5 2 1 Temporary storage Store the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed below Item Specifications Storage 25 to 70 C 13 to 158 F temperature ih Places not subjected to abrupt temperature changes or condensation or freezing Relative 5 to 9595 humidity Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust direct sunlight corrosive or flammable gases oil mist vapor water drops or vibration The atmosphere must contain only a low level of salt 0 01 mg cm or less pe
246. lude the following Easy editing of function code data Monitoring the operation statuses of the inverter such as I O monitor and multi monitor Operation of inverters on a PC screen Windows based only LL Refer to Chapter 5 RUNNING THOUGH RS 485 COMMUNICATION OPTION for details ile m D o D LINAWdINOA 1veSaHdleadd ONILOAISS 6 4 3 Extended installation kit options 1 Mounting adapters FRENIC Mini series of inverters can be installed in the control board of your system using mounting adapters which utilize the mounting holes used for conventional inverters FVR EI1S series of 1 HP or below or 5 HP The FVR E11S 2 4 2 HP 3 HP and FVR E11S 7 1 HP 2 HP models may be replaced with the FRENIC Mini series inverters without the use of adapters Table 6 16 Mounting Adapters Applicable inverter model Option model MA C1 0 75 FRENIC Mini FRNF12C1S 2U FRNF25C1S 2U FRNF50CIS 2U FRNO001CIS 2U FVR EI11S FVRF12E11S 2U FVRF25E11S 2U FVRF50E11S 2U FVROO1E11S 2U FRNF12C1S 7U FRNF25CI1S 7U FRNF50C1S 7U FRNOO1C1S 7U FVRF12E11S 7U FVRF25E11S 7U FVRFS5OEI1S 7U FRNF12C1E 2U FRNF25CIE 2U FRNF50CIE 2U FRNO001CIE 2U FVRF12E11S 2U FVRF25E11S 2U FVRF50E11S 2U FVR001E11S 2U FRNF12C1E 7U FRNF25C1E 7U FRNF50C1E 7U FVRF12E11S 7U FVRF25E11S 7U FVRFS50E11S 7U MA C1 3 7 Note 1 Asterisks in the model names replace numbers which denote the following
247. m or any other systems where inverter operation should not be interrupted select this feature to protect the system from failures which could result from the inverter tripping due to the heat sink overheating L or overload 4 abnormally high ambient temperature or a cooling mechanism failure This feature lowers the output frequency before the inverter enters Alarm mode however the level of motor noise may Increase c z O a O Z Q O O m Qo 9 63 9 2 6 J01 J02 J03 J04 J05 J06 J codes Application functions PID Control Selection PID Control Remote process command PID Control Gain PID Control Integration time PID Control Differential time PID Control Feedback filter The PID control is a closed loop feed back system that regulates control amounts with command values as shown in the schematic block diagram below Essentially the system employs a sensor or similar device and compares it with the commanded amount e g a temperature control command If there is any difference between them the system reacts so as to minimize it Apply the PID control system to process control mechanisms for flow rate pressure temperature and the like If PID control is enabled J01 1 or 2 the frequency block diagram changes to the PID control block diagram Refer to Chapter 4 section 4 8 PID Frequency Command Generator for details PID El Loy Drive Control
248. maller than those of FVR C9S and FVR C11S series Inthe FVR C11S and FVR C9S columns underlined and bolded dimensions denote that they are smaller than those of the FRENIC Mini series js Filter of foot A mount type G 1 1 Standard models FVR C9S vs FRENIC Mini FVR C9S IP20 FRENIC Mini IP20 Ambient temperature 50 C 122 F Ambient temperature 50 C 122 F Mount ing area 2 2 2 Mini f 9 Mini 96 D DI 10 External dimensions inch mm Mounting area Volume External dimensions inch mm Ww D D2 o XN 3 36 ils Em ko ejs gle to ot E N or o h eo a Kw ae HS a eig a ak MIN IN e HOA ols olo NlO yolo N NB Os als als ofS ols ofso 9i o amp ei Sig sall9 sl9sl9 s 138 65 a e arbh gt h a h h h IN l BIS oje OW eels Nol PRA pert ee DPIN N N o BIS dle ofe aL ow la nla nla S aS a ao S NIL to X9 oL woh w ea aL aL h gt 0 oj oj oj o A BOLO lololo N S Sge Je Je zea N ox f e FVR C11S IP20 FRENIC Mini IP20 Ambient temperature 50 C 122 F Ambient temperature 50 C 122 F Mount ing area IMini H D Aes External dimensions inch mm Mounting area Volume External dimensions inch
249. mand The analog voltage 1s applied on the terminal 11 the current on the C1 These terminals are also used to input the signal from the external potentiometer PTC and PID feedback signals depending on the function code definition Related function codes F01 C30 E60 to E62 and J02 Analog output An analog DC output signal of the monitored data such as the output frequency the current and voltage inside an inverter The signal drive an analog meter installed outside the inverter for indicating the current inverter running status Refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 4 1 functions Terminal Applicable motor rating Rated output in kW of a general purpose motor that is used as a standard motor listed in tables in Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT and Chapter 8 SPECIFICA TIONS Automatic deceleration A control mode in which deceleration time is automatically extended up to 3 times of the commanded time to prevent the inverter from tripping due to an _ overvoltage caused by regenerative power even if a braking resistor is used Related function code H69 Glossary Automatic energy saving operation Energy saving operation that automatically drives the motor with lower output voltage when the motor load has been light for minimizing the product of voltage and current electric power Related function code F37 AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator control A control that keeps an output voltage constant
250. manual speed command Set the LED monitor to the speed monitor in Running mode The above setting is impossible in any operation mode except Running mode The setting procedure is the same as that for usual frequency setting If you press 9 V keys in any conditions other than those described above the following will appear Frequency setting Frequency from setting 1 F01 communications link Multistep frequency setting PID control i ing AY cancelled Displayed using WV Y keys PID enabled Disabled Disabled Frequency setting by keypad Cancelled PID output as final frequency command Other than the above Manual speed command Cancelled currently selected frequency setting PID enabled o Q m o Z c E Z I m A m lt gt jw When setting the frequency and others with J amp keys the lowest digit on the display will blink Change the setting starting from the lowest digit and the cursor will move gradually to the next digit to be changed 7 e When the data is to be changed rapidly hold down the amp 9 key for 1 second or longer and the blinking cursor will move to the next digit where the data can be changed cursor movement aS Tip LL 3 2 3 Monitor the running status In Running mode the seven items listed below can be monitored Immediately after the inverter is turned ON the monitor item specified by function code E43 is display
251. matic exit from Alarm mode If the inverter has entered Alarm mode during the retry times specified the inverter issues a block alarm and does not exit alarm mode for restarting Data setting range 0 to 10 times If 0 is set the retry operation will not be activated 9 54 9 2 Details of Function Codes m Retry latency time H05 Data setting range 0 5 to 20 0 sec Sets the latency time for automatic exit from Alarm mode Refer to the timing scheme diagram below Alarm Alarm mode Reset command ist 2nd 3rd Sth Inverter output frequency Signal in the retry operation The retry operation can be monitored by external equipment via the inverter s digital output on terminal Y1 or 30A B C Assign TRY to these terminals by setting 26 to function code E20 or E27 Cooling Fan ON OFF Stops the built in cooling fan and monitoring the temperature inside the inverter when the inverter is idling in order to extend the service life of the cooling fan and reduce running noise Note that as turning the cooling fan on off too frequently may shorten the service life leave the fan running for 10 minutes or longer each time it is turned on Function code H06 selects whether the cooling fan runs constantly or selectively Function c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Disable cooling fan runs constantly Enable cooling fan is turned on off as required H07 Gradual Ac
252. minal command FWD or REV An example of timer operation Setting up the timer conditions beforehand Set C21 to 1 to enable timer operation To display the timer count on the LED monitor set function code E43 LED monitor to 13 Timer count Set up the frequency for the timer operation using the built in potentiometer or the 9 Q e key If the LED displays the timer count press the amp key to switch to the speed monitor and then set the frequency for the timer operation Timer operation by giving a run command with the amp 9 key 1 Use the N V key to set the timer count in seconds while monitoring the current count displayed on the LED monitor Note that the timer count is expressed as integers a c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo 2 Press the amp 9 key to run the motor and the timer will start the countdown The moment the timer finishes the countdown the inverter stops running the motor even if the 6 key is not pressed Timer operation is possible even when the timer count is not displayed on the LED monitor Note If timer operation started by the terminal command FWD is finished and the nie inverter decelerates the motor to a stop then the LED monitor displays End and the monitor indication 0 if the timer count is selected alternately Turning FWD OFF will switch the LED back to the monitor indication Y C30 32 g C34 g 37 C39 C33 C38 C50 C51 C
253. minals 12 and C1 None Auxiliary frequency command 1 Auxiliary frequency command 2 PID process command 1 J02 setting is also required PID feedback value Not applicable to function code E60 This is an auxiliary frequency input to be added to frequency command 1 but never to frequency command 2 Frequenc ry ireq y inp q y q y q y commands 1 and 2 are frequencies set by the means specified by F01 and C30 respectively The set frequency can be switched between for example frequency command 1 added by the auxiliary frequency and the raw frequency 2 added by nothing to drive the motor in the desired manner For more details refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Generator Anauxiliary frequency input to be added to the set frequency For example the auxiliary frequency input to be added to the preset frequency used for the multistep frequency operation Note If the same data is set to these function codes the priority order will be E60 gt E61 gt E62 9 44 9 2 Details of Function Codes Terminal Command Assignment to FWD Refer to E01 to E03 Terminal Command Assignment to REV Refer to E01 to E03 For details on the command assignment to terminals FWD and REV refer to the descriptions for function codes E01 to E03 a c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo 9 2 3 C01 to C03 C04 C codes Control functions of frequency Jump Frequencies 1 2
254. n inverter Using a DCR increases the reactance of inverter s power source so as to decrease harmonic components on the power source lines and improve the power factor of inverter Using a DCR improves the input power factor to approximately 95 e At the time of shipping a short bar is connected across terminals P1 and P on the Note terminal block Remove the jumper bar when connecting a DCR e Ifa DCR is not going to be used do not remove the jumper bar P1 P LUR L1L U L2 S L3 T L2 N Power supply FRENIC Mini For three phase 230 V 460 V or single phase 230 V Figure 6 9 External View of a DC Reactor DCR and Connection Example 6 16 6 4 Selecting Options Table 6 10 DC Reactors DCRs Pover n DC reactor DCR supply me Inverter type voltage B Type Rated current Inductance Coil resistance Generated loss id p A mH mo wW 1 8 FRNF12C1 2U 0 8 DCR2 0 2 1 5 20 660 14 FRNF25C1 2U 1 6 Three 1 2 FRNFSOC1 2U DCR2 0 4 3 0 12 280 1 9 phase 1 FRNO001C1W 2U DCR2 0 75 5 0 7 0 123 2 8 peu 2 FRNO002C1W 2U DCR2 1 5 8 0 4 0 57 5 4 6 3 FRN003C1W 2U DCR2 2 2 11 3 0 43 6 7 5 FRN005C1W 2U DCR2 3 7 18 1 7 21 8 8 1 2 FRNF50C1B 4U DCR4 0 4 1 5 50 970 2 0 Three 1 FRNO001C1W 4U DCR4 0 75 2 5 30 440 2 5 phase 2 FRN002C1B 4U DCR4 1 5 4 0 16 235 4 8 TN 3 FRNO003C1W 4U DCR4 2 2 5 5 12 172 6 8 5 FRNO005C1W 4U DCR4 3 7 9 0 7 0
255. n modes Simultaneous keying Used to Running mode Control entry to exit from Jogging operation O Co keys Change special function code data Programming mode Q Refer to codes F00 and H03 in Chapter 9 go V keys FUNCTION CODES f Alarm mode 6 ES keys Switch to Programming mode 2 4 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD This chapter describes inverter operation using the keypad The inverter features three operation modes Running Programming and Alarm modes which enable you to run and stop the motor monitor running status set function code data display running information required for maintenance and display alarm data Contents 3 1 Overview of Operation Modes enne ennt nennen sseui nennen enne neret 3 1 32 Running Mode isses erede ee ete e TU i HUE EI He e Re ec 3 3 3 2 1 oRun stop the motor nee ee e etre OR dee OR a ee ER HN e eei OR EN ee be eO dete 3 3 3 2 2 Set up the set frequency and others sese EH Re e E RR eee Ed 3 3 3 2 3 Monitor the running Status oie TER RE PES Ue UV cs eed Ree 3 5 324 Jog Ginch the motor utet eet EE Perg rosse 3 7 3 3 Programming Mode iiic e e Rt aue e aste E T e S Rh CHER he iei e ede 3 8 3 3 1 Setting the function codes Data Setting ener 3 9 3 3 2 Checking changed function codes Data Checking 00 ccscescessessecesececeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeereneeneenaees 3 13 3 3 3 Monitoring the running status Drive Monitoring 0 0
256. n nennen 6 19 5 Ferrite ring reactors for reducing radio noise ACL sse 6 20 6 4 2 Options for operation and communications ssssssssesseeee eee nennen enne 6 21 1 External potentiometer for frequency setting ssssssssssssssesseeeeeeer ene 6 21 2 RS 485 communications card OPC CI RS iuuesssssssesseeee eene eren entrent etn 6 22 3 Remote keypad TP EI ite eei tee eren eee e ER DH eU n 6 22 4 Extension cable for remote operation sssssssssesseeeeeeeneenenenen eren nennen nnne 6 23 5 Copy adapter CPAD CIA isse eee vete dae ree dein 6 23 6 Inverter support loader software sss nennen enne nnne nnne nns 6 23 6 4 3 Extended installation kit options ene enne 6 24 1 Mounting daptets soie tease eee sR de I HET 6 24 2 Rail mounting bases sesssssssessessesee eene enne nennen nnne en rennen nennen nennen 6 25 3 NEMA Lit ett RE RERYB ESI HERRERA i E 6 26 644 Meleroptions a6 use eet ere ere E Matec RE e e tee PD eei 6 27 1 Frequency meters aoc eet rero rtr ree ce ee eere eee e ERE evo ie eiie 6 27 6 1 Configuring the FRENIC Mini 6 1 Configuring the FRENIC Mini This section lists the names and features of peripheral equipment and options for the FRENIC Mini series of inverters and includes a configuration example for reference Refer to Figure 6 1 for a quick overview of available options Surge absorber
257. nction is activated to stop the motor fault Contact rating 250 VAC 0 3A cosd 0 3 48 VDC 0 5A Possible to select a command similar to terminal Y1 for transistor output signal and use it for signal output Relay output The normal negative logic output changeover is applicable to these contact outputs Terminals 30A and 30C are short circuited for ON signal output or terminals 30B and 30C are short circuited non excite for ON signal output 8 4 Terminal Specifications W Signals assigned at transistor output terminal Signals assigned at transistor output terminal Signal name Inverter running Speed freq arrival Speed freq detection undervoltage detection Inverter output limit limit on current Overload early warning for motor Overload preventive control Small current detection Alarm relay for any fault Functions Comes ON when the output frequency is higher than start frequency Comes ON when the motor speed reaches the set frequency Condition Run command is ON Hysteresis width fixed 2 5 Hz Comes ON when the output frequency is above the detection level and goes OFF when below the detection level Hysteresis width fixed 1 0 Hz Comes ON when the inverter stops its output because of undervoltage while the run command is ON Comes ON during auto restarting operation after instantaneous power failure and until completion of
258. nd 14 is ON 1 as logic value the OR logic will make the link command LE turn ON Ifboth run commands FWD and REV come ON concurrently the logic forces the internal run commands lt FWD gt and lt REV gt to immediately turn OFF Ifyou set 1 or 3 to function code H96 STOP key priority Start Check to make the 69 key priority effective then depressing the 6 key forces the internal run commands lt FWD gt and lt REV gt to immediately turn OFF UJ r Q A z gt D E S n T E Q O z Az r r O O Ifyou have enabled operation via the timer inputting any run command starts the timer The internal run command lt FWD gt or lt REV gt and hold command HLD triggered by keypad will be automatically turned OFF after the time preset in the timer has elapsed Ifthe set frequency is lower than the start frequency F23 or the stop frequency F25 the internal run commands will remain OFF 4 5 4 4 Terminal Command Decoders Figures 4 3 a through d show five types of the terminal command decoder for the digital input signals Enable pt res NormaliNegative Logic Selection LE x is i wa UA ni o ssi sem mes never or e ws ness je a Normal Negative Logic Selection gt x2 0 Q GL oH o0 ie Communications von o O sse E OP E an Data Input Frequency oe arr s Ran command gl M i I manera opg
259. nd are rapidly expanding its application fields This paper describes the effect that inverters have on electronic devices already installed or on devices installed in the same system as inverters as well as introducing noise prevention measures Refer to Section A 3 3 Noise prevention examples for details 1 Effect on AM radios Phenomenon If an inverter operates AM radios may pick up noise radiated from the inverter An inverter has almost no effect on FM radios or television sets Probable cause Radios may receive noise radiated from the inverter Measures Inserting a noise filter on the power supply side of the inverter is effective 2 Effect on telephones Phenomenon If an inverter operates nearby telephones may pick up noise radiated from the inverter in conversation so that it may be difficult to hear Probable cause A high frequency leakage current radiated from the inverter and motors enters shielded telephone cables causing noise Measures It is effective to commonly connect the grounding terminals of the motors and return the common grounding line to the grounding terminal of the inverter 3 Effect on proximity limit switches Phenomenon If an inverter operates proximity limit switches capacitance type may malfunction Probable cause The capacitance type proximity limit switches may provide inferior noise immunity Measures It is effective to connect a filter to the input terminals of the inverter or change th
260. ning and noise from the power supply lines Use of a surge killer is effective in preventing the electronic equipment including inverters from damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges and or noise The applicable model of surge killer is the FSL 323 Figure 6 3 shows its external dimensions and a connection example Refer to the catalog Fuji Noise Suppressors SH310 Japanese edition only for details These products are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Unit inch mm 1 02 Mounting 1698 43 Terminal screw U8 screw M4 4 38 35 M4 2d 5 5 UMEN Inverter 138in IU i r 35 mm wide Iw MCCB GFCI FSL 323 IEC standard rj rail i 2 48 63 3 35 B5 374 95 With overcurrent protection 11 57 40 Note Available rated capacity of nominal applied motors is 5 HP 3 7 kW or less Available from Fuji Electnc Technica Co Ltd Figure 6 3 Dimensions of Surge Killer and Connection Example 3 Arresters An arrester suppresses surge currents and noise invaded from the power supply lines Use of an arrester is effective in preventing electronic equipment including inverters from damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges and or noise Applicable arrester models are the CN23232 and CN2324E Figure 6 4 shows their external dimensions and connection examples Refer to the catalog Fuji Noise Suppressors SH310 Japanese edition only for details These products are available fr
261. non v t Control circuit 022uF 13 I ki Vsignal T 12 T Apt H Ferrite core Pass the same phase wires through or turn them around the ferrite core 2 or 3 times Figure 8 1 Connection of Shielded Wire Figure 8 2 Example of Electric Noise Prevention a v m Q a S d o Z 7 8 13 Digital input terminals y gt a S s on Ded a Digital input 1 Digital input 2 Digital input 3 Forward operation command Reverse operation command PLC ICM Allowable leakage Functions The following features can be set to terminals X1 X3 FWD and REV and the commands function according to the input signals at the terminals The commands FWD and REV are factory setting assigned at terminals FWD and REV respectively Common features Sink Source switching feature Sink and source can be switched by using the built in jumper switch Normal negative logic input switching feature Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of terminals between X1 to X3 FWD or REV and CM If the logic value for ON between X1 and CM is 1 in the normal logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system Digital input circuit specifications Control circuit Operation ON level i arl voltage SINK o b Photocoupler SINK OFF level oe i Operation ON level OH l voltage SOURCE o SOURCE
262. ns the motor The inverter and motor are installed in the same place for overhead traveling Photoelectric relay Panel in ceiling part J Powersupply part of photoelectric relay 24 V Panel on the ground lt Possible cause It is considered that induction noise entered the photoelectric relay since the inverter s input power supply line and the photoelectric relay s wiring are in parallel separated by approximately 0 98 in 25 mm over a distance of 98 to 131 ft 30 to 40 m Due to conditions of the installation these lines cannot be separated 1 Connect the ground terminals of the motors in a common connection Return to the inverter panel and insert a 1 uF capacitor between the input terminal of the inverter and ground 1 The effect of the inductive filter and LC filter may not be expected because of sound frequency component 2 In the case ofa V connection power supply transformer in a 230V system it is necessary to connect capacitors as shown in the following figure because of different potentials to ground Power supply transformer 1 As a temporary measure Insert a 0 1 uF capacitor between the 0 V terminal ofthe power supply circuit in the detection unit of the overhead photoelectric relay and a frame of the overhead panel Photoelectric relay Frame of 2 As a permanent measure move the 24 V power supply from the ground to the overhead unit so that signals
263. nt speed Stopped circuit This protection 1s not assured if excess AC line voltage 1s applied inadvertently Undervoltage protection Stops the inverter output when the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage level 200 VDC for 3 phase 230 V and 1 phase 230 V series 400 VDC for 3 phase 460 V series However if data 4 or 5 is selected for F14 no alarm is output even if the DC link bus voltage drops Yes This alarm may not be outputted depending upon the data setting of the function code Input phase loss protection Detects input phase loss stopping the inverter output This function prevents the inverter from undergoing heavy stress that may be caused by input phase loss or inter phase voltage unbalance and may damage the inverter If connected load is light or a DC reactor is connected to the inverter this function will not detect input phase loss if any In single phase series of inverters this function is disabled by factory default Yes Output phase loss protection Detects breaks in inverter output wiring at the start of running and during running stopping the inverter output Not applicable Overheat protection Inverter Description Stops the inverter output upon detecting excess heat sink temperature in case of cooling fan failure or overload 8 8 Details of Protective Functions LED monitor displays IILI I LIT I Al
264. nt to X1 the value of 1000s shown in below to the E02 X2 function code um EN N Y 7 E03 X3 0 1000 Select multistep frequency ue N Y 8 0 to 1 steps SS1 1 1001 Select multistep frequency 0 to 3 steps SS2 2 1002 Select multistep frequency 0 to 7 steps SS4 4 1004 Select ACC DEC time 2 steps RT1 6 1006 Enable 3 wire operation HLD T 1007 Coast to a stop BX 8 1008 Reset alarm RST 9 33 9 1009 Enable external alarm trip THR 10 1010 Ready for jogging JOG 11 1011 Switch set frequency 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 19 1019 Enable write from keypad WE KP 20 1020 Cancel PID control Hz PID 21 1021 Switch normal inverse operation IVS 24 1024 Enable communications link RS 485 communication option LE 33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST 34 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD 9 1 Function Code Tables Change Code Name Data setting range dod Unit when Data Deut Refer ment copy setting to running E10 Acceleration Time 2 0 00 to 3600 0 01 s Y Y 6 00 9 17 9 38 E11 Deceleration Time 2 0 00 to 3600 0 01 s Y Y 6 00 9 17 9 38 E20 Status Signal To assign a negative logic output to a terminal N Y 0 Assignment to Y1 set the value of 1000s shown in on the table E27 30A B C below to the function code N Y 99 Mechanical
265. nverter GFCI ACR With overcurrent protection Figure 6 10 External View of AC Reactor ACR and Connection Example Table 6 11 AC Reactor ACR os Applicable AC reactor ACR motor supply ti Inverter type voltage DE Rated current Reactance m phase Generated loss HP Type A A 50 Hz 60 Hz wW 1 8 FRNFI2CIN 2U 2 9 1 4 FRNF2SCIB 2U ACR2 0 4A 3 917 1100 5 Three V2 FRNFSOCIM 2U 10 phase 1 FRNOO1C1M 2U ACR2 0 75A 5 493 592 12 230V 2 FRN002C1 W 2U ACR2 1 5A 8 295 354 14 3 FRN003C1 W 2U ACR2 2 2A 11 213 256 16 5 FRN005C1 W 2U ACR2 3 7A 17 218 153 23 1 2 FRNFSOCIB 4U 5 ACR4 0 75A 2 5 1920 2300 Three 1 FRN001C1N 4U 10 phase 2 FRNO002C1WI 4U ACR4 1 5A 3 7 1160 1390 11 PON 3 FRNO03C1M 4U ACR4 2 2A 5 5 851 1020 14 5 FRN005C1 W 4U ACR4 3 7A 9 512 615 17 1 8 FRNFI2CIW 7U 5 ACR2 0 4A 3 917 1100 1 4 FRNF2SCIB 7U 10 Mua V2 FRNFSOCUM U ACR2 0 75A 5 493 592 12 phase 230V 1 FRNOUCIM 7U ACR2 1 5A 8 295 354 14 2 FRNO02C1 7U ACR2 2 2A 11 213 256 16 3 FRN003C1W 7U ACR2 3 7A 17 218 262 23 Note 1 Generated losses listed in the above table are approximate values that are calculated according to the following conditions The power source is 3 phase 230 V 460 V 50 Hz with 0 interphase voltage unbalance ratio The power source capacity uses the larger of either 500 kVA or 10 times the rated capacity of the inverter The motor is a 4 pole standard m
266. o correctly twist the wires and keep the wiring length for equipment being connected as short as possible E 600V cross linked polyethylene insulated wires FSLC wires Use this class of wire mainly for power and grounding circuits These wires are smaller in diameter and more flexible than those of the IV and HIV classes of wires meaning that these wires can be used to save on space and increase operation efficiency of your power system even in high temperature environments The maximum allowable ambient temperature for this class of wires 1s 90 C 194 F The Boardlex wire range available from Furukawa Electric Co Ltd satisfies these requirements E Shielded Twisted cables for internal wiring of electronic electric equipment Use this category of cables for the control circuits of the inverter so as to prevent the signal lines from being affected by noise from external sources including the power input output lines of the inverter themselves Even if the signal lines are inside the power control cabinet always use this category of cables when the length of wiring is longer than normal Cables satisfying these requirements are the Furukawa s BEAMEX S shielded cables of the XEBV and XEWV ranges 6 2 6 2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals Currents Flowing across the Inverter Terminals Table 6 1 summarizes average effective electric currents flowing across the terminals of each inverter model for ease of reference when selecting p
267. odel at full load 100 Note 2 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on enclosure 6 18 6 4 Selecting Options 4 Output circuit filters OFLs Insert an OFL in the inverter power output circuit to Suppress the voltage fluctuation at the motor power terminals This protects the motor from insulation damage caused by the application of high voltage surge currents from the 400 V class of inverters Suppress leakage current due to higher harmonic components from the inverter output lines This reduces the leakage current when the motor is connected by long power feed lines Keep the length of the power feed line less than 1300 ft 400 m Minimize radiation and or induction noise issued from the inverter output lines OFLs are effective noise suppression device for long wiring applications such as that used at plants Use an ACR within the allowable carrier frequency range specified by function code F26 Note Otherwise the filter will overheat Inverter Output circuit filter OFL Figure 6 11 External View of Output Circuit Filter OFL and Connection Example Table 6 12 Output Circuit Filter OFL m m O zi z 9 U m D T T r m o c T m z Carrier Power T Rated Overload n frequency Maximum supply Inverter type Filter type current H p allowable frequency rating capability input voltage HP A voltage range Hz kHz 1 8 FRNF
268. odes 3 9 Function codes that require simultaneous keying To change data for function codes F00 Data Protection and H03 Data Initialization simultaneous keying operation is necessary keys or 609 GA keys This prevents data from being lost by mistake Changing validating and saving of function code data during running Some function code data can be changed while the motor is running and some cannot Further amongst the function codes whose data can be changed while the motor is running there are some for which the changes can be validated immediately and others for which they cannot Refer to the Change when running column in Chapter 9 Section 9 1 Function Code Tables 3 10 3 3 Programming Mode Figure 3 4 shows the status transition for Menu 1 Data setting and Figure 3 5 shows an example of the function code data changing procedure Oa 9 Power ON mode Oo m D 9 wo Programming mode Menu List of function codes Function code data Menu 1 Data setting 4E QIVdA3 AHL ONISN NOLLVH3dO Y To Menu 2 Figure 3 4 Status Transition Diagram for Data Setting 3 11 Power ON Y Running mode Y odd I ogramming mode Function code data une para t Save data and go to the next function code Figure 3 5 Example of Function Code Data Changing
269. ollowing alarms is not updated 3 24 3 3 Programming Mode Power ON Lr Yo e Running ode mode Oo m D 9 wo Running status info at the time an alarm occurred 1 second intervals 5 DU S000 Item No Switches al approx Output frequency 1O Of Item No Switches at approx Output current 1 second intervals 5 0 m gt 1S8 QIVdA3 AHL ONISN NOILVYAdO Terminal output signal status under communi Item No Switches al approx cation control 1 second intervals gg jeu s Same as above Same as above Same as above Figure 3 10 Status Transition of Alarm Information Basic key operations 1 With the menu displayed use 9 Q keys to select Alarm information 5 77 2 Press the G key to display the alarm list code e g 4 4 In the list of alarm codes the alarm information for the last 4 alarms will be saved as an alarm history 3 Each time A P QO keys are pressed the last four alarms are displayed in order from the most recent one as 4 7 3 and 7 4 Press the e key while the alarm code is displayed and the corresponding alarm item number e g _LiLi and data e g Output frequency will be displayed continuously in turn for 1 second each It is possible to display the item number e g 4_ and data e g Output current for each desired al
270. om Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Unit inch mm 2 36 60 n9 M Three phase 230 VAC Three phase 460 VAC 24 J dri r al Plug fuse Plug fuse a n 8 AFaC 30 m AFac 30 j amp I il 3 1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 ll amp ies Pa i CN23232 CN2324E Ss e 138 in 38mm wide Mounting clamp aor EC standard rail Mounting hole Available from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Figure 6 4 Arrester Dimensions and Connection Examples 6 11 ile m D o D LINAWdINOA 1veSaHdleadd ONILOAISS 4 Surge absorbers A surge absorber suppresses surge currents and noise from the power lines to ensure effective protection of your power system from the malfunctioning of the magnetic contactors mini control relays and timers Applicable surge absorber models are the S2 A O and S1 B O Figure 6 5 shows their external dimensions Refer to the catalog Fuji Noise Suppressors SH310 Japanese edition only for details The surge absorbers are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Type S2 A O for magnetic contactor 0 24 0 02 0412004 11 Mies con a 1 18x0 04 6030 5 U9 4x1 40 1 3021 Unit inch mm 10 17 i 4U 3 0 35 8 Type S1 B O for mini control relay or timer 0 24 0 02 0360 04 11 81 300 Lead wire 0 793 0 04 630 5 9 131 157x004 4021 203 1 e at Mim o ocn Or ory st i OE om
271. ommand B X data 7 is assigned to any one of digital input terminals X1 to X3 by setting any of function codes E01 through E03 then turning BX ON will make the motor coast to a stop Similarly if the coast to stop command BX data 1007 1s assigned turning BX OFF will make the motor coast to a stop Limitation of data displayed on the LED monitor Only four digits can be displayed on the 4 digit LED monitor If you enter more than 4 digits of data valid for a function code any digits after the 4th digit of the set data will not be displayed however they will be processed correctly 9 1 The following tables list the function codes available for the FRENIC Mini series of inverters F codes Fundamental Functions Change Code Name Data setting range ner Unit when mien Mikael Peter ment copy setting to running FOO Data Protection 0 Disable data protection Y N 0 9 12 Function code data can be edited 1 Enable data protection Function code data cannot be edited F01 Frequency Command 1 0 Enable and V keys on the built in N Y 4 9 12 keypad 1 Enable the voltage input to terminal 12 2 Enable the current input to terminal C1 3 Enable the sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 Enable the built in potentiometer POT F02 Running Stopping and 0 Enable amp and 69 keys on the built in N Y 2 9 13 Rotational Direction keypad to
272. on Data setting range 0 to 100 m Braking period F22 Set the braking period during which DC braking 1s activated Data setting range 0 00 to 30 00 sec Note that setting 0 00 disables DC braking a c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Decelerated stop starts Output frequency Hz DC braking Starting frequency F20 1 l DC braking Braking time F2 DC braking Braking level DC braking current F21 0 uem Time DC braking Braking mode H95 H95 specifies the DC braking mode as follows Data for H95 Braking mode Meaning Slow response The DC braking current gradually ramps up The torque may not be sufficient at the start of DC braking Quick response The DC braking current quickly ramps up Depending on the inertia of the moving loads or the coupling state the revolution may be unstable 4 For three phase 230 V and single phase 230 V inverters The braking level setting for the three phase 230 V and single phase 230 V series should be calculated from the DC braking level Ips A based on the reference current Iree A as shown below IDB A 2 Iref A 100 Setting Example Setting the braking level Ips at 4 2 Amp A for 1 HP 0 75 kW standard motors 4 2 A 5 0 A Setting 96 x 100 84 Applicable motor rating HP kW Reference current Iref A ANCAUTION The brake function of the inverte
273. on however was lifted when the Guideline was revised in January 2004 Since then the inverter makers have individually imposed voluntary restrictions on the harmonics of their products We as before recommend that you connect a reactor for suppressing harmonics to your inverter 2 Guideline for suppressing harmonics by customers receiving high voltage or special high voltage Unlike other guidelines this guideline is not applied to the equipment itself such as a general purpose inverter but is applied to each large scale electric power consumer for total amount of harmonics The consumer should calculate the harmonics generated from each piece of equipment currently used on the power source transformed and fed from the high or special high voltage source 1 Scope of regulation In principle the guideline applies to the customers that meet the following two conditions The customer receives high voltage or special high voltage The equivalent capacity of the converter load exceeds the standard value for the receiving voltage 50 kVA at a receiving voltage of 6 6 kV Appendix B 2 1 Calculation of equivalent capacity P1 gives you some supplemental information with regard to estimation for the equivalent capacity of an inverter according to the guideline B 2 App B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics for Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High Voltage 2 Regulation The level calculated value of
274. on and energy savings The ideal functions to serve a multiplicity of needs for small capacity inverters Compatible with a wide range of frequency settings You can select the optimum frequency setting method that matches your machine or equipment via the keypad N amp keys or potentiometer analog input 4 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V multistep speed settings 0 to 7 steps or via RS 485 communications Refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Generator and Chapter 9 Section 9 2 1 F codes for details 1 2 1 1 Features A transistor output is provided i9 m o 9 This enables an overload early warning lifetime forecast or other information signals to be output during operation LL Refer to function code E20 in Chapter 9 Section 9 2 2 E codes Extension terminal functions High output frequency up to 400 Hz The inverter can be used with equipment such as centrifugal separators that require a high motor speed In this case you need to check whether the machine operation in combination with the motor is compatible or not Two points can be set for a non linear V f pattern The addition of an extra point total 2 points for the non linear V f pattern which can be set as desired improves the FRENIC Mini s drive capability because the V f pattern can be adjusted to match a wider application area Refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 7 Drive Command Controller for det
275. operation m Non linear V f pattern for voltage H51 Sets the non linear V f pattern for voltage component 0to240 V Output the voltage AVR controlled for 230 V class motors 0 to 500 V Output the voltage AVR controlled for 460 V class motors If the voltage at base frequency F05 is set to 0 the data settings of function codes H50 and H51 will be ignored c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Defining non linear V f patterns F04 F05 H50 and H51 Function codes F04 and F05 define a non linear V f pattern that forms the relationship between the inverter s output frequency and voltage Furthermore setting the non linear V f pattern using function codes H50 and H51 allows patterns with higher or lower voltage than that ofthe normal pattern to be defined at an arbitrary point inside or outside the base frequency Generally when a motor is driven at a high speed its internal impedance may increase and output torque may decrease due to the decreased drive voltage This feature helps you solve that problem Note that setting the voltage in excess of the inverter s input source voltage cannot be done Output voltage V A Constant Constant torque output range range Rated voltage at base frequency F05 r i i Output 0 Base Maximum equency Hz 1 Normal linear V f frequency frequency pattern F04 F03 Output voltage V A Rated voltage at base frequency F05
276. output voltage V x Rated output current A x10 The rated output voltage is assumed to be 230 V for 200 V class equipment and 460 V for 400 V class equipment Rated output current A total RMS equivalent to the current that flows through the output terminal under the rated input and output conditions the output voltage current frequency and load factor meet their rated conditions Essentially equipment rated at 230 V covers the current of a 230 V 60 Hz 6 pole motor and equipment rated at 460 V covers the current of a 380 V 50 Hz 4 pole motor Rated output voltage A fundamental wave RMS equivalent to the voltage that 1s generated across the output terminal when the AC input voltage supply voltage and frequency meet their rated conditions and the output frequency of the inverter equals the base frequency Required power supply capacity The capacity required of a power supply for an inverter This is calculated by solving either of the following equations and is stated in kVA Required power supply capacity kVA 43 x 200 x Input RMS current 200V 50Hz or 43 x 220 x Input RMS current 220V 60Hz Required power supply capacity kVA 43 x 400 x Input RMS current 400V 50Hz or 3 x 440 x Input RMS current 440V 60Hz Running mode One of the three operation modes supported by the inverter If the inverter is turned ON it automatically enters this mode which you may run stop the motor se
277. ower lines motor or any of the optional peripheral equipment The level of electric noise issued from the inverter or received by the inverter from external sources may vary depending upon wiring and routing To solve such noise related problems refer to Appendix A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise Select wires that satisfy the following requirements Sufficient capacity to flow the rated average current allowable current capacity Protective device coordination with an overcurrent circuit breaker such as an MCCB in the overcurrent zone for overcurrent protection Voltage loss due to the wire length is within the allowable range Suitable for the type and size of terminals of the optional equipment to be used Recommended wires are listed below Use these wires unless otherwise specified E 600V class of vinyl insulated wires IV wires Use this class of wire for the power circuits This class of wire is hard to twist so using it for the control signal circuits is not recommended Maximum ambient temperature for this wire is 60 C 140 F E 600V heat resistant PVC insulated wires or 600V polyethylene insulated wires HIV wires As wires in this class are smaller in diameter and more flexible than IV wires and can be used at a higher ambient temperature 75 C 167 F they can be used for both of the main power and control signal circuits To use this class of wire for the control circuits you need t
278. ower supply system is the same for the PLC and inverter it is considered that noise enters the PLC through the power supply Noise prevention measures 1 Install an LC filter on the input side of the inverter 2 Connect the shield of the shielded wire of the pressure sensor to the 0 V line common of the pressure sensor changing the original connection Inverter LC filter Shielded wire 1 Install an LC filter and a capacitive filter at the input side of the inverter 2 Install an LC filter at the output side of the inverter LC filter LC filter Converter Pulse genarator 1 Install a capacitive filter and an LC filter on the input side of the inverter 2 Install an LC filter on the output side of the inverter 3 Lower the carrier frequency of the inverter LC filter LC filter Capacitive filter Power supply Power supply A 11 1 The shielded parts of shield wires for sensor signals are connected to a common point in the system Conduction noise from the inverter can be reduced This is an example of a measure where the power line and signal line cannot be separated Induction noise and radiation noise at the output side of the inverter can be reduced Total conduction noise and induction noise in the electric line can be reduced App B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High Vol
279. own below Multi Drop is FRENIC M branch connector _ RS 485 communications Host j m E card rt E Master CPNS mim S E ul 5 3 Converter Equipment such as personal computers is not equipped with an RS 485 communications port but with an RS 232C port so an RS 485 RS 232C converter is required to connect them to the RS 485 communications card It is recommended that insulated converters such as RS 485 RS 485 converters KS 485PTI by System Sacomm Inc be used for eliminating electric noise Multi drop branch connector The RS 485 communications port of the communications card uses an RJ 45 connector For multi drop connection of inverters multi drop branch connectors MS8 BA JJJ by SK Koki Co are required Cable For the connection of the remote keypad use an 8 wire straight cable with an RJ 45 connector Remote keypad extension cable option CB 5S For the connection of other equipment or connection of FRENIC Mini inverters with each other use a cable that has signal wires only EIA568 compliant 1OBASE T E Note No converter is required for connection of the remote keypad To connect the FVR E11S series of general purpose inverters to the FRENIC Mini series take necessary measures for the difference of the pin assignment between FVR E11S and FRENIC Mini series to avoid a short circuited failure 5 4 Part 3 Peripheral Equipment
280. ows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter Unit V volts Max temperature of heat sink Shows the maximum temperature of the heat sink for every hour Unit C Max effective current Shows the maximum effective current for every hour Unit A amperes Capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor Shows the current capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor based on the capacitance when shipped as 100 Refer to the FRENIC Mini Instruction Manual Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION for details Unit Accumulated run time of electrolytic capacitor on the printed circuit board s Shows the accumulated run time of the capacitor mounted on the printed circuit board s The display method is the same as for Accumulated run time above However when the total time exceeds 65 535 hours the count stops and the display remains at 65 53 Accumulated run time of the cooling fan Shows the accumulated run time of the cooling fan If the cooling fan ON OFF control function code H06 is effective the time when the fan is stopped is not counted The display method is the same as for Accumulated run time above However when the total time exceeds 65 535 hours the count stops and the display remains at 65 53 Number of startups The motor run times the number of times the inverter run command is set to ON are calculated and displayed 1 000 indicates 1 000 times When any number ranging
281. p of deviation SS between derivative of the commanded TR frequency and control amounts is called the D control The D control Amount outputs derivative of the control amount For rapidly change this control makes l Time the system react quickly The effectiveness of ID control is expressed by a parameter of differentiation time Setting a long differentiation time will quickly converge on a system control error deviation caused by P control Setting it too long makes the system tend to oscillate more Setting it too short will suppress the convergent effect to the deviation caused by the system operation Descriptions combined use of P I and D control are shown below 1 PI control PI control which is a combination of P and I control is generally used to minimize the deviation caused by P control PI control acts to minimize at all times the deviation caused by a variance of the commanded amount or external disturbance to the system as stationary events However the longer integration time set the slower the system response Use P control alone for loads with integral component ratio that takes very large part of control amount 2 PD control When PD control is applied to a system the moment that a deviation occurs the system instantaneously generates a control amount much greater than that of D control frequency to suppress the deviation If the deviation converges the P control amount may decrease
282. page 3 19 for details on the display contents I O signals on the control circuit terminals under communication control Shows the ON OFF state for the digital input terminals that received a command via RS 485 communications Refer to 1 Displaying control I O signal terminals on page 3 19 and 2 Displaying control I O signal terminals under communication control on page 3 20 for details on the display contents Input voltage on terminal 12 Shows the input voltage on terminal 12 in volts V Input current on terminal C1 Shows the input current on terminal C1 in milliamperes mA LI TII 71 LI d Output voltage to analog meters FMA Shows the output voltage on terminal FMA in volts V O Q m S O z c a Z 4 I m A m lt gt oO Power ON Running mode _ e jS 4 pp By LED segment ON OFF I O AJ tO ET j Listof l O check items O data WEZ In hex format input AL tO O09 In hex format output By LED segment ON OFF I O In hex format input In hex format output Input voltage at terminal 12 V Input current at terminal C1 mA Output voltage V to analog voltmeter Figure 3 8 Status Transition of I O Check Basic key operation 1 With the menu displayed use N Q keys to select I O check 7 2 Press the G3 key to di
283. pecified by function code F23 Refer to the figure F14 5 on the following page for details This setting is optimal for operations in which the motor speed quickly slows down to 0 r min due to its heavy load with a very small moment of inertia if the motor coasts to a stop because of the instantaneous power failure Nae There is a 0 5 second delay from detection of the undervoltage until the motor is restarted This delay is due to the time required for the residual electricity magnetic flux in the motor to erase Therefore the motor will restart with a 0 5 second delay after the power is recovered even if the instantaneous power failure period is shorter than 0 5 second When an instantaneous power failure occurs the power supply voltage for external circuitry such as relay circuits controlling the inverter may also drop as low as to cause run commands to be discontinued Therefore during recovery from an instantaneous power failure the inverter waits 2 seconds for a run command to arrive If it receives one within 2 seconds it will restart If a run command arrives more than 2 seconds later then the inverter should be restarted at the start frequency F23 The external circuitry should be so designed that it will issue a run command within 2 seconds in such an event otherwise it should incorporate a relay with a mechanical locking feature 9 20 9 2 Details of Function Codes facoast to stop command BX is
284. pendent of the MCCB or GFCI to cut off the power fed to the inverter Refer to page 6 7 for details MCs or solenoids that will be installed close to the inverter require surge absorbers to be connected in parallel to their coils 8 32 8 7 Connection Diagrams 8 7 2 Operation by external signal inputs The basic connection diagram below shows an example for operation by external input signals MCCB or RCD GFCI Note 1 MC Note 2 DCR Note 3 22 BBR Power supply single phase M art Ir LiL 2 1cm Note 4 230V 1 C HR 50Hz ss L2 N DB THR RCDIGFCI Main circuii Pawar supply Note 1 MC Note 2 Ihree phase olm v m mE 60Hz 1 or _ FK i ae three phase 460V N T 60Hz Grounding terminal Power supply to ai 5 Control circuit gt potentiometer 037 E Voltage input Alarm output 8 oto t0voc HaT for any fault z Current input 410 20 mADC 9 11 DBR Dynamic Braking Resistor 1 DCR DC Reactor Analog meter RCD GFCI Residual current operated Protective Device Ground Fault Circuit interrupter MC Magnetic Contactor MCCB Molded Case Circuit Breaker OQ 2 E 2e e a o 2 o9 5 O i 4 j Transistor output Note 6 Note 1 Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or a residual current operated protective device RCD a ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI with overcurr
285. place terminal block covers for control circuit and main circuit Control circuit terminal block cover i9 m o 9 Main circuit terminal block cover IUlA OIN34H OL NOILONGOULNI LED monitor on the keypad displaying all types of data You can access and monitor all types of inverter s data and information including output frequency set frequency load shaft speed output current output voltage alarm history input power etc using built in keypad with LED Refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD Menu mode accessible from the keypad You can easily access the menu mode including Data setting Data checking Drive monitoring I O checking Maintenance information and Alarm information Refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 1 5 Maintenance FRENIC Mini series features the following facilities useful for maintenance Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 3 5 Reading Maintenance Information and the FRENIC Mini Instruction Manual Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION for details The lifetime of the DC link bus capacitor reservoir capacitor can be estimated The capacitor s condition compared with its initial state can be confirmed Long life cooling fan Use of a long life cooling fan estimated service life 7 years for operation at an ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F reduces maintenance cost Recording and display of cumulative running time of the inverter The
286. plays the latest four alarm codes You may refer Z n 2 Rn h Section Alarm C orn to the running information at the time when the 336 information alarm occurred D Menu 7 Allows you to read or write function code data as Data copying P well as verifying it NOTE To use this function a remote keypad option is necessary 3 8 3 3 Programming Mode Limiting menus to be displayed The menu driven system has a limiter function specified by function code E52 that limits menus to be displayed for the purpose of simple operation The factory default is to display Menu 1 Data setting only allowing no switching to any other menu Function Code E52 Keypad Mode Selection Function code data E52 Menus selectable 0 Function code data setting mode Menu 1 Data setting factory default Menu 2 Data checking Menu 1 through 6 7 1 Function code data check mode 2 Full menu mode Menu 7 appears only when the remote keypad option is set up for use If the full menu mode is selected pressing the N V keys will cycle through menus With the e key you may select the desired menu Once all of the menus have been cycled through the display will return to the first menu P H amp Tip aa 3 3 1 Menu 1 Data setting in Programming mode allows you to set function codes for making the inverter functions match your needs The table below lists the function codes av
287. pp C Effect on Insulation of General purpose Motors Driven with 460 V Class Inverters 17 C 1 Generating mechanism of surge voltages nennen nnne ener enne 17 C 2 Effect of surge voltages eoe eee vate tuna eene ie ui ree E 18 C 3 Countermeasures against surge voltages soo ac eco terea Bane ea GaN Oa a aeg 18 C 4 Regarding existing equipment ect eet ee reet Htec ide ee e ca lees E dus 19 App D Inverter Generating Loss E ennt inen EEE E i 20 App E Conversion from SI Units esser eren re RS EUR ene er e Ee x Ee i S re ete 21 App F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires sse eene eene enne 23 App G Replacement Information cece cececceesceesceseeeeceeeeeseeeseeeseceaeceaecaaecsaecaeecaeeeseeeceseseeeeseseeeeeseneserenerensaes 25 G 1 External dimensions comparison tables nece aeo ee I de e EU deis 25 G 2 Terminal arrangements and symbols sss ener ener enne nennen 29 C3 Pench CO ee dune uere Mut MUI DM IL ID NENNEN E ED n 31 App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise Disclaimer This document provides you with a summary of the Technical Document of the Japan Electrical Manufacturers Association JEMA April 1994 It is intended to apply to the domestic market only It is only for reference for the foreign market A 1 Effect of inverters on other devices Inverters have been a
288. produce FWD and REV commands In this process settings via the communications facility do not take effect In the next process of the drive command generator however they may take effect Refer to the block diagram in Section 4 3 Drive Command Generator To keep the inverter operation safe any negative logic input for the FWD and REV commands cannot be applied The upper part of the terminal command decoder ORing with link commands ignoring link commands shows the process to produce commands by ORing signals issued from the communications facility and the control signal input terminal block Logical Oring If any of input signals is ON then the command becomes ON The lower part of the terminal command decoder ORing with link commands ignoring link commands shows the process to produce commands by forcing the inverter to ignore signals issued from the communications facility even if link operation LE link operation command has been turned ON 4 9 UJ r o e z gt EU 2 e xi O A Q e z Z O o Q Q O 4 5 Digital Output Selector l 66 Viv 2 9 O O00 le 2l n NI ol eo s wajyshs 9160 jeuuou u amp jep si 7Z3 0 OTA seuoiws Je umoys Jequinu yoeg 30N l H MC LE Q EE O 0001 Iz r 2A Ore O Io a voe TO liii 1 NM indino 1981002 Aey O OTO n j 4a Gauos yndyno smeis 0
289. ption on the FRENIC Mini series enables performing the operations listed below via the RS 485 communications facility 1 Using the remote keypad option The remote keypad option allows running inverter and monitoring the running status information to be monitored from remote locations such as from the outside of the power control panel 2 FRENIC Loader Monitoring the running status information editing function codes and test running the inverters can be performed on a Windows based PC connected to the power system network including the inverter s by installing FRENIC Loader software Setting data to the y codes refers to function codes y01 to y10 3 Host controller The inverter can be managed and monitored by connecting a host controller such as a PLC to the power system network Available communications protocols are the Modbus RTU and Fuji general purpose inverter protocol Modbus RTU is a protocol established by Modicon Inc LL Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual for details y01 to y10 Link Functions for RS 485 Communication m Station Address y01 Sets the station address for the communications network The table below lists the relation between the data setting range and the protocol Protocol Station address Broadcast address Modbus RTU 1 to 247 FRENIC Loader 1 to 255 Fuji general purpose inverter 1 to 31 If the address is set outside of the range specified in the t
290. que Acceleration and UO S berae deceleration torque Motor required torque Load current Figure 7 10 Sample of the Repetitive Operation First calculate the required torque of each part based on the speed pattern Then using the torque current curve of the motor convert the torque to the load current The equivalent RMS current Ieq can be finally calculated by the following equation I tet sty te ty tly tats Tea Viet th t2 D5 ty tly sty tds ts A 7 15 titteat t3 tat ts tg The torque current curve for the dedicated motor is not available for actual calculation Therefore calculate the load current I from the load torque x using the following equation 7 16 Then calculate the equivalent current Ieg 2 I s x ur Imioo A 7 16 Where 1 is the load torque Inoo is the torque current and Imioo is exciting current 7 12 7 2 Selecting a Braking Resistor 7 2 Selecting a Braking Resistor 7 2 1 Selection procedure The following three requirements must be satisfied simultaneously 1 The maximum braking torque should not exceed values listed in Tables 6 7 to 6 9 in Chapter 6 Section 6 4 1 1 Braking resistors To use the maximum braking torque exceeding values in those tables select the braking resistor having one class larger capacity 2 The discharge energy for a single braking action should not exceed the discharging capability KWs listed in Tab
291. quency varies the speed of the motor However simply varying the output frequency f Hz would result in an overheated motor or would not allow the motor to demonstrate its optimum utility if the output voltage V V remains constant For this reason the output voltage V must be varied with the output frequency f by using an inverter This scheme of control is called V f control Variable torque load A squared torque load is characterized by 1 A change in the required torque in proportion to the square of the number of revolutions per minute 2 A power requirement that decreases in proportion to the cube of the decrease in the number of revolutions per minute Re quired power HP Rotating speed r min x Torque N m p 9 55 Related function code F37 Applications Fans and pumps cox Required torque m Required power HP Required power o Required torque Rotating speed of load machine Voltage and frequency variations Variations in the input voltage or frequency within permissible limits Variations outside these limits might cause an inverter or motor to fail G 6 Compact Inverter FRENIC Mini User s Manual First Edition July 2007 Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd The purpose of this manual 1s to provide accurate information in the handling setting up and operating of the FRENIC Mini series of inverters Please feel free to send your comments regarding
292. r supply voltage Three FRNFSOC1S 4U 113 phase 3 0 12 l Note 1 Asterisks in the above table replace numbers which denote the following 21 Braking resistor built in type None Standard 8 28 8 6 External Dimensions 4 33 110 P 0 26 6 5 T ASH p26 oog Unit inch mm 028 LLL 41798 6 5 2 5 12 130 4 85 118 Nameplate Power supply voltage Three phase FRNO02C1S 2U 2 30V FRNO003C1S 2U Three phase FRN002C1S 4U 460V fy FRNO003C1S 4U Single phase 230 V FRN002C1S 7U Unit inch mm a 5 51 140 0 24 6 504 128 10 24 00 9 47 13 5 75 9 2 52 64 ile m D D i o 0 m Q a o 28 glz 4 no i a si D PLU 0 20 Nameplate _ x 6 a e irc s Inverter type Three phase EnNoosc15 205 230 V f Tarep FRNO05C1S 4U Single phase RNOO3C1S 7U Note 1 Asterisks in the above table replace numbers which denote the following 21 Braking resistor built in type None Standard 8 29 8 6 2 Models available on order EMC filter built in type 0 26 6 5 6 69 170 0 24 6 Sa ga m oJ 4 72 120 4 33 110 D S Y o 3 1
293. r does not provide mechanical holding means Injuries could occur 9 2 Details of Function Codes Start Frequency Stop Frequency The start frequency refers to the output frequency that the inverter should output at start up The inverter shuts down its output at the stop frequency Set the start frequency to a level that will enable the motor to generate enough torque for startup Generally set the rated slip frequency to F23 Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 Hz for both start and stop frequencies CNot If the start frequency is lower than the stop frequency the inverter cannot output oe any power as long as the set frequency does not exceed the stop frequency Motor Sound Carrier frequency Refer to H98 Sets the carrier frequency Data setting range 0 75 to 15 kHz Changing the carrier frequency may Carrier frequency 0 75 to 15 kHz decrease the motor running noise i leakage current from the output lines Motor running noise Noisy to quiet and electric noise from the inverter Output current waveform Poor to good Leakage current level Low to high Electric noise level Low to high Note Lowering the carrier frequency increases the ripple components harmonic components on the output current waveform so as to increase the motor s power loss and raises the temperature of the motor If the carrier frequency is set at 0 75 kHz for example estimate the motor
294. r jogging JOG Function code data 10 Turning ON the JOG command makes the motor ready for jogging Use this command for fine adjustment to position a workpiece for example Simultaneous 69 keying may also make the motor ready for jogging depending upon whether keypad operation or terminal command operation is selected and whether the JOG command is ON or OFF as listed below When keypad operation is selected F02 0 2 or 3 If JOG is 69 J keying The motor becomes ready for Disabled Jogging Toggles between normal and jogging Normal running Jogging When terminal command operation is selected F02 1 simultaneous 69 keying is disabled Joggin When the motor is ready for jogging with JOG being ON pressing the RuN key or turning the FWD or REV command ON will start the motor to jog If the amp key is released the motor will decelerate to a stop Jogging operation follows the settings of Jogging frequency set by function code C20 Acceleration or deceleration time set by function code H54 Note Switching between the ready to jog and ready to run statuses is possible only ee when the inverter stops its output not possible when it is running the motor To jog the motor by the concurrent input of JOG and run command e g FWD the input time lag between those commands should be within 100 ms otherwise the inverter will not jog the motor If the FWD comman
295. r year Atmospheric 86 to 106 kPa during storage pressure 70 to 106 kPa during transportation Assuming a comparatively short time storage e g during transportation or the like 2 Even if the humidity is within the specified requirements avoid such places where the inverter will be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form Precautions for temporary storage 1 Do not leave the inverter directly on the floor 2 Ifthe environment does not satisfy the specified requirements wrap the inverter in an airtight vinyl sheet or the like for storage 3 Ifthe inverter is to be stored in high humidity environment put a drying agent such as silica gel in the airtight package described in item 2 o 9 m Q I S d o Z 27 8 5 2 2 Long term storage The long term storage method of the inverter varies largely according to the environment of the storage site General storage methods are described below 1 The storage site must satisfy the requirements specified for temporary storage However for storage exceeding three months the ambient temperature range should be within the range from 10 to 30 C 14 to 86 F This is to prevent electrolytic capacitors in the inverter from deterioration 2 The package must be airtight to protect the inverter from moisture Add a drying agent inside the package to maintain the relative humidity inside the package within 7
296. ransition of Maintenance Information Basic key operations 1 With the menu displayed use N Q keys to select Maintenance information 5 HE 2 Press the G key to display the list of maintenance item codes e g 5_i 3 Use 9 2 keys to select the desired maintenance item then press the amp key The data of the corresponding maintenance item will appear 4 Press the e key to return to the list of maintenance items Press the 5 key again to return to the menu gu i Q Tip If the menu cannot switch to any other one set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode 3 3 6 Reading alarm information Alarm Information Menu 6 Alarm information in Programming mode shows the cause of the past 4 alarms as alarm codes Further it is also possible to display alarm information that indicates the status of the inverter when the alarm occurred Table 3 13 shows the contents of the alarm information and Figure 3 10 shows the status transition of the alarm information 3 22 3 3 Programming Mode LED monitor shows Item No Table 3 13 Alarm Information Contents Display contents Output frequency Description Output frequency before slip compensation Output current Present output current Output voltage Present output voltage Set frequency Present set frequency Rotational direction This shows the rotational direction of a run command being output forward reverse
297. reater than that when the standard capacity inverter is used 3 Starting torque around the output frequency 0 Hz in Figures 7 1 and 7 2 The maximum torque in a short time applies to the starting torque as it is 7 2 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters 4 Braking torque Curves d e and f in Figures 7 1 and 7 2 In braking the motor kinetic energy is converted to electrical energy and regenerated to the DC link bus capacitor reservoir capacitor of the inverter Discharging this electrical energy to the braking resistor produces a large braking torque as shown in curve e If no braking resistor is provided however only the motor and inverter losses consume the regenerated braking energy so that the torque becomes smaller as shown in curve d Models of 2 HP to 5 HP 3 phase 230 460 V are each available in a braking resistor built in type in which the braking torque equivalent to that of the optional braking resistor can be obtained without an optional resistor For more information refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 2 2 Braking resistor built in type When an optional braking resistor is used the braking torque is allowable only for a short time Its time ratings are mainly determined by the braking resistor ratings This manual and associated catalogs list the allowable values HP obtained from the average discharging loss and allowable values kWs obtained from the discharging capability that can be discharged at one tim
298. recommended configuration for the inverter and peripheral equipment Chapter 2 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS This chapter contains external views of the FRENIC Mini series and an overview of terminal blocks including a description of the LED display and keys on the keypad Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD This chapter describes inverter operation using the keypad The inverter features three operation modes Running Programming and Alarm modes which enable you to run and stop the motor monitor running status set function code data display running information required for maintenance and display alarm data Part 2 Driving the Motor Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC This chapter describes the main block diagrams for the control logic of the FRENIC Mini series of inverters Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS 485 COMMUNICATION OPTION This chapter describes an overview of inverter operation through the RS 485 communications facility Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual for details Part 3 Peripheral Equipment and Options Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT This chapter describes how to use a range of peripheral equipment and options FRENIC Mini s configuration with them and requirements and precautions for selecting wires and crimp terminals Part 4 Selecting Optimal Inverter Model Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES This chapter provides you with information about the inverter ou
299. relay OFF if short circuited contacts 0 1000 Inverter running RUN 1 1001 Frequency equivalence signal FAR 2 1002 Frequency level detection FDT 3 1003 Undervoltage detection signal LU 5 1005 Torque limiting Current limiting IOL 6 1006 Auto restart after recovery from instantaneous power failure IPF 9 39 T 1007 Early warning for motor overload OL 26 1026 Retry in operation TRY 30 1030 Lifetime alarm LIFE 35 1035 Inverter running RUN2 36 1036 Overload prevention control OLP 37 1037 Current detection ID 41 1041 Low level current detection IDL 99 1099 Alarm relay output for any alarm ALM E31 Frequency Detection 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz W Y 60 0 9 42 FDT Detection level E34 Overload Early Warning 0 Disable 0 01 A Y Y1 Nominal 9 42 Current Detection Current value of 1 to 200 of the rated inverter Y2 rated Low Current Detection current n e Level standard motor E35 Current Detection 0 01 to 600 00 0 01 s Y Y 10 00 9 42 Low Current Detection T Timer lt E39 Coefficient for Constant 0 000 to 9 999 0 001 Y Y 0 000 9 43 O Feeding Rate Time o E40 PID Display Coefficient A 999 to 0 00 to 999 0 01 Y Y 100 9 43 z E41 PID Display Coefficient B 999 to 0 00 to 999 0 01 X Y 0 00 9 43 Q E43 Monitor Item Selection 0 Speed monitor Select by E48 Y Y 0 9 43 gt 3 Output current a 4 Output voltage 9
300. requency with the lowest digit blinking Pressing J V keys again makes it possible to change the set frequency The new setting will be saved internally Even if the inverter is switched to any other frequency entry method and then returned to the keypad entry method the setting will be retained Further even turning OFF the inverter will automatically save the setting into the non volatile memory At the next time when the inverter is turned ON the setting will become the default frequency If you set function code F01 to 0 Keypad operation but do not select frequency setting 1 then C34 Q keys cannot be used for setting up the set frequency Pressing those keys will just display the currently selected set frequency To set up the set frequency from any other displayed items it is dependent on function code E48 data 4 5 or 6 LED monitor details Select speed monitor as listed in the following table 3 3 O U m O Z C D z 4 I m A m lt gt ju E48 data LED monitor details Select speed monitor Set frequency display Conversion of displayed value Output frequency before slip Frequency setting compensation Output frequency after slip Frequency setting compensation Set frequency Frequency setting Load shaft speed Load shaft speed setting Frequency setting x E50 Line speed Line speed setting Frequency setting x E50 Constant feeding rate time Constant fe
301. rheating PTC protection is activated and the inverter enters Alarm mode and issues the alarm 10Vdcl y Y 1 Resistor R2 250 C1 External t Y 4f I alarm Y Comparatot thermistor H27 La i Operation level Resistor Rp Jit ol V GE motor protection c z O a O Z Q O 0 m Qo The temperature at which the overheating protection is to be activated depends on the characteristics of the PTC thermistor As shown at the right the internal resistance of the thermistor will step up near the alarm temperature detection point Determine the operation level voltage V 1 with reference based on the variance in internal resistance PTC thermistor internal resistance Rp2 Rp4 4 Rp4 Rp Roc 2 Temperature Alarm temperature gt Calculate the reference voltage Vc1 using the equation shown below and set it to function code Substitute the internal resistance of the PTC thermistor at the alarm temperature with Rp to H27 obtain Vc1 250e Rp 250 Rp Ve gt Rit 250 Rp 250 Rp 9 58 x10 V 9 2 Details of Function Codes Communications Link Function selection This function enables the inverter to be managed i e to monitor the operation status or data set in the function codes to set the drive frequency and to manage the operation commands froma personal computer or PLC via RS 485 communication To select information in the inverter that is to be a
302. rier frequency the higher the noise level In an inverter whose carrier frequency can be changed lowering the carrier frequency can reduce the generation of electrical noise and result in a good balance with the audible noise of the motor under driving conditions A 7 3 Noise prevention examples Table A 2 lists examples of the measures to prevent noise generated by a running inverter Table A 2 Examples of Noise Prevention Measures device 1 AM radio Noise prevention measures 1 Install an LC filter at the power supply side of the inverter In some cases a capacitive filter may be used as a simple method 2 Install a metal conduit wiring between the motor and inverter Or use shielded wiring When operating an inverter noise enters into an AM radio broadcast 500 to 1500 kHz lt Possible cause gt The AM radio may receive noise radiated from wires at the power supply and output sides of the inverter LC filler Capacitive filter Note Minimize the distance between the LC filter and inverter as much as possible within 3 3ft 1m 1 Install inductive filters at the input and output sides of the inverter Inductive filler Ferrite ring Inductive filter Ferrite ring The number of turns of the zero phase reactor or ferrite ring should be as large as possible In addition wiring between the inverter and the zero phase reactor or ferrite ring should be as shor
303. ries of inverters features a built in braking transistor for inverters of 1 2 HP or larger which makes it possible for an optional braking resistor to be connected to increase the regenerative braking ability for conveyance and transportation machinery that requires strong braking power For inverters of 2 HP or larger it is also possible to select a model that incorporates a built in braking resistor LL Refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 2 2 Braking resistor built in type for details Trip free operation The remarkably improved current limiting function stall prevention ensures trip free operation even for impact loads Motor speed Load torque li I SOLE ALN PT AULRMLLUUULUQLLLLLLLAALLLLLULULLLLULULUAL LLLA Output current Jn nro ANAL WINN VIR EE MA NV 0 Time Figure 1 3 Example of Response for Impact Load Torque Stable operation even for a step load The slip compensation function ensures stable operation even when the motor load fluctuates step load Motor speed Load torque Jl AAU VUA ALL DULL BALL BULL QURLLULLULLLULAULULLLLALLLLLUULLULLLLLULLLALLULLLUULLULUL Output current Co 0 Time Figure 1 4 Example of Response for Step Load Torque Refer to the note in Figure 1 2 for the test configuration 1 1 i9 m o 9 IUlA OIN34H OL NOILONGOYLNI Reduced motor instability at low speed Fuji s unique control method improves voltage control performance and reduces motor instab
304. rre eee trennen eee HR EE e e eh eR es 4 14 4 8 PID Frequency Command Generator sessi enne nnne nnne nnns 4 16 viii Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS 485 COMMUNICATION OPTION 5 1 Overview on RS 485 Communication cccccecceesseesceesceeeceescesecesecesecaeceaecaeceaecsaecaeecaeeeseeeaeeneeseeeeereneaees 5 1 Sells Common specications ver eco Re ee eet e eie eee 5 2 5 1 2 Connector specifications nte eneee aee a a ar e naaa aR R a TE SETE SEE ESTs Rt nE 5 3 SA Gonnectlonz ee eet O IER a dT 5 3 Part 3 Peripheral Equipment and Options Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT 04d Configuring the FRENIC Mimit uie E A N R E A E E 6 1 6 2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals esses eene nennen rennen ennt 6 2 6 2 1 Recomrnerded Wites baeo IB Ape epa ate ceto UE Pe orte Ee e Peer He RE e e ete 6 4 6 22 Crimp terminals ete eptesbp nolueris 6 6 6 3 Peripheral Equipment zar RR REN RE Ud tds 6 7 6 4 Selecting Optionise ss cs te eed eit ern ER rex ee ens 6 13 6 4 Peripherfal equipment Opt Ons ie se eec de ede eet tt i e ie tu dava 6 13 6 4 2 Options for operation and communications sess eee 6 21 6 4 3 Extended installation kit options enne nennen enn 6 24 0 44 Metet optlons iode Ge T OR qd ati Rt atit eid 6 27 Part 4 Selecting Optimal Inverter Model Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES 7l Selecting Motors atid Inverters eei tertie e eee UR
305. rter Resistor 2502 Q ee ov 701 11 Analog common Common for analog input signals 13 12 C1 Isolated from terminals CM and Y1E 8 4 Terminal Specifications Related Functions function codes Since weak analog signals are handled these signals are especially susceptible to the external noise effects Route the wiring as short as possible within 66 ft 20 m and use shielded wires In principle ground the shielding layer of the shielded wires if effects of external inductive noises are considerable connection to terminal 11 may be effective As shown in Figure 8 1 ground the single end of the shield to enhance the shielding effect Use a twin contact relay for weak signals if the relay is used in the control circuit Do not connect the relay s contact to terminal 11 When the inverter is connected to an external device outputting the analog signal a malfunction may be caused by electric noise generated by the inverter If this happens according to the circumstances connect a ferrite core a toroidal core or an equivalent to the device outputting the analog signal and or connect a capacitor having the good cut off characteristics for high frequency between control signal wires as shown in Figure 8 2 Do not apply a voltage of 7 5 VDC or higher to terminal C1 Doing so could damage the internal control circuit a gS on o z lt Shielded wires Control circuit gt Canin a
306. rter output for motor protection H265 H27 S S thermistor 7 amp i Overtoad Warning signal can be output based on the set level before the inverter trips F10 F12 E34 learly warning Related transistor output OL E85 P99 Retry function When the inverter trips and stop the inverter output this function automatically resets the tripping state oa HO5 and restarts running Waiting time before resetting and the number of retry times can be set Activated when the motor is tnpped with the following trip codes Ot 1 OCE OCF BU I Due DUI OH I ORY dbH OL OLU Installation Shall be free from corrosive gases flammable gases oil mist dusts and direct sunlight Indoor use only location Pollution degree 2 when the Low Voltage Directives are used Ambienttemp 10 to 50 C 14 1o 122 F 10 to 40 C 14 to 104 F when inverters are installed side by side without clearance Ambient humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation _ p 5 Altitude If the altitude exceeds 6 600 ft 2000 m 6 2 6 insulate the interface circuit from the main power 6 601 to 9 800 2 001 to 3 000 Decreases supply to conform to the Low Voltage Directives Vibration 0 12 fi 3 mm vibration width 2 to less than 9 Hz 322 ft s 98 m s 9 to less than 20 Hz 6 6 ftis 2 m s 20 to less than 55 Hz 3 3 fUs 1 m s 55 to less than 200 Hz B Ambient temp 25 to 70 C 13 to 158 F E Ambient 5 to 95 R
307. rward if OFF it decelerates the motor to a stop m Runreverse REV Function code E98 E99 data 99 If the REV is turned ON the inverter runs the motor in reverse if OFF it decelerates the motor to a stop Acceleration Time 2 Refer to F07 Deceleration Time 2 Refer to F08 Refer to the descriptions of function codes F07 and F08 9 38 9 2 Details of Function Codes E20 and E27 Status Signal Assignment to Y1 30A 30B and 30C E20 to E27 may assign output signals listed below to terminals Y1 transistor switch and 30A 30B and 30C mechanical relay contacts which are general purpose programmable output terminals These function codes may also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define the property of those output terminals so that the inverter logic may interpret either the ON or OFF status of each terminal as active Terminals 30A 30B and 30C are mechanical relay contacts In the normal logic if an alarm occurs the relay will be excited so that 30A and 30C will be short circuited signaling an occurrence of the error to external equipment On the other hand in the negative logic the relay will cut off the excitation current to open 30A and 30C This may be useful for the implementation of failsafe power systems The default setting is normal logic that is Active ON To assign negative logic input to any input terminal set the function code to the value of
308. s Enable the current limiter during constant speed operation Enable the current limiter during acceleration and constant speed operation m Limiting level F44 Select the level at which the current limiter will work Data setting range 20 to 200 Percentage ratio of rated current of the inverter f Note The current limiting feature selected by F43 and F44 are implemented by aia software so an operational delay may occur To avoid the delay use the current limiter hardware simultaneously H12 1 e Ifan overload is applied when the limiting level is set extremely low the inverter will immediately lower its output frequency This may cause an overvoltage trip or dangerous turnover of the motor rotation due to undershooting Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Discharging capability Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Allowable loss These function codes configure the electronic thermal overload relay to protect the braking resistor from overheating Set the discharging capability and allowable average loss of braking resistors to F50 and F51 respectively Those values differ depending upon the specifications of the braking resistor Refer to the tables on the next page For built in braking resistors you may set 0 and 0 000 to F50 and F51 respectively Doing so will automatically apply the settings given in the table on the next page Refer to Chapter 7 Section 7 2 Selecting a Baking Resistor for deta
309. s refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 8 Details of Protective Functions Figure 3 1 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes If the inverter is turned ON it automatically enters Running mode making it possible to start or stop the motor To make the transition between those operation modes you need to press the specified keys as shown below except at the occurrence of an alarm If an alarm occurs in Running mode the inverter will automatically switch to Alarm mode Power ON Setting of function codes Run Stop of motor Monitor of running status Monitor of running status I O signal states and maintenance info Hi z P4 N P UJ P4 i E 4 Ly lg Tt r Occurrence N x r 2 4 R ofanalamm DNE PT Press this key if an N 4 alarm has occurred Display of alarm status Figure 3 1 Status Transition between Operation Modes 3 1 o Q m o Z c Er Z 4 I m A m lt gt ju The figure below shows the transition between the running status monitoring screens in Running mode that between the menu screens in Programming mode and that between the alarm code screens in Alarm mode Pier OM Running Mode Monitoring of running status Speed monitor Hz I Output current A Input power kW Output voltage V PID process command PID feedback value E g 959 Ge key 3 Timer s
310. s express the function code data Set Frequency Internal control command for inverter logic High limiter Limits peak value by a constant or by data set to the function code Switch controlled by an internal control command In the example shown at the left the link operation command LE is assigned to one of the digital input terminals from X1 to X3 which then controls the switch Low limiter Limits the bottom value by a constant or by data set to the function code Low pass filter Features appropriate characteristics by changing the time constant through the function code data do 0 Zero limiter Keeps data from dropping to a negative value AND logic In normal logic systems only if A ON and B ON then C ON Otherwise C OFF Gain multiplier for set frequencies given by current and or voltage input or for analog output signals C AxB OR logic In normal logic systems if any inputs are ON then C ON Only if all inputs are OFF then C OFF C 4 c c A B A B Adder for 2 signals or values C A B If B is negative then C A B NOT logic In normal logic systems if A ON then B OFF and vice versa UJ r Q e z gt EU 2 e O A Q e z 4 D o Q O 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Generator x SIIEJ P JO uoneoiunulluoo Ggp SM JO jenuew sJesn BU 0j 18j83J S8POO uoijounj paj
311. s card and remote keypad together with remote operation extension cable enables you to easily operate the inverter from a remote location such as outside the control panel where the inverter is installed LL Refer to Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS 485 COMMUNICATION OPTION and Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT for details Wide variations The wide range of models available in the FRENIC Mini series of inverters is certain to flexibly meet your various system needs The 460 V series is available in addition to the 230 V series 3 phase single phase Models with built in EMC filter and built in braking resistors are also available An optional RS 485 communications card enables your system to feature network driven management Refer to Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS for details Global products FRENIC Mini series of inverters are designed for use in global market in conformity with the global standards listed below All standard models conform to the EC Directive CE Marking UL standards UL Listed and Canadian standards cUL Listed All standard FRENIC Mini inverters conform to European and North American Canadian standards enabling standardization of the specifications for machines and equipment used at home and abroad Ifa model with a built in EMC filter is used the model conforms to the European EMC Directive gt GEPR FT EC Directives CE making TUV C A x UL standard cUL certification
312. s equipped with series connected brakes Geared motors If the power transmission mechanism uses an oil lubricated gearbox or speed changer reducer then continuous motor operation at low speed may cause poor lubrication Avoid such operation Inrunning Synchronous It is necessary to take special measures suitable for this motor type Contact special motors your Fuji Electric representative for details motors Single phase motors are not suitable for inverter driven variable speed Single phase operation Use three phase motors motors Even a single phase inverter provides three phase output so use a three phase motor Use the inverter within the ambient temperature range from 10 to 50 C 14 to 122 F The heat sink and braking resistor of the inverter may become hot under Environ i a i mental Installation certain operating conditions so install the inverter on nonflammable po location material such as metal conditions Ensure that the installation location meets the environmental conditions specified in Chapter 8 Section 8 5 Operating Environment and Storage Environment Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or Installing an residual current operated protective device RCD ground fault circuit MCCB or interrupter GFCI with overcurrent protection in the primary circuit of RCD GFCI the inverter to protect the wiring Ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equ
313. s obtained by the test setup in the Fuji laboratory where each inverter drives a single motor Table 6 6 Rated Current Sensitivity of Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter GFCIs Power Applicable Rated iy ps Wiring length and current sensitivity supply motor of applicable voltage rating motor 328 ft 656 ft 984 ft HP A 100 m 200 m 300 m 1 8 1 4 1 2 Three 1 phase 2 200mA 230 V 3 5 7 5 10 1 2 1 Three 2 phase 3 500mA 460 V 5 7 5 10 1 8 Single 14 phase 1 2 230 V 1 200mA 2 3 Values listed above were obtained using Fuji GFCI EG or SG series applied to the test setup The rated current of applicable motor rating indicates values for Fuji standard motor 4 poles 50 Hz and 230 V 3 phase The leakage current is calculated based on grounding of the single wire for 230V A type and the neutral wire for 460V Y type power lines Values listed above are calculated based on the static capacitance to the earth when the 600V class of vinyl insulated IV wires are used in a metal conduit laid directly on the earth Wiring length is the total length of wiring between the inverter and motor If more than one motor is to be connected to a single inverter the wiring length should be the total length of wiring between the inverter and motors 6 10 6 3 Peripheral Equipment 2 Surge killers A surge killer eliminates surge currents induced by light
314. s on the LED Monitor 7 5 1 i A A J Li S 5 2 E b 5 K H T F 3 Er C E L L u LI 4 4 d c M 7 V if 5 5 E E n n W Jj 6 5 F E o e X 7 7 G L P F y ind 8 5 H H q q Z E deor epe ee ER l i Repeat function of keys 9 amp 2 keys have a repeat function which helps you change displayed data speedily as follows Usually you press J keys once to increase or decrease the displayed value by 1 respectively If you hold down either key so as to activate the repeat function the displayed value will keep changing in steps of 1 speedily Note that when changing some function code data during running of the inverter not always possible the displayed data will keep changing more slowly This is to ensure safe and stable operation 2 3 2 o Zz 2 m Q gt Z 0 TU c z O a O Z 7 m Continuous holding down function for Program Reset amp key Holding down the amp key longer approx one second or longer moves the cursor on the LED monitor In Running mode the cursor moves along digits in Programming mode it moves not only along digits but to the next function code B Simultaneous keying Simultaneous keying means depressing two keys at the same time expressed by FRENIC Mini supports simultaneous keying as listed below For example the expression J keys stands for pressing the J key while holding down the 6 key Operatio
315. s to switch the motor drive power source to the commercial power lines after the motor has come to a complete stop Also ensure that voltage is never mistakenly applied to the inverter output terminals due to unexpected timer operation or similar 2 Drive more than one motor selectively by a single inverter 3 Selectively cut off the motor whose thermal overload relay or equivalent devices have been activated 6 7 Driving the motor using commercial power lines MCs can also be used to switch the power source of the motor driven by the inverter to a commercial power source Select the MC so as to satisfy the rated currents listed in Table 6 1 which are the most critical RMS currents for using the inverter For switching the motor drive source between the inverter output and commercial power lines use the MC of class AC3 specified by JIS C8325 in the commercial line side 1 2 Connection example and criteria for selection of circuit breakers Figure 6 2 shows a connection example for MCCB or GFCI with overcurrent protection in the inverter input circuit Table 6 5 lists the rated current for the MCCB and corresponding inverter models Table 6 6 lists the applicable grades of GFCI sensitivity ANWARNING Insert an MCCB or GFCI with overcurrent protection recommended for each inverter for its input circuits Do not use an MCCB or GFCI of a higher rating than that recommended Doing so could result in a fire
316. seceseceeecaeeeseeeeeeeeeeereeereneeneenaees 3 13 3 3 3 Monitoring the running status Drive Monitoring ccceeceseeeeesceeceeeeeeeeeseeeneeneeeeeeeeeneeeeensees 3 14 3 3 4 Checking I O signal status I O Checking sese 3 17 3 3 5 Reading maintenance information Maintenance Information cceccecseesceeseeeeeeeeeeteeneeeteensees 3 21 3 3 6 Reading alarm information Alarm Information eese eere 3 22 BA Alam Mod eC E 3 26 3 4 1 Releasing the alarm and transferring the inverter to Running mode sss 3 26 3 4 2 Displaying the alarm history sss enne nnne nennt 3 26 3 4 3 Displaying the running information when an alarm occurs ssseseseeeeneeenene 3 27 3 4 4 Transferring to Programming mode ssssssssssessssseseeeee ener nennen enn 3 27 Part 2 Driving the Motor Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC 4 1 Symbols Used in the Block Diagrams and their Meanings sssssesseeeeenenenenee 4 1 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Generator ener nennen nnne 4 2 4 3 Drive Command Generators ifs eo teer eb e i der e a e aee eed 4 4 44 Terminal Command Decoders eee d tee e e ER Ee EXTR RAE UMS Yen 4 6 4 5 Digital Output Selector eee Hr eee teeta d e Red 4 10 4 6 Analog Output FMA Selector 0 ec ceccesecssecssecseeeseeeneeeeeseeenecseeeeesaeenseceecaecnaecaaecaeeeaeeeaeeaeeceesereeas 4 12 44 Drive Command Controller
317. ses medical uses or transportation When the product is to be used with any machinery or equipment on which lives depend or with machinery or equipment which could cause serious loss or damage should this product malfunction or fail ensure that appropriate safety devices and or equipment are installed B Precautions for Use In running general purpose motors Driving a 460V general purpose motor When driving a 460V general purpose motor with an inverter using extremely long wires damage to the insulation of the motor may occur Use an output circuit filter OFL if necessary after checking with the motor manufacturer Fuji motors do not require the use of output circuit filters because of their good insulation Torque characteristics and temperature rise When the inverter is used to run a general purpose motor the temperature of the motor becomes higher than when it is operated using a commercial power supply In the low speed range the cooling effect will be weakened so decrease the output torque of the motor If constant torque is required in the low speed range use a Fuji inverter motor or a motor equipped with an externally powered ventilating fan Vibration When an inverter driven motor is mounted to a machine resonance may be caused by the natural frequencies of the machine system Note that operation of a 2 pole motor at 60 Hz or higher may cause abnormal vibration The use of a rubber coupl
318. shaft speed r min line speed ft min m min and contrast feeding rate time min which can be selected by setting up function code E48 2 These PID related information will appear only when the inverter is under the PID control Refer to Section 3 22 3 This will appear only when timer operation is enabled by setting up function code C21 Refer to Chapter 9 Section 9 2 3 C codes Control functions of frequency Figure 3 3 Monitor Item Selection Example Table 3 2 lists the display items for the speed monitor that can be chosen with function code E48 Table 3 2 Display Items on the Speed Monitor Speed monitor items Output frequency before slip compensation Hz Factory default Function code E48 data Meaning of Displayed Value Pre slip compensation frequency Output frequency after slip compensation Hz Frequency actually being outputted Set frequency Hz Final set frequency Load shaft speed r min Display value Output frequency Hz x E50 Line speed ft min m min Display value Output frequency Hz x E50 Constant feeding rate time min E50 Output frequency x E39 Display value Output frequencies contained in these formulas are output frequencies before slip compensation 3 6 3 2 Running Mode 3 2 4 Jog inch the motor In Running mode pressing 69 F e keys at the same time simultaneous keying can make the inverter ready
319. signal terminals under communication control There are two control circuit input displays under communications link control display with ON OFF of the LED segment and in hexadecimal format for input commanded from RS 485 communications link The content is similar to that of the control circuit I O signal terminal status display however XF and XR are added as inputs and nothing is assigned as output terminals Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual for details on command inputs through RS 485 communication 3 3 Programming Mode 3 3 5 Reading maintenance information Maintenance Information Menu 5 Maintenance information in Programming mode contains information necessary for performing maintenance on the inverter Table 3 12 lists the maintenance information display items and Figure 3 9 shows the status transition for maintenance information LED monitor shows Table 3 12 Maintenance Display Items Display contents Accumulated run time Description Shows the accumulated power ON time of the inverter Unit thousands of hours When the total ON time is less than 10 000 hours display 0 001 to 9 999 it is possible to check data in hourly units When the total time is 10 000 hours or more display 10 00 to 65 53 the display will change to units of 10 hours When the total time exceeds 65 535 hours the display will be reset to 0 and the count will start again DC link bus voltage Sh
320. so be used asa preset amount for the PID process command in addition to that of function code J02 Calculate the setting data of the process command using the equation below Process command data 96 set multistep frequency maximum output frequency x 100 Selecting feedback Select either analog input terminal 12 or C1 for the PID control feedback signal terminal Refer to function codes E60 to E62 for details Conversion factor for indication and monitoring of PID value To monitor the PID process command and its feedback set the conversion factor used for transformation between the PID control amount such as temperature and numerals expressing the value Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for details on the conversion factor and to E43 for details on monitoring Gain and bias settings for the PID command As with the drive frequency command gain and bias can be set for the PID command LL Refer to function codes C51 and C52 for details c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo m Gain J03 Sets the gain for the PID processor Data setting range 0 000 to 10 00 x times P Proportional control An operation using an output frequency 4 proportional to deviation is called P Deviation operation which outputs an operational amount proportional to deviation i Time through it cannot eliminate deviation b i alone T oo o Time Gain determines the system response level for t
321. splay the codes for the I O check item list e g 77 3 Use W O keys to select the desired I O check item then press the G key The corresponding I O check data will appear For control circuit I O terminals use J amp keys to select one of the two different display methods 4 Press the e key to return to the I O check item list Press the G5 key again to return to the menu Tip Ifthe menu cannot switch to any other one set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode 3 3 Programming Mode 1 Displaying control I O signal terminals The I O signal status of control circuit terminals may be displayed with ON OFF of the LED segment or in hexadecimal display E Display I O signal status with ON OFF of the LED segment As shown in Table 3 10 and the figure below segments a to e on LEDI light when the digital input terminals FWD REV X1 X2 and X3 are short circuited ON with the terminal CM and do not light when they are opened OFF Segment a on LED3 lights when the circuit between output terminal Y1 and terminal Y1E is closed ON and does not light when the circuit is open OFF LED4 is for terminals 30A 30B 30C Segment a on LED4 lights when the circuit between terminals 30C and 30A are short circuited ON and does not light when they are opened Note This LED monitor displays hardware terminal information which means that it may not i light when it is in reverse logic refer to
322. t There are two kinds of filters for 460V series Choose a desired one according to the purpose of use gt ee ee This makes communication ta a PLC or personal computer system easy lt Motor Used to connect the RS 485 communications card with the remote keypad USB RS 485 extension cable converter etc ed aa E gr a a Ag E iY Remote keypad Used when performing inverter remote operations with the remote keypad ee adaptor Allows copying data to multiple inverters with easy connection to the inverter body Used for the connector replacement of the copy adaptor UU ERE EE T WC e E E verter support Inverter support loader software Windows based that makes setting of function codes easy er software HIRIE amp i DEE He mou ecc E a eec HR ecu csi aug a c ER USB RS 485 Used to connect the RS 485 communications card with a USB port of your personal compuler converter Manufacturer System Sacom Sales Corp Phone 81 3 5623 5933 Web site http Wwww sacom co Jp NEMA kit protects the inverter body with the structure that conforms to the NEMA1 standard approved as UL TYPE1 Se a aa Permit change of protective structure replacement of Fuji s previous inverter model and installation on the DIN rails etc Figure 6 1 Quick Overview of Options 6 1 6 2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals This section contains information needed to select wires for connecting the inverter to commercial p
323. t also to block noise penetration and radiation Corresponding to the main circuit voltage the grounding work should be No 3 grounding work 300 VAC or less and special No 3 grounding work 300 to 600 VAC Each ground wire is to be provided with its own ground or separately wired to a grounding point Connection terminals Metal conduit pipe hl Figure A 8 Grounding of Metal Conduit Pipe Figure A 9 Treatment of Braided Wire of Shielded Wire Metal conduit pipe Inverter Inverter 2 Control panel The system control panel containing an inverter is generally made of metal which can shield noise radiated from the inverter itself When installing other electronic devices such as a programmable logic controller in the same control panel be careful with the layout of each device If necessary arrange shield plates between the inverter and peripheral devices A 6 App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise 3 Anti noise devices To reduce the noise propagated through the electrical circuits and the noise radiated from the main circuit wiring to the air a line filter and power supply transformer should be used refer to Figure A 10 Line filters are available in these types the simplified type such as a capacitive filter to be connected in parallel to the power supply line and an inductive filter to be connected in series to the power supply line and the orthodox type such as an LC
324. t as possible within 3 3ft 1m When further improvement is necessary install LC filters ni ge LC EN supply Input side Output side 2 AM When operating an inverter radio noise enters into an AM radio broadcast 500 to 1500 kHz transformer Inverter Possible cause The AM radio may receive noise radiated from the power line at the power supply side of the inverter 1 The radiation noise of the wiring can be reduced 2 The conduction noise to the power supply side can be reduced Note Sufficient improvement may not be expected in narrow regions such as between mountains 1 The radiation noise of the wiring can be reduced Tele phone ina common private residence ata distance of 131 ft 40 m Photo electric relay App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise Table A 2 Continued Target 8 Phenomena Noise prevention measures device Notes When driving a ventilation fan with an inverter noise enters a telephone in a private residence at a distance of 131 ft 40m Private house L 40m lt Possible cause gt A high frequency leakage current from the inverter and motor flowed to grounded part of the telephone cable shield During the current s return trip it flowed through a grounded pole transformer and noise entered the telephone by electrostatic induction A photoelectric relay malfunctioned when the inverter ru
325. t it to the terminals 2 and 1 of the braking resistor If you choose not to use the thermal relay incorporated in the braking resistor set up the overheat protection device using the values given in the table below Continuous braking Repetitive braking Braking torque Period 100 sec or Power Braking Ca 100 less supply Inverter type resistor pacity Discharg Bd Allowable De voltage type W ing act average ae capability s du ED kWs FRNF50C1m 2U FRN001C1m 2U FRN002C1m 2U FRN003C1m 2U FRN005C1m 2U FRNF50C1m 4U FRN001C1m 4U FRN002C1m 4U FRN003C1m 4U FRN005C1m 4U FRNFSOCIM 7U FRNOO1C1m 7U FRN002C1m 7U FRN003C1m 7U Note 1 A box WW in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure 2 Asterisks in the above table denote the following 21 Braking resistor built in type None Standard 9 2 Details of Function Codes 10 ED Models Continuous braking Repetitive braking Braking torque Period 100 sec or Power Braking is Ca 100 less supply Inverter type resistor pacity Discharg Allowable voltage type W ing Braking average Dury capability prs loss ods 0 Ew 1 359 1 eos EP FRNF50CIN 2U 250 37 DB0 75 2C 100 200 50 0 075 Three FR
326. t up the set frequency monitor the running status and jog the motor S curve acceleration deceleration weak strong To reduce the impact on the inverter driven machine during acceleration deceleration the inverter gradually accelerates decelerates the motor at the both ends of the acceleration deceleration zones like a figure of S letter Related function code H07 Slip compensation control A mode of control in which the output frequency of an inverter plus an amount of slip compensation is used as an actual output frequency to compensate for motor slippage Related function code P09 Stall A behavior of a motor when it loses speed by tripping of the inverter due to overcurrent detection or other malfunctions of the inverter Start frequency The minimum frequency at which an inverter starts its output not the frequency at which a motor starts rotating Related function code F23 Starting torque Torque that a motor produces when it starts rotating or the drive torque with which the motor can run a load Simultaneous keying To simultaneously press the 2 keys on the keypad This presents the special function of inverters Stop frequency The output frequency at which an inverter stops its output Related function code F25 G 5 Glossary Thermal time constant The time needed to activate the electronic thermal overload protection after the preset operation level current continuously flows This
327. t voltage 4 mA 20 mA Analog input current For ordinary set frequency J01 0 For PID control J01 1 or 2 If IVS is Set frequency If IVS is Selected PID control PID operation J01 Normal 1 Normal operation Normal operation Inverse 1 Normal operation Inverse operation 2 Inverse operation Inverse 2 Inverse operation Normal m Enable communications link LE Function code data 24 Turning ON the LE command selects link operation The inverter will run the motor with the frequency command or drive command given via the RS 485 communications facility defined by function code H30 If the LE command is not assigned to any terminal the inverter will interpret LE as being always ON Refer to Chapter 4 Sections 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Generator 4 3 Drive Command Generator and 4 4 Terminal Command Decoders and the RS 485 Communication User s Manual for more details m Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST Function code data 33 Turning ON the PID RST command resets the PID integral and differential components m Hold PID integral component PID HLD Function code data 34 Turning ON the PID HLD command holds the current inverter output voltage constant by suppressing an increase of PID integral component m Run forward FWD Function code E98 E99 data 98 Ifthe FWD command is turned ON the inverter runs the motor fo
328. ta Checking Status Transition Diagram Changes made only to F01 F05 E52 Basic key operation The basic key operation is the same as for Menu 2 Data setting To monitor Menu 2 Data checking it is necessary to set function code E52 data to 1 Tip I Function code data check mode or 2 Full menu mode 3 3 3 Monitoring the running status Drive Monitoring Menu 3 Drive monitoring is used to check the running status during maintenance and test running The display items for Drive monitoring are listed in Table 3 5 Using keys you may check those items in succession Figure 3 7 shows the status transition diagram for Drive monitoring LED monitor Table 3 5 Drive Monitoring Display Items Contents Description F UL Output fequeriey Hz Output frequency before slip compensation J Ui Output frequency Hz Output frequency after slip compensation oru SS Oulu A Present output current current 3 na erm Output V Present output voltage voltage joi Set frequency Hz Present set frequency J L5 Rotational N A Displays the rotational direction specified by a run direction command being outputted forward reverse stop 3 UT Running N A Displays the running status in hex format Refer to status Displaying running status on the page 3 16 3 LU Load shaft r min The unit for load shaft speed is r min and that for line speed speed m min is m min line speed Display
329. tage Disclaimer This document provides you with a translated summary of the Guideline of the Ministry of International Trade and Industry September 1994 It is intended to apply to the domestic market only It is only for reference for the foreign market Agency of Natural Resource and Energy of Japan published the following two guidelines for suppressing harmonic noise in September 1994 1 Guideline for suppressing harmonics in home electric and general purpose appliances 2 Guideline for suppressing harmonics by customers receiving high voltage or special high voltage Assuming that electronic devices generating high harmonics will be increasing these guidelines are to establish regulations for preventing high frequency noise interference on devices sharing the power source These guidelines should be applied to all devices that are used on the commercial power lines and generate harmonic current This section gives a description limited to general purpose inverters B 1 Application to general purpose inverters 1 Guideline for suppressing harmonics in home electric and general purpose appliances Our three phase 230V inverters of 5 HP or less FRENIC Mini series were the products of which were restricted by the Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics in Home Electric and General purpose Appliances established in September 1994 and revised in October 1999 issued by the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry The above restricti
330. takenly assign the WE KP command to any terminal function code data will be no longer edited To cancel such an undesired assignment turn the WE KP command ON once by short circuiting between the WE KP assigned terminal and terminal CM and then reassign a correct command to the terminal m Cancel PID control Hz PID Function code data 20 Turning the Hz PID command ON OFF enables or disables the PID control If the PID control is disabled with the Hz PID being OFF the inverter runs the motor with the frequency manually set by any of the multistep keypad or analog input Hz PID Selected function OFF Enable PID control ON Disable PID control Enable manual settings Refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 8 PID Frequency Command Generator for details m Switch normal inverse operation IVS Function code data 21 Turning the IVS command ON OFF switches the output frequency control between normal proportional to the set frequency components and inverse operation for the PID process or manually set frequencies To select the inverse operation switch the IVS command to ON When the PID control is enabled turning the IVS command ON inverts the PID process control selected by function code J01 For example if the PID process control is normal turning it ON switches it to inverse or vice versa c Z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Output frequency Inverse 10096 0 OV 10V Analog inpu
331. tall a capacitive filter at the input side of the inverter Ground the 0 V common line of the DC power supply of the proximity limit switch through a capacitor to the box body of the machine Power supply Proximity limit switch A 10 1 Ifa weak current circuit at the malfunctioning side is observed the measures may be simple and economical 1 Noise generated in the inverter can be reduced 2 The switch is superseded by a proximity limit switch of superior noise immunity such as a magnetic type device Pressure sensor Position detector pulse generator PG Program mable logic controller PLC App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise Table A 2 Continued Phenomena A pressure sensor malfunctioned Power supply Shielded wire Box body lt Possible cause gt The pressure sensor may malfunction due to noise that came from the box housing through the shielded wire Erroneous pulse outputs from a pulse converter caused a shift in the stop position of a crane Inverter Curtain cable comme Lo Pulse generator m Possible cause gt Erroneous pulses may be outputted by induction noise since the power line of the motor and the signal line of the PG are bundled together The PLC program sometimes malfunctions ree 8 Signal source Power supply Power PLC supply Possible cause Since the p
332. tan Set frequency Gain Point B Bias Point A Analog Input 0 Bias Gain 100 reference reference point point The relations stated above are stated in the following expressions 1 If analog input lt bias reference point Frequency Setting 1 96 Bias F18 2 If analog input gt bias reference point Gain Bias Frequency Setting 1 l y 81 Gain reference point Bias reference point x Analog input Bias x Gain reference point Gain x Bias reference point Gain reference point Bias reference point _ C22 FI18 94 x Analog input 94 F18x C34 C32x C50 C34 C50 C34 C50 9 2 Details of Function Codes In the above expressions it is assumed that each function code expresses its data Example Setting the bias gain and its reference point when analog input range from 1 to 5 VDC is selected for the frequency command 1 Point A If the analog input is at 1 V the set frequency is 0 Hz Therefore the bias is 0 F18 0 Since 1 V is the bias reference point and it is equal to 10 of 10 V then the bias reference point should be 10 C50 10 Point B If the analog input is at 5 V the set frequency comes to be the maximum value Therefore the gain is 100 C32 100 Since 5 V is the gain reference point and it is equal to 50 of 10 V then the gain reference point should be 50 C34 50 When using the function codes for settin
333. the current limiter of either software F43 Function select F44 Operation level or hardware H12 Current limit The minimum ON duration is 100 ms Using this signal allows the inverter to show an overload alarm on the display panel of the external equipment m Auto restart after recovery from instantaneous power failure IPF Function code data 6 This signal is turned ON during the period from when the inverter detects the undervoltage of the DC link bus and shuts down the output if auto restart after a recovery from momentary power failure is selected F14 4 or 5 until auto restarting the output frequency has recovered up to the set frequency At that moment of auto restarting this signal 1s turned OFF m Motor overload early warning OL Function code data 7 This signal is used to issue a motor overload early warning for enabling you to take corrective action before the inverter detects a motor overload OL 1 alarm and shuts down its output The motor properties are specified by function codes F10 and F12 Motor characteristics selection and thermal time constant for electronic thermal overload protection If a value calculated from the settings of F10 and F12 exceeds the detection level of the early warning set by function code E34 this signal is turned ON Normally the recommended set current level for E34 is 80 to 90 of the allowable continuous load current set by function code F11 Function code E34 is e
334. the inverter is running with a speed greater than 0 It switches ON when the inverter output frequency exceeds the start frequency of the motor It switches OFF when the output frequency is less than the start frequency or the inverter is DC braking the motor Tip If this signal is assigned to terminal Y1 in negative logic active OFF it can be used to indicate the inverter stopping its output m Frequency arrival signal FAR Function code data 1 This signal is turned ON when the difference between the output and set frequencies is within the allowable error zone prefixed to 2 5 Hz m Frequency detection FDT Function code data 2 This signal is turned ON when the output frequency of inverter has come to the frequency detection level specified by function code E31 It is turned OFF when the output frequency drops lower than the detection level for 1 Hz hysteresis band of the frequency comparator prefixed at 1 Hz m Undervoltage detection LU Function code data 3 This signal is turned ON when the voltage of the DC link bus of the inverter drops below the specified level or when the motor stops due to activation of the undervoltage protection feature undervoltage trip It is turned OFF if the DC link bus voltage exceeds the specified voltage m Torque limiting Current limiting IOL Function code data 5 This signal is turned ON when the inverter is limiting the motor drive current by activating
335. the main circuit wiring set them at right angles 8 33 8 8 Details of Protective Functions The table below lists the name of the protective functions description display of LED monitor whether alarms output or not at terminals 30A B C and related function codes If the LED monitor displays an alarm code remove the cause of activation of the alarm function by referring to FRENIC Mini Instruction Manual Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING Overcurrent protection Description During acceleration Stops the inverter output to protect the inverter from an overcurrent LED monitor displays resulting from overload During Stops the inverter output to protect deceleration the inverter from an overcurrent due E Durin to a short circuit in the output circuit tis running at constant speed Stops the inverter output to protect the inverter from an overcurrent due to a ground fault in the output circuit This protection is effective only when the inverter starts If you turn ON the inverter without removing the ground fault this protection may not work Alarm output 30A B C Related function code Overvoltage protection The inverter stops the inverter output upon detecting an overvoltage During acceleration condition 400 VDC for 3 phase 230 V and 1 phase 230 V series 800 VDC for 3 phase 460 V series in the DC link During deceleration During running at consta
336. the relationship between those frequency settings and the drive frequency to enable matching your system requirements Refer to function code F18 for details Forthe inputs to terminals 12 voltage and C1 current low pass filters can be enabled Refer to function codes C33 and C38 for details In addition to F01 Frequency command 1 C30 Frequency command 2 is also available To switch them use the terminal command Hz2 Hz1 For details of the Hz2 Hz1 refer to E01 to E03 Command Assignment to Terminals X1 to X3 Running Stopping and Rotational Direction Selects a source issuing a run command keypad or external control signal input If F02 7 0 2 or 3 the inverter can run the motor by un and 69 keys on the built in keypad The motor rotational direction can be specified in two ways either by control signal input F02 0 or by use of prefixed forward or reverse rotation F02 2 or 3 When F02 0 to specify the motor rotational direction by control signal input assign the commands FWD and REV to terminals FWD and REV respectively Turn on the FWD or REV for the forward or reverse direction respectively and then press the amp key to run the motor If F02 1 the inverter can run the motor by control signal inputs To specify the motor rotational direction assign the commands FWD and REV to terminals FWD and REV respectively Turn on the FWD or REV for the forward or reverse
337. the set frequency if each expression is for one of the set data for the constant feeding rate time load shaft speed or line speed it is the output frequency if each expression is for the output status monitor If the constant feeding rate time is 999 9 min or more or the denominator on the right in the first equation is 0 then the number 999 9 will be displayed PID Display Coefficient A PID Display Coefficient B E40 or E41 sets the conversion factor to equal an indicated value process amount with the target and feedback values in PID control Data setting range 999 to 0 00 to 999 for conversion factors A and B Data setting and operation m Target commanded and feedback values in PID control Set the maximum and minimum PID indication values to function code E40 factor A and E41 factor B respectively Calculate the indication value using the equation below Indication value Target or feedback value x Factor A B B Displayed value Target value or 0 100 feedback value Monitor Item Selection Selects the monitoring item to be displayed on the LED monitor When turning ON power to the inverter or after changing function code E43 the inverter will indicate the selected item on the LED monitor Data for E43 Function Monitored items Speed monitor item selected by the sub item of function code E48 Inverter output current Inverter output voltage Inverter input power PID command value P
338. thermal overload relay F12 Electronic Thermal Motor Overload Protection Thermal time constant F14 Restart mode after momentary F14 Restart after Instantaneous Power Replace the data of FVR C11S from 2 to 4 of F15 F16 F17 Gain Frequency setting C32 Analog Input Adjustment Gain for Analog input is applied to 12 so that the gain terminal input 12 Gain for set frequency is equal to the gain for 12 Setting differs each other Refer to Chapter 9 C34 Analog Input Adjustment Gain for FgUNCTION CODES for details terminal input 12 Gain reference point F18 Bias frequency F18 Bias for Frequency Command 1 F01 C50 Bias Frequency command 1 Bias reference point F20 DC brake Starting freq F20 DC Braking Start frequency Set at 3 Hz F21 DC brake Braking level F21 DC Braking Braking level F22 DC brake Braking time F22 DC Braking Braking time F23 F25 F26 Motor Sound Carrier frequency F27 Motor Sound Sound tone F30 FM terminal Voltage adjustment F30 Terminal FMA Gain to output F31 FM terminal Select F31 Terminal FMA Monitor object The selection for the data differs each other For IL MEN details refer to Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES F36 30Ry operation mode E27 30A B C Terminal Function If F36 0 set E27 99 if F36 1 set E27 1099 ELA ER RI Mechanical relay contacts E01 The selection for the data differs each other For E02 details refer to Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES Coi C
339. time magnification factor si g are inserted corresponds to tr Surge voltage tr Tus gt F Surge voltage magnification factor Volage Wy coe s S A 9e j Magnification factor against DC voltage E 3 7 3 wire 5 5mm cable 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Cable length m Excerpt from J IEE Japan Vol 107 No 7 1987 Figure C 2 Measured Example of Wiring Length and Peak Value of Motor Terminal Voltage Effect of surge voltages The surge voltages originating in LC resonance of wiring may be applied to the motor input terminals and depending on their magnitude sometimes cause damage to the motor insulation When the motor is driven with a 230 V class inverter the dielectric strength ofthe insulation is no problem since the peak value at the motor terminal voltage increases twice due to the surge voltages the DC voltage is only about 300 V But in case of a 400 V class inverter the DC voltage is approximately 600 V and depending on the wiring length the surge voltages may greatly increase and sometimes result in damage to the insulation Countermeasures against surge voltages The following methods are countermeasures against damage to the motor insulation by the surge voltages and using a motor driven with a 400 V class inverter 1 Method using motors with enhanced insulation Enhanced insulation of a motor winding allows its surge proof strength to be improved 2 Method to suppress surge voltages
340. ting to running F37 Load Selection 0 Variable torque load N Y 1 9 27 Auto Torque Boost 1 Constant torque load Auto Energy Saving 2 Auto torque boost Operation 3 Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during acceleration and deceleration 4 Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during acceleration and deceleration 5 Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost during acceleration and deceleration F43 Current Limiter 0 Disable Y Y 2 Operation condition 4 n constant speed Disable during acceleration and deceleration 9 28 2 Atacceleration and in constant speed Disable during deceleration F44 Limiting level 20 to 200 The data is interpreted as the rated 1 96 Y Y 180 output current of the inverter for 100 F50 Electronic Thermal 0 To be set for braking resistor built in type 1 kWs Y Y 999 0 Overload Relay for 1 to 900 Note braking resistor 999 Disable 68 Discharging capability 3 F51 Allowable loss 0 000 Applied for built in braking resistor 0 001 kW Y Y 0 000 0 001 to 50 000 Note The default setting of function code F50 is 999 for standard models and 0 for braking resistor built in type E codes Extension Terminal Functions Change Code Name Data setting range Babe Unit when Pals Delo peter ment copy setting to running E01 Terminal Command To assign a negative logic input to a terminal set N Y 0 Assignme
341. tion code data Item Table 6 15 Transmission Specifications Specifications Communication SX protocol Modbus RTU Fuji general purpose protocol for exclusive use with the Conforming to Modicon s inverter protocol support loader software Modbus RTU Electrical EIA RS 485 specifications Number of units Host 1 unit Inverter 31 units connected Transmission 19200 9600 4800 and 2400 bps speed Synchronization Synchronous start stop system Transmission Half duplex method 3 Remote keypad TP E1 The keypad permits remote control of FRENIC Mini and function setting and display with copy function 6 4 Selecting Options 4 Extension cable for remote operation The extension cable connects the inverter with the remote keypad to enable remote operation of the inverter The cable is a straight wired type with RJ 45 jacks and its length is selectable from 16 4 9 8 and 3 3 ft 5 3 and 1 m Type Length ft m ECN CB 5S 16 4 5 D CB 3S 9 8 3 N 7 CB 1S 33 1 Unit inch mm Cable CB 5S pa Ifa aj epe L 196 85 1 97 L 50003 50mm 5 Copy adapter CPAD C1A The copy adapter can be easily connected to an inverter and is used to copy data to multiple inverters 6 Inverter support loader software FRENIC Loader is support software which enables the inverter to be operated via the RS 485 communications facility The main functions inc
342. tive logic input is allowed for data 98 and 99 Note that negative logic input can never be used for the motor drive commands FWD and REV fT Example using negative logic system UR Assigning multistep frequency 2 SS2 to terminal X1 is If function code E01 is set to 1 logic is normal Active ON Short circuiting terminals X1 and CM makes SS2 active If E01 is set to 1001 logic is negative Active OFF Opening the circuit between X1 and CM makes SS2 active Terminal function assignment and data setting m Select multistep frequency SS1 882 and SS4 Function code data 0 1 and 2 Switching digital input signals SS1 SS2 and SS4 ON OFF may switch the present set frequency to those defined by function codes C05 through C11 multistep frequencies With this the inverter may drive the motor at 8 different preset speeds The table below lists the frequencies that can be obtained by the combination of switching SS1 SS2 and SS4 In the column Selected frequency Other than multistep frequency represents the set frequencies defined by frequency command 1 F01 frequency command 2 C30 and others For details refer to the block diagram in Chapter 4 Section 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Generator Terminal X3 Terminal X2 Terminal X1 Function code E03 Function code E02 Function code E01 Selected frequency 2 SS4 1 SS2 0 SS1 Other than multistep frequency
343. tput frequency a Acceleration zone Deceleration zone o Set decel zone Set accel zone Maximum Output frequency Time Torque Output Accel decel torque Accel decel output HP Output frequency Base frequency Output frequency Maximum output frequency Base frequency Time Set Accel decel time Set the acceleration deceleration time giving due consideration to the load torque Refer to Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER i H27 The inverter features a hardware controlled output current limiter to protect it from an overload hazard The moment that the output current exceeds the limited level due to overload or other factor the inverter controls the output switching circuits so as to slow down the output frequency and suppress the output current momentarily 9 2 Details of Function Codes Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting Disable Enable This control of the switching circuits may cause an instantaneous reduction in motor output torque However instantaneous torque reduction may not be allowable in some systems when the system is in a short time overloaded state To solve this problem this function should be disabled and the system set up with a proper facility that is activated by the alarm output from the inverter when it detects an overcurrent CNote The same functions to limit the output current
344. tput torque characteristics selection procedure and equations for calculating capacities to help you select optimal motor and inverter models It also helps you select braking resistors vi Part 5 Specifications Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes specifications of the output ratings control system and terminal functions for the FRENIC Mini series of inverters It also provides descriptions of the operating and storage environment external dimensions examples of basic connection diagrams and details of the protective functions Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES This chapter contains overview lists of seven groups of function codes available for the FRENIC Mini series of inverters and details of each function code Appendices App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise App B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High Voltage App C Effect on Insulation of General purpose Motors Driven with 460 V Class Inverters App D Inverter Generating Loss App E Conversion from SI Units App F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires App G Replacement Information Glossary Icons The following icons are used throughout this manual Note This icon indicates information which if not heeded can result in the inverter not operating to full efficiency as well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which can result in accidents Tip This
345. tris 0min F kgf Ny r min ng 4 Acceleration torque Driving mode 2 A Nm J kg m7 A AN r min 9 55 At s NG GD kg m AN r min T kgf amp Neben 375 At s ng Braking mode VN a Ups ANGUS ie 9 55 ACG GD kg m AN r min y 375 At s T kgf m 5 Acceleration time Ji J5 ng kg m AN r min tM t o Nem 955 GDj GD n kg m AN r min Tw TrL ng kgf m 375 tacc s tacc s 7 6 Deceleration time J J2 eng kg m AN r min tM TL Ng Nem 9 55 tpgc S GD GD ng kg m AN r min TM Tr ng kgf m 375 tpgc S A 22 App F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires App F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires The tables below list the allowable current of IV wires HIV wires and 600 V class of cross linked polyethylene insulated wires B V wires Maximum allowable temperature 60 C 140 F Table F 1 a Allowable Current of Insulated Wires Allowable current Wiring outside duct Wiring in the duct Max 3 wires in one duct Wire size reference value 35 C 95 F 40 C 104 F 45 C 113 F 50 C 122 F 55 C 131 F 35 C 95 F 40 C 104 F 45 C 113 F 50 C 122 F inch mm up to 86 F 30 C lox0 91 lox0 82 lox0 71 10x0 58 10x0 40 lox0 63 lox0 57 lox0 49 lox0 40 lo A A A A A 0 034 22 115 94 a eo 72 65 46
346. uations depends on the load type 2 Obtaining the required force F Moving a load horizontally A simplified mechanical configuration is assumed as shown in Figure 7 7 If the mass ofthe carrier table is W kg the load is W kg and the friction coefficient of the ball screw is u then the friction force F N is expressed as follows which is equal to a required force for driving the load where g is the gravity acceleration 9 8 m s Then the required output torque around the motor shaft is expressed as follows 60 0 Wo W g p 2x NM NG N m 7 4 p m r m O d z O O v a gt r O O E gt z U z lt m A m E O S gt Q a m Qo m s Load Wo kg Nw r min Ball screw Figure 7 7 Moving a Load Horizontally 7 7 7 1 3 2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation When an object whose moment of inertia is J kg m rotates at the speed N r min it has the following kinetic energy zd men Beo a J 7 5 To accelerate the above rotational object the kinetic energy will be increased to decelerate the object the kinetic energy must be discharged The torque required for acceleration and deceleration can be expressed as follows 2n dN t N e 7 6 s em N m 7 6 This way the mechanical moment of inertia is an important element in the acceleration and deceleration First calculation method of moment of inertia is described
347. uency command 1 it is possible to define the relationship between the analog input and the set frequency arbitrarily by combining the settings for bias F18 bias reference point C50 gains C32 and C37 and gain reference points C34 and C39 as shown below Function code Function Data entry range Bias 100 00 to 100 00 Bias reference point 0 00 to 100 00 Gain for terminal 12 0 00 to 200 00 Gain reference point for terminal 12 0 00 to 100 00 Gain for terminal C1 0 00 to 200 00 Gain reference point for terminal C1 0 00 to 100 00 As illustrated in the graph below the relationship between the set frequency and analog input for frequency command 1 is shown by a straight line passing through points A and B The A 1s determined by the bias F18 and its reference point C50 The B is determined by the gain C32 or C37 and its reference point C34 or C39 The combination of C32 and C34 will apply for terminal 12 and that of C37 and C39 for terminal C1 The bias F18 and gain C32 or C37 should be set assuming the maximum frequency as 100 The bias reference point C50 and gain frequency point C34 or C39 should be set supposing the full scale 10 VDC or 20 mADC as 100 If the set frequency 1 is set with the built in potentiometer point B is prefixed at both the gain and its reference point being 10096 Note Analog input under the bias reference point is limited by the bias data n
348. uit failures 3 Cut off the inverter from the power source when the MCCB inserted in the power source side cannot cut it off for maintenance or inspection purpose For the purpose only it is recommended that you use an MC capable of turning the MC ON OFF manually m m O zi z 9 U m D T T r m o c T m z When your system requires starting stopping the motor s driven by the inverter with the MC the frequency of the starting stopping operation should be once or less per hour The more frequent the operation the shorter operation life of the MC and capacitor s used in the DC link bus due to thermal fatigue caused by the frequent charging of the current flow It is recommended that terminal commands FWD REV and HLD for 3 wire operation or the keypad be used for starting stopping the motor At the output side Insert an MC in the power output side of the inverter in order to v NUTS K Note 1 Prevent externally turned around current from being applied to the inverter power output terminals U V and W unexpectedly An MC should be used for example if a circuit that switches the motor driving power source between the inverter output and commercial power lines is connected to the inverter Tip As application of the external current to the inverter s secondary output circuits may break gt the Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors IGBTs MCs should be used in the power control system circuit
349. use the inverter to transfer to Alarm mode or trip m Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred F14 4 If an instantaneous power failure occurs when the inverter is in Running mode so that the inverter detects undervoltage of the DC link bus then the inverter saves the current output frequency When the power is recovered with any run command being ON the inverter will restart at the saved frequency During the instantaneous power failure if the motor speed slows down the current limiter facility of the inverter will be activated and automatically lower the output frequency Upon synchronization of the output frequency and motor speed the inverter accelerates up to the previous output frequency Refer to the figure F14 4 on the following page for details To synchronize the output frequency and motor speed the instantaneous overcurrent limiter H12 1 should be enabled This setting is optimal for operations in which the motor speed rarely slows down due to the heavy moment of inertia of its load even if the motor is coasting to a stop because of the instantaneous power failure m Restart at the start frequency F14 5 If an instantaneous power failure occurs when the inverter is in Running mode so that the inverter detects undervoltage of the DC link bus then the inverter immediately shuts down its outputs After the power is recovered entry of any run command will restart the inverter at the frequency s
350. ut 42 times that of the source voltage about 620V in case of an input voltage of 440 VAC The peak value of the output voltage is usually close to this DC voltage value But as there exists inductance L and stray capacitance C in wiring between the inverter and the motor the voltage variation due to switching the inverter elements causes a surge voltage originating in LC resonance and results in the addition of high voltage to the motor terminals Refer to Figure C 1 This voltage sometimes reaches up to about twice that of the inverter DC voltage 620V x 2 approximately 1 200V depending on a switching speed of the inverter elements and wiring conditions Surge voltage an rnin 1i A 3 EN power source O Figure C 1 Voltage Wave Shapes of Individual Portions A measured example in Figure C 2 illustrates the relation of a peak value of the motor terminal voltage with a wiring length between the inverter and the motor From this it can be confirmed that the peak value of the motor terminal voltage ascends as the wiring length increases and becomes saturated at about twice the inverter DC voltage The shorter a pulse rise time becomes the higher the motor terminal voltage rises even in the case of a short wiring length C 2 C 3 trz0 1 us IGBT corresponds to ir 7 0 1 to 0 3 ps Bipolar transistor corresponds to tr 0 3 to 1 ps The case when an output reactor and or a filter Rise
351. ve frequency in order to keep the motor speed within the specified level between the peak and bottom frequencies Related function codes F15 F16 and H64 G 3 Glossary Frequency resolution The minimum step or increment in which output frequency is varied rather than continuously Function code Code to customize the inverter Setting function codes realizes the potential capability of the inverter to meet it for the individual power system applications Gain for frequency setting A frequency setting gain enables varying the slope of the output of the frequency set with an analog input signal Related function codes C32 C34 C37 and C39 IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor Stands for Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor that enables the inverter section to switch high voltage current DC power in very high speed and to output pulse train Interphase unbalance A condition of an AC input voltage supply voltage that states the voltage balance of each phase in an expression as Interphase voltage unbalance _ Max voltage V Min voltage V j 3 phase average voltage V x67 Inverse mode operation A mode of operation in which the output frequency lowers as the analog input signal level rises Jogging operation A special operation mode of inverters in which a motor jogs forward or reverse for a short time at a slower speed than usual operating modes Related function codes F03 C20 and H5
352. verter running at 7 kHz or more 5 This protective operation can be cancelled by function code H98 H98 S Accuracy Stability Analog setting 40 2 of maximum frequency at 25 10 C me 50 F xz Digital setting 0 01 of maximum frequency at 10 to 50 C 14 to 122 F amp Setting resolution Analog setting 1 1000 of maximum frequency e g 0 06 Hz at 60 Hz 0 4 Hz at 400 Hz a includes the built in potentiometer on the keypad Keypad setting 0 01 Hz 99 99 Hz or less 0 1 Hz 100 0 Hz or more Setting with A IS keys Link setting Selectable from 2 types 1 20000 of maximum frequency e g 0 003 Hz at 60 Hz 0 02 Hz at 400 Hz 0 01 Hz fixed Control method Iit control Simplified torque vector control Voltage frequency Possible to sel output voltage at base frequency and at maximum frequency F03 to FOS characteristics common specifications Three phase 230 V single phase 230 V 80 to 240 V Three phase 460 V 160 to 500 V AVR control can be turned ON or OFF Factory setting OFF x Non linear vit pattern u point Desired voltage and frequency can be set H50 H51 Torque boost Torque boost can be set with the function code F09 F09 F37 Sets when 0 1 3 or 4 is selected at F37 Load selection Select application load type with the function code F37 F09 F37 0 Variable torque load increasing in proportion to the square of speed 1 Constant torque load 2 Auto torque boost 3 Auto energy s
353. witch a U m Q I S o Z 77 m Commands assigned at digital input terminals me ss a g o m a e oN m ye g o S o S ob A N ss un E Ss E g o O Command Command name Run forward command Run reverse command Multistep frequency selection ACC DEC time selection 3 wire operation stop command Functions FWD CM ON The motor runs forward FWD CM OFF The motor decelerates and stops When the FWD CM and REV CM are simultaneously ON the inverter immediately decelerates and stops the motor This command can be set only for terminals FWD and REV REV CM ON The motor runs reverse REV CM OFF The motor decelerates and stops When FWD CM and REV CM are simultaneously ON the inverter immediately decelerates and stops the motor This command can be set only for terminals FWD and REV Select 2 0 and 1 step multi frequency running Select 4 0 to 3 step multi frequency running Select 8 0 to 7 step multi frequency running Multistep frequency 0 indicates the frequency set by the keypad built in potentiometer or analog signal Multistep frequency Assigns the commands SS1 SS2 and SS4 to terminals X1 X2 and X3 respectively X1 CM ON Acceleration and deceleration time 2 is effective X1 CM OFF Acceleration and deceleration time 1 is effective
354. y of a moving object When an object with moment of inertia J kg m rotates at a speed N r min its kinetic energy is as J g p gy follows J 2n Nj E J 7 12 5 zo VJ 7 12 z J N J 7 12 TUT UN J 7 12 When this object is decelerated to a speed N r min the output energy is as follows _J 22 N 2m N1 zl J J 7 13 J N N D 7 13 1824 The energy regenerated to the inverter as shown in Figure 7 9 is calculated from the reduction gear efficiency ngand motor efficiency tyas follows zu 553 ie no u Ne N O 7 14 e m m m O d Z O Q a gt gt O 4 O E gt Z U z lt m A 4 m A O b gt Q a m n 7 11 7 1 3 4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor In case of the load which is repeatedly and very frequently driven by a motor the load current fluctuates largely and enters the short time rating range of the motor repeatedly Therefore you have to review the thermal allowable rating of the motor The heat value is assumed to be approximately proportional to the square of the load current If an inverter drives a motor in duty cycles that are much shorter than the thermal time constant of the motor calculate the equivalent RMS current as mentioned below and select the motor so that this RMS current will not exceed the rated current of the motor NMAX Motor speed qmm n s ir t t2 ita t4 its te Load tor
355. ypical motors rated in HP Hz Fuji standard 6 series motors Hz Other motors Hz The 230 V and 460 V of motors share the same data listed above C Note and P codes Motor parameters should be also set consistently To compensate slip of a motor correctly the rated voltage at base frequency F05 c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Motor Selection Selects the motor to be used Data for P99 Fuji standard motors 8 series GE motors Fuji standard motors 6 series Other motors In order to perform automatic control features such as the auto torque boost auto energy saving and slip compensation or electronic thermal overload protection for the motor the inverter invokes the rated values and properties ofthe motor To match the drive properties between the inverter and motor set the motor properties to this code and set function code H03 Initialize data to 2 to initialize the motor parameter This action automatically updates the data of function codes P03 and P09 and the constants used inside the inverter When using a Fuji standard motor select the data listed below according to the model P99 0 for Fuji standard 8 series motors current models P99 3 for Fuji standard 6 series motors conventional models For motors from other manufacturers or unknown models set P99 to 4 Other motors Cnote If P99 is set to 4
356. z det dt ete tei dl tteiedt a hber 8 6 8 2 2 Braking resistor built in type ener nennen nene tenerent 8 7 8 221 Three phase 230 Voss d ovest eoe e ade e oe os d EL EUR 8 7 8 2 2 2 Three phase 460 V sss eren enne n rere tenet entren retener nennen 8 8 8 3 Common Specifications ERR REPE RR t RENE INE e ee ege ee 8 9 8 4 Terminal Specifications 0 ccceccessesseesseeceeseesseeecesecnsecnecnaecnaeceaecaeeeaeecaeeeneeseeeaeseaeseeeereneenaecseeeaeeenes 8 11 8 4 1 Terminal functions nere eb P ege i Rad 8 11 8 4 2 Terminal block arrangement ener enne enne enn 8 23 8 4 3 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications essen 8 24 843 L Maincircut terminals eode enit ii ERE HR E e i aie redes 8 24 8 4 3 2 Control circuit terminal isc secet iae diee rere ee E E e E ERE ES 8 25 8 5 Operating Environment and Storage Environment essen 8 26 8 5 1 Operating environment eene ee FG RYE d Re dea de E eT Re HR ERA 8 26 8 52 Storage environmetit sn Se eee a ie ned n bte icet duet eese e bet edens 8 27 9 532 c Temporary StOFage a eoe etate ee e bee tete i iae 8 27 5 5 2 2 Eongzsterm stOtage i oet nee sere nre ue e dee ehe E ee aee IN eR dene eite des 8 27 8 6 External DIMENSIONS a eno e ERR ep b Rede E P EE ep ER DABIS ens 8 28 8 6 1 Standard models and models available on order braking resistor built in type 8 28 8 6 2 Models available on ord

Mini User Manual MEHT530

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents